Keyence Programming

7/18/2019 Keyence Programming

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/keyence-programming 1/392

User's Manual

Visual KV Series

3

Programming

96M0366

How this manual is organized:

The Visual KV Series User’s Manual is composed of 3 separatemanuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.

Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.



Safety Precautions

This instruction manual describes the operation and function of th

Read this manual carefully to ensure safe use and maximum perKV Series PLC.

Symbols

The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure messages carefully.

Failure to follow instructions may lead to inshock, burn, etc.)

Failure to follow instructions may lead to p

Provides additional information on proper

Conventions

This manual describes the operation/function of all Keyence KV SNote following conventions when you use.

General Precautions

• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functiomance of the KV Sereis PLC.

• We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to in the event a problem occurs.

• Do not open or modify the KV Series PLC or use it in any wayscribed in the specifications.

Wh th KV S i PLC i d i bi ti ith th i

WARNING

CAUTION

Note:

Visual KV (Series) KV-10AR/AT/DR/DT KV-16AR/AT/DKV-10xx, 16xx, 24xx, 40xx KV-24AR/AT/DR/DT KV-40AR/AT/D

Conventional KV (Series) KV-10R(W)/T(W) KV-16R(W)/T(

KV-300 (Series) KV-24R(W)/T(W) KV-40R(W)/T(KV-10/80 (Series) KV-80R(W)/T(W)KV-300



Note to User

When using the Visual KV Series in the following cond

sure to use the Visual KV Series with sufficient marginfunctions, take appropriate safety precautions such assales personnel if any questions arise.

• Use in conditions or environments not described in

• Use for nuclear power control, railway facilities, aircombustion devices, medical equipment, amusemement, etc.

• Use for applications where large effects are predicand properties and safety is especially requested.

Restriction on Acquiring the CE Marking

Restriction to be compatible with EMC directive

• When using a relay output type unit (whose modelspark killers having the appropriate withstand voltaoutput terminals in parallel to contacts (because th

contact becomes open and noise is generated). In following models of spark killers.

XEB0101 0.1 µF-10 Ω manufactured by OKAYA D

The following 1-turn ferrite core is added to the AC40AR/T, the KV-24AR/T and to the DC power inpu

ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK

Note: The contents above do not by themselves ensumanufactured in accordance with the above contents directives.

You must judge by yourself whether or not the entire mEMC directives because compatibility may change deconfiguration, wiring and location inside of the machin

Restriction on compatibility with low-voltage d

• Use insulated type crimp-style terminals.

• For wiring materials, use lead wires whose sheath

• The Visual KV Series is allowed to be installed in a(Spacers for expansion units are not available.)

• Be sure to use the Visual KV Series inside the con



Features of the Visual KV Series

Extremely small

The Visual KV Series is the smallest in the world among AC twith screw terminal blocks, and saves installation space.

Extremely fast

The minimum scan time is 140 µs and minimum instruction exµs, which is the fastest control in its class.

AC power built-in type newly added

AC power built-in type units are newly added. This type can bspaces where a switching power supply unit cannot be installe

Excellent Access Window

An Access Window with two-color backlight is adopted in all mchanging and monitoring of device data. Changing between RPROGRAM mode, checking the error code when an error hasbe performed in a Visual KV Series unit without the need for aprogrammer.

The analog trimmer, which has been popular in the conventiodigitized to enable more detail settings. [Digital trimmers]

User message setting function

In the Access Window, 256 different user messages can be dfunction can be used to give instructions on works on the prodabnormalities in the units, etc.

Program write in RUN modeLadder programs can be changed even while the system is ru

Equipped with two serial ports

Visual KV Series basic units are equipped with two serial porteral units, improving the debug environment.(The KV-10xx is equipped with only one serial port.)

Easy Ramp-up/down control function

The one-axis motor control function is offered separately fromcounters so that feedback control is enabled.

Equipped with two 24-bit high-speed 30 kHz, two-phase c

The Visual KV Series is equipped with two high-speed countepoint comparator output function that enables high speed enc



Interrupt function

The Visual KV Series is equipped with four high-sp10 µs maximum.

Input time constant change function

The time constant can be set in 7 steps from 10 µs

Double memory backup functions

In addition to a conventional SRAM battery backupis also equipped with an EEPROM backup function

Compatibility with Conventional KV Series PThe Visual KV Series functions as a high-end compatKV Series. Peripheral units of the conventional KV Sesoftware "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILhandheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can be used sinceSeries.However, it should be noted that the contents have ch

• The internal clock cycle of high-speed counters coµs, and 100 µs.

• The time constant for an input relay specified by th

• The analog trimmer function is set with the Accessunit.

• The available device setting range of the TMIN ins[Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can display 0

• The RUN/PROGRAM LED is displayed in the Accefront face of the basic unit.

• Transistor output is not independent, but is commo

• With the transistor type, the output terminal layout

• The specifications for output current of transistor omA.

• Conventional KV Series expansion units are not avthe Visual KV Series.

• The channel setting switch is not provided for expdetermined in connection order.

• Scans in expansion I/O units are not synchronous Series basic units.

• Assignment of special utility relays has partially ch



Cautions when using the previous version of ladder support s

Pay strict attention to the following items when using the ladder s

• When using the ladder support software "KV IncrediWare (DOBUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x", set the model to "KV-300".

• DM0 to DM1999 are only available.

When the ladder support software "LADDER BUILDER for Kused, do not use the monitor’s Change All function. If the Chis used, the basic unit may be damaged. Never use the Chan

Peripheral units and other units incompatible with the Visual K

Peripheral units in the conventional KV Series and other units shcompatible with the Visual KV Series.

• Expansion I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-8ER/88EYR/8EYT/16EYR/16EYT

• Analog I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-AD4/DA4

Cautions when Using the Serial PortThe KV-16xx/24xx/40xx units are equipped with two RJ-11 moduserial communication.When using them, pay strict attention to the following contents:

• Programs can be transferred and monitored using either comB. However, never connect the ladder software and a handhethe two ports at the same time.

• The KV-D20 operator interface panel can be connected to eitport A or B. However, only one KV-D20 unit can be connectedunit.

• Never leave both the KV-D20 operator interface panel and KVprogrammer on simultaneously for a long period of time.

CAUTION



How this manual is organized

The Visual KV Series User’s Manual is composed of 3 sepa

1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming. Please rrelevant to your purpose.

1 Installation

Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications [Visual KV Series

Describes the system configuration of the Visual KV Series, the naeach part, and the specifications.

Chapter 2 System Installation [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the installation and connection of each Visual KV Seriessystem maintenance.

Chapter 3 Access Window [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the Access Window used for changing and monitoring d

Chapter 4 KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel [Visual KV Series

Describes the KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel used for changingdisplaying the status of inside relays, timers, counters and data me

Chapter 5 KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware [KV-300, KV-10/80 Serie

Describes the hardware specifications and wirings for KV-300 and

Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer

Describes how to use the handheld programmer and memory card

Chapter 7 KV-L2 Serial Interface Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the serial interface modules for KV-300 Series.

Chapter 8 KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O module for KV-300 Series

Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit [KV-10/80 Series Only

Describes the optional Analog I/O unit for KV 10/80 Series



Chapter 2 Editor

Describes the operating procedures in Editor mode.

Chapter 3 Simulator

Describes the operating procedures in Simulator mode

Chapter 4 Monitor

Describes the operating procedures in Monitor mode.

Appendices

Includes instructions list, devices list, sample program operation and shortcuts.

3 Programming

Chapter 1 Programming

Describes basic knowledge including program creationrelay assignments, special functions to set and confirmwell as the extended ladder diagrams. Understand the

pletely at first before creating programs.

Chapter 2 Instructions

Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KV Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-183 for detaiRefer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-1counters used in the application instruction.

Chapter 3 Interrupts [Visual KV Series Only]

The interrupt processing function executes an interruptor request from the high-speed counter comparator (intduring KV operation.This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as encountered during interrupt processing.

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters [Visual KV Series O

Describes high-speed counters and high-speed countespeed pulse measurement and pulse output, independ

Chapter 5 Positioning Control [Visual KV Series Onl

Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors an



Contents

3 Programming

Chapter 1 Programming

1.1 Before Creating Programs .....................................................

1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation ..........................................1.1.2 Scan Time..................................................................................

Scan time ............................................................................Input response time delay ...................................................

1.2 User Memory ...........................................................................

1.2.1 Program Capacity ......................................................................Maximum number of lines in a program..............................Calculating the byte count used ..........................................

1.3 Device Configuration ..............................................................

1.3.1 Device List .................................................................................Relay list .............................................................................List of I/O relays in basic units ............................................List of relays in expansion units ..........................................

1.3.2 Relay No. ...................................................................................

Address No. ........................................................................Contact No. .........................................................................Channel No. ........................................................................

1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos..................................................................1.3.4 Input Relays ...............................................................................

Basic unit ............................................................................Expansion unit ....................................................................

1.3.5 Output Relays ............................................................................Output operation time .........................................................

1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays .................................................................

Retentive function of internal utility relays...........................1.3.7 Special Utility Relays .................................................................

Description ..........................................................................1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List ............................................................

Special relays and arithmetic operation flags .....................Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0) ...................Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1) ...................Other special utility relays ...................................................

1.3.9 Timers and Counters .................................................................Timer/Counter list ................................................................

Description ..........................................................................1.3.10 Data Memories ..........................................................................1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory ...........................................................1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions ..........................................................

1.4 Special Functions ...................................................................

1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function ......................................S tti th i t ti t t f b i it i i



Chapter 2 Instructions

2.1 Instruction List [Visual KV Series] ....................

2.1.1 Basic Instructions ....................................................2.1.2 Application Instructions ...........................................2.1.3 Arithmetic Instructions ............................................2.1.4 Interrupt Instructions ...............................................2.1.5 Function No. List (Alphabetical order) ....................

2.2 Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] .......

2.2.1 Basic Instructions ....................................................2.2.2 Application Instructions ...........................................2.2.3 Arithmetic Instructions ............................................2.2.4 Interrupt Instructions ...............................................

2.3 Convention Details ..............................................

2.4 Instruction Details ................................................

2.4.1 Basic Instructions ....................................................2.4.2 Application Instructions ...........................................2.4.3 Arithmetic Instructions ............................................

2.5 Programming Notes .............................................

Chapter 3 Interrupts

3.1 Interrupt Instructions ...........................................

3.2 Interrupt Processing ............................................

3.2.1 Interrupt Processing................................................3.2.2 Types of Interrupts ..................................................3.2.3 Interrupt Priority ......................................................3.2.4 Interrupt Program....................................................

3.3 Direct Input/Output ..............................................

3.3.1 Direct Input .............................................................

3.3.2 Direct Output...........................................................3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs ...................

3.4.1 Interrupt with a Signal Converter ............................3.4.2 Interrupt with a High-speed Counter .......................3.4.3 Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses ......3.4.4 Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes bet

Chapter 4 High-speed Counters

4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions .......................4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters .........................

4.2.1 High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter ComStructure of high-speed counters and high-speSpecifications of high-speed counters .............High-speed counter comparators .....................

4 2 2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters



4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function .............................4.5.2 Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output ..............4.5.3 Frequency Counter Function .....................................................4.5.4 Applications of Frequency Counters ..........................................

4.5.5 Cam Switch Function .................................................................Cam switch mode ...............................................................Multi-step comparator mode ...............................................Setting method ....................................................................

4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch Mode) ..................

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output ......................................................

4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output .........................................4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter Comparator

Changing the pulse period and width...................................

Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset value .Operation with special utility relays .....................................

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output ...............................

4.7.1 Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio .............4.7.2 Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF Ratio .....4.7.3 Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified Pulse Cou4.7.4 Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output (Ramp-up/down contro

Chapter 5 Positioning Control

5.1 Outline of Positioning Control ...............................................

5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control ..............................................................

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures .....................

5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure ....................................................5.2.2 Operating Procedure .................................................................

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function .........

5.3.1 Connection Example ..................................................................5.3.2 Tips ............................................................................................

5.3.3 Application Examples of the Positioning Control Function ........

Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Positioning Control KV-30

6.1 Interrupt Instructions ..............................................................

6.1.1 Description of Interrupts.............................................................Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine .Types of interrupt ................................................................

Interrupt priority ...................................................................Interrupt routine ...................................................................Direct output ........................................................................Direct input ..........................................................................

6.1.2 Interrupt Instructions ..................................................................

6.2 Direct Clock Pulse ...................................................................

6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse......................................................



7.2.2 Format of Commands/Responses ..........................7.2.3 Communication Command/Response List .............7.2.4 Setting Communication Commands and Response7.2.5 Other Response Codes ..........................................

7.2.6 Error Code List........................................................7.2.7 Example Program ...................................................

7.3 Loading Text Data ................................................

7.3.1 Receiving Text Data ...............................................7.3.2 Transmitting Text Data ...........................................7.3.3 Sample Program .....................................................

7.4 ASCII Code List ....................................................

Chapter 8 Programming Examples

8.1 List .................................................................

8.2 Details .................................................................

8.2.1 Reference Program Examples................................Basic Instructions .............................................Application Instructions ....................................Arithmetic Instructions......................................

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

1 Installation

Chapter 1 Configuration and Specifications

1.1 System Configuration ..........................................

1.1.1 System Configuration .............................................

1.2 Specifications .......................................................

1.2.1 General Specifications ............................................1.2.2 AC Power Specifications ........................................Visual KV Series operation at power interruptio

1.2.3 Performance Specifications ....................................Data backup function against instantaneous po

1.3 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units .......

1.3.1 Model of a Basic Unit ..............................................1.3.2 Common I/O Specifications ....................................

1.4 KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (10-I/O Basic Unit) ...

1.4.1 Part Names and Functions .....................................1.4.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagram

KV-10AR/DR (Relay output type) ....................KV-10AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) .....

1.4.3 AC Power Input (KV-10AR/AT(P)) ..........................1.4.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Rati1.4.5 Dimensions .............................................................



1.7.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................1.7.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams.................

KV-40AR/DR (Relay output type) .......................................KV-40AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ........................

1.7.3 AC Power Input (KV-40AR/AT(P)) .............................................1.7.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambien1.7.5 Dimensions ................................................................................

1.8 KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion Input Unit) ...........................

1.8.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................1.8.2 Input Specifications....................................................................1.8.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .............

KV-E4X (4-I/O expansion input unit) ...................................KV-E8X (8-I/O expansion input unit) ...................................

KV-E16X (16-I/O expansion input unit) ...............................1.8.4 Dimensions ................................................................................

1.9 KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion Output

1.9.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................1.9.2 Output Specifications .................................................................

KV-E4R/E8R/E16R (Relay output type) ..............................KV-E4T/E8T(P)/E16T(P) [Transistor output type (NPN/PNP

1.9.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .............KV-E4R [4-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] ...KV-E4T [4-I/O expansion output unit transistor output type)KV-E8R [8-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] ...KV-E8T(P) [8-I/O expansion output unit (transistor output tyKV-E16R [16-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)]KV-E16T(P) [16-I/O expansion input unit (transistor output)

1.9.4 Dimensions ................................................................................

1.10 KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O Unit) ................................

1.10.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................1.10.2 Input Specifications ....................................................................1.10.3 Output Specifications .................................................................

KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .............................................KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ..................................

1.10.4 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .............KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .............................................KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ..................................

1.10.5 Dimensions ................................................................................

1.11 KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel) ........................................

1.11.1 Part Names and Functions ........................................................1.11.2 General Specifications ...............................................................

1.11.3 Functional Specifications ...........................................................1.11.4 Dimensions ................................................................................

Chapter 2 System Installation

2.1 Installation Environment ........................................................

2.1.1 Installation Environment ............................................................



Clearing the input value when disconnecting...2.2.4 Transferring I/O Information between Expansion Un

When inputting .................................................In the case of output ........................................

2.3 Inspection and Maintenance ...............................2.3.1 Inspection ...............................................................2.3.2 Maintenance ...........................................................

Chapter 3 Access Window

3.1 Overview of the Access Window ........................

3.1.1 What is the Access Window ...................................3.1.2 Access Window Use Examples ..............................

3.2 Basic Operating Procedures ...............................3.2.1 Operation Mode ......................................................3.2.2 Access Window Modes...........................................3.2.3 Part Names and Functions of the Access Window .3.2.4 Selecting Modes and Setting/Resetting Key Lock ..3.2.5 Turbo Function........................................................

3.3 Digital Trimmer Mode ..........................................

3.3.1 Function and Operating Procedure.........................Key operation and screen display ....................

Function and operating procedure ...................3.4 Device Mode .........................................................

3.4.1 Function and Operating Procedure.........................Devices that can be displayed and changed ...Key operation and screen display ....................Selecting the device and displaying the currentChanging a numeric value ...............................Holding the setting ...........................................

3.4.2 Screen Display for Each Device Type ....................Data memory (DM) ..........................................Temporary data memory (TM) .........................Timer/counter (T/C) ..........................................High-speed counter comparator (CTC) ............Trimmer (TRM) ................................................Relay (RLY) .....................................................

3.5 System Mode ........................................................

3.5.1 Function and Operating Procedure.........................Key operation and screen display ....................LOAD mode and SAVE mode ..........................

Display in LOAD/SAVE mode ..........................

3.6 Message Display ..................................................

3.6.1 Error Messages and Error Status ...........................3.6.2 User Messages .......................................................

How to use the user messages........................

Ch t 4 KV D20 O t I t f P l



4.2.2 Connection with the KV Series ..................................................Connection ..........................................................................Precautions .........................................................................

4.2.3 Overview of the KV-D20 ............................................................

Switching the display mode ................................................Overview of each display mode ..........................................Assignment of relays/DM ....................................................Other functions ....................................................................Precautions about screen change function .........................

4.2.4 Operator Mode...........................................................................Screen selection in operator mode .....................................Operator screen ..................................................................Direct access screen ...........................................................KV-I/O monitor screen ........................................................

Switch comment screen ......................................................Lamp comment screen .......................................................Screen change permission in operator mode .....................

4.2.5 Device Mode ..............................................................................Device mode .......................................................................Operation example for device mode ...................................

4.2.6 System Mode .............................................................................System mode ......................................................................

4.3 Examples of Ladder Programs ..............................................

4.3.1 Basic Ladder Programs .............................................................Before creating ladder programs ........................................Basic ladder programs ........................................................

4.3.2 Examples of Ladder Programs ..................................................Example of displaying user messages ................................Example of displaying messages with titles ........................Example of position control .................................................Example of frequency counter ............................................Example of 24-bit high-speed counter ................................Example of cam switch function ..........................................

4.4 Appendix ..................................................................................

4.4.1 Troubleshooting .........................................................................4.4.2 Available Character List .............................................................4.4.3 Comment Draft Sheet ................................................................

Chapter 5 KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware KV-

5.1 System Configuration .............................................................

5.1.1 KV-300 .......................................................................................

5.1.2 KV-10/80 ....................................................................................5.2 Module/Unit Specifications ....................................................

5.2.1 Wiring: KV-U4 Power Supply Module ........................................Parts and functions .............................................................

5.2.2 Wiring: KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ...........................Parts and functions .............................................................

5 2 3 Wiring: KV 300 CPU



5.3.6 Connecting the AC Power Supply Module and DC PowKV-U4 AC Power Supply Module ....................KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module .............

5.3.7 I/O Connectors........................................................

KV-300 CPU ....................................................KV-C16X/C32X ................................................KV-C32T/B16R/B16S ......................................KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T ..............

5.3.8 I/O Terminal Modules: Communication Cables and Transmission distance by cable type ...............Connection patterns .........................................Incorrect wiring patterns ...................................Power distribution ............................................

5.3.9 Connector Assembly Instructions ...........................

5.3.10 KV-300 CPU I/O Indicators .....................................5.3.11 KV-10/80 Expansion Units ......................................5.3.12 Mounting Environment ............................................

Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer

6.1 Using the Handheld Programmer .......................

6.1.1 Outline of the Handheld Programmer .....................6.1.2 Precautions .............................................................

6.2 Basic Operations .................................................6.2.1 Basic Programming Operation................................

6.3 Functions ..............................................................

Function Nos. list .............................................ALL CLEAR......................................................HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR.............COUNTER CLEAR ..........................................HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR ...................ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR ..........................

ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET ...................PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED ..................OFFLINE EDITOR START ..............................OFFLINE EDITOR STOP ................................TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGTIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE ..........RELAY ON/OFF...............................................WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY ........................READ TRIMMER SETTING.............................SYNTAX CHECK .............................................

PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK......................6.4 Memory Card ........................................................

6.4.1 Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)] ..........................6.4.2 Storage Capacity ....................................................

CLEAR .............................................................NEW.................................................................ACCS



7.3.4 Connecting to External Units .....................................................Connecting to An External Display .....................................Connecting to an IBM PC-AT Computer .............................Connecting to the KV-10/16/24/40/80 .................................

Connecting KV-L2s .............................................................7.4 Software Setup ........................................................................

7.4.1 Using KV Software [KV IncrediWare (DOS)] .............................Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS) from the KV-L2 ...................................

7.5 KV Mode Programming ..........................................................

7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode ...............................................................Communications protocol ...................................................

7.5.2 Serial Communications Procedure ............................................Command transmission procedure .....................................

Command/response format ................................................Communications commands and responses ......................Communications commands ...............................................

7.5.3 Transmission and Reception of Text Data .................................Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .........Transmitting Text Data ........................................................Receiving text data .............................................................ASCII code/binary conversion function ...............................Example program................................................................

7.6 Display Interface Mode Programming..................................

7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode .........................................Communications protocols ..................................................Communications control procedure ....................................

7.6.2 Command and Response Format ..............................................7.6.3 Commands and Responses ......................................................

List of commands and responses .......................................Description of commands and responses ...........................End codes ...........................................................................

7.7 Non-procedure Mode Programming .....................................

7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode ............................................Communications protocol ...................................................Connecting to the KV-L2 .....................................................

7.7.2 Assignment of Relay Nos. and Data Memory Address Nos. .....Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .........

7.7.3 Transmitting Text Data ..............................................................Data transmission and internal data memory addresses ....

7.7.4 Receiving Text Data ..................................................................Format of received data and data memory addresses .......

7.7.5 ASCII code/Binary Conversion Function ...................................7.8 Troubleshooting Guide ..........................................................

7.8.1 Troubleshooting .........................................................................7.8.2 Precautions ................................................................................

7.9 Specifications ..........................................................................

7.9.1 Specifications.............................................................................G l ifi ti



8.3.2 Removing the Terminal Block .................................8.3.3 Example of Voltage I/O Wiring ................................8.3.4 Example of Current I/O Wiring ................................8.3.5 Setting I/O Ranges .................................................

8.4 Programming ........................................................8.4.1 Input Characteristics (A/D) ......................................8.4.2 Calculating Input Data (A/D) ...................................8.4.3 Output Characteristics (D/A) ...................................8.4.4 Calculating Output Data (D/A) ................................8.4.5 Assigning Data Memory (DM) Addresses...............8.4.6 Reading Analog Input .............................................8.4.7 Measuring Analog Input Average ...........................8.4.8 Writing Analog Output.............................................8.4.9 Converting Analog Input to Analog Output .............

8.5 KV-AN6 Appendices ............................................

8.5.1 Troubleshooting ......................................................8.5.2 Precautions .............................................................8.5.3 Specifications..........................................................

Environmental specifications ...........................System specifications ......................................

8.5.4 Dimensions .............................................................

Chapter 9 KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit

9.1 Outline .................................................................

Features ...........................................................

9.2 Configuration .......................................................

9.2.1 Part Names and Functions .....................................KV-AD4 ............................................................KV-DA4 ............................................................

9.2.2 Specifications..........................................................KV-AD4 ............................................................

KV-DA4 ............................................................9.2.3 System Configuration .............................................

9.3 Installation ............................................................

9.3.1 Installation Procedure .............................................9.3.2 Checking the Installation Environment ...................9.3.3 Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode..............................

Setting the input mode .....................................9.3.4 Connecting External Instruments............................

Wiring ...............................................................

Wiring diagrams ...............................................9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80................................9.3.6 Maintenance ...........................................................

Inspection and Cleaning ..................................

9.4 Programming ........................................................

9.4.1 Programming the KV-AD4 ......................................A/D Conversion Mechanism



Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.1 Error List ..................................................................................

10.1.1 List of Error Codes in Basic Units ..............................................

10.1.2 Error indication in Expansion Units ............................................10.1.3 Program Errors ..........................................................................10.1.4 Memory Card Errors and Other Errors ......................................

10.2 Replacing Relays ....................................................................

Replacement procedure ......................................................

10.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................

10.3.1 Troubleshooting List ..................................................................

10.4 Error Messages .......................................................................

Appendices

Appendix A. Specifications and Dimensions [Visual KV Series]

A.1 System Specifications [Visual KV Series] ..................................Hardware ............................................................................Software and Programming ................................................AC power supply unit ..........................................................

A.2 Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ................................Input specifications .............................................................

Output specifications (relay output): KV-10AR/DR, KV-16AKV-24AR/DR, and KV-40AR/DR.........................................Output specifications (transistor output): KV-10AT(P)/DT(PKV-16AT(P)/DT(P), KV-24AT(P)/DT(P), and KV-40AT(P)/D

A.3 Expansion Unit Specifications ...................................................A.4 Dimensions ................................................................................

Appendix B. Specifications and Dimensions [KV-300 Series] ....

B.1 System Specifications [KV-300 Series] .....................................Hardware ............................................................................

Software and Programming ................................................AC Power supply module/DC power distribution module ...B.2 Module Specifications ................................................................

KV-300 CPU .......................................................................KV-C16X/C32X Input Modules ...........................................KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Output Modules ..............................KV-R8X/R16X I/O Terminal Modules ..................................KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules................KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules (RUN OutKV-R1A I/O Distribution Module .........................................

B.3 Dimensions ................................................................................Appendix C. Ladder Program List .................................................

Appendix D. A/D and D/A Conversion Tables [KV-AN6] ................

Voltage conversion table .....................................................Current conversion table .....................................................




1.4.1 Preparation for installation ......................................1.4.2 Installation Procedure .............................................

Installation in Windows 95 ...............................Installation in Windows 3.1 ..............................

1.5 Cautions for Use ..................................................

1.6 Basic Operations .................................................

1.6.1 Program creation flow and available modes ...........1.6.2 Starting up and exiting from the software ...............1.6.3 Screen ....................................................................1.6.4 Mouse operation and keyboard operation ..............1.6.5 Online Help .............................................................

Chapter 2 Editor

2.1 Outline of the Editor Functions ..........................

2.1.1 Cautions for editing ladder programs......................

2.2 Edit Screen ...........................................................

2.2.1 Name and function of each part of the screen ........2.2.2 Ladder program window screen .............................

2.3 File Management ..................................................

2.3.1 Creating a new file ..................................................2.3.2 Setting the automatic file read function ...................

2.3.3 Setting automatic file save for the file .....................2.3.4 Saving and reading files .........................................2.3.5 Reading and saving a file in another format ...........2.3.6 Saving a ladder diagram in text format ...................2.3.7 Verifying files ..........................................................

2.4 Entering/Deleting Symbols and Connection Line

2.4.1 Entering symbols ....................................................2.4.2 Deleting symbols ....................................................2.4.3 Entering contacts/coils directly ...............................

2.4.4 Changing the device at the current cursor position2.4.5 Entering/Deleting connection lines .........................2.4.6 Canceling edit operations .......................................

2.5 Entering Comments/Labels ...............................

2.5.1 Editing comments/labels .........................................2.5.2 Editing line comments.............................................2.5.3 Changing ladder lines into comments.....................

2.6 Edit and Arrangement ........................................

2.6.1 Copy, move, and delete ..........................................

2.6.2 Inserting and deleting lines .....................................2.7 Jump, Search, and Replace ...............................

2.7.1 Jump .......................................................................2.7.2 Searching for instruction words/operands ..............2.7.3 Searching for the device at the cursor position.......2.7.4 Replacing operands ................................................2 7 5 Converting a/b contacts



2.13.1 Printing .......................................................................................2.13.2 Preview display ..........................................................................

2.14 Changing the Display Color on the Screen ..........................

2.14.1 Changing display colors on the screen ......................................

Chapter 3 Simulator

3.1 Outline of the Simulator Functions .......................................

3.1.1 Outline of the functions ..............................................................3.1.2 Restrictions in the simulator .......................................................

3.2 Starting up and Exiting from the Simulator ..........................

3.2.1 Operating procedure for startup and exit ...................................3.2.2 Name and function of each part of the screen ...........................

3.3 Ladder Monitor ........................................................................

3.3.1 Outline of the ladder monitor .....................................................3.3.2 Executing scans.........................................................................3.3.3 Executing steps .........................................................................3.3.4 Jump and search .......................................................................3.3.5 Stop/reset and device all clear...................................................

3.4 Monitor All ...............................................................................

3.4.1 Outline of monitor all ..................................................................3.4.2 Displaying, saving, and reading the monitor all window ............

3.4.3 Monitor all window .....................................................................3.4.4 Registering devices ...................................................................3.4.5 Selecting and changing devices ................................................

3.5 Registration Monitor ...............................................................

3.5.1 Outline of the registration monitor ..............................................3.5.2 Displaying, saving, and reading the registration monitor ...........3.5.3 Registration monitor window......................................................3.5.4 Registering devices ...................................................................3.5.5 Selecting and changing devices ................................................

3.5.6 Manipulating timing charts .........................................................3.5.7 Printing out the registration monitor ...........................................

Chapter 4 Monitor

4.1 Outline of the Monitor Functions ..........................................

4.1.1 Outline of the functions ..............................................................4.1.2 Restrictions in the monitor .........................................................4.1.3 Precautions for communication .................................................

4.2 Communicating with the PLC ................................................4.2.1 Setting the PLC communication parameters .............................4.2.2 Setting the comment transfer .....................................................

4.3 Starting up and Exiting from the Monitor .............................

4.3.1 Operating procedures for startup and exit .................................4.3.2 Name and function of each part of the screen ...........................

4 4 L dd M it



Appendices

Appendix A Error Message List .................................

A-1 System errors .........................................................

A-2 Memory errors ........................................................A-3 File errors................................................................A-4 Installation errors ....................................................A-5 Errors that occur in the editor .................................A-6 Errors that occur in the monitor/simulator ...............A-7 Communication errors (displayed in the monitor) ...A-8 PLC errors ..............................................................A-9 Errors that occur during compilation .......................

Appendix B Instruction List .......................................

B-1 Basic instructions ....................................................B-2 Application instructions ...........................................B-3 Arithmetic instructions.............................................B-4 Interrupt instructions ...............................................

Appendix C Relay No. List ..........................................

C-1 Relays, timers, counters, and memory numbers for

Appendix D Special Utility Relay List ........................

D-1 Special relays and arithmetic operation flags .........D-2 Special utility relays for high-speed counter (0) ......

D-3 Special utility relays for high-speed counter (1) ......D-4 Other special utility relays .......................................D-5 Memory switches ....................................................D-6 Special memory list .................................................

Appendix E Devices for KV-10R(W)/T(W) to 80R(W)/T

E-1 Special utility relays ................................................E-2 Memory switches ....................................................E-3 Special memory list .................................................

Appendix F Sample Program List .............................

F-1 Description of sample ladder programs ..................Appendix G Quick Reference .....................................

G-1 Editor ......................................................................G-2 Simulator .................................................................G-3 Monitor ....................................................................

Appendix H Notes for Programming .........................

H-1 Circuits that must be modified ................................H-2 Precautions for programming .................................H-3 Programs which cannot be decompiled ..................

Appendix I List of Files Used ....................................

Appendix J Countermeasures for Frequent Commu





See 3-367.

Caution• No part of this manual may be reprinted or reproduced in any

means without the prior written permission of KEYENCE COR

• The content of this manual is subject to change without notice

• KEYENCE has thoroughly checked and reviewed this manuathe sales office listed at the end of this manual if you have ancomments regarding this manual or if you find an error.

• KEYENCE assumes no liability for damages resulting from thmation in this manual, item 3 above notwithstanding.

• KEYENCE will replace any incomplete or incorrectly collated

All company names and product names in this manual are registtrademarks of their respective owners.



Chapter 1

Programming

This chapter describes basic knowledge including prodevice configuration, relay assignments, special functKV Series operations, as well as the extended ladder

contents described here completely at first before crea For a detailed description of instructions, refer to "2.4. Instructio

1.1 Before Creating Programs ................1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation ............1.1.2 Scan Time ...................................................

1.2 User Memory ......................................1.2.1 Program Capacity .......................................

1.3 Device Configuration .........................1.3.1 Device List...................................................1.3.2 Relay No. ....................................................1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos. ..................................1.3.4 Input Relays ................................................1.3.5 Output Relays .............................................1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays ..................................1.3.7 Special Utility Relays ...................................1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List ..............................1.3.9 Timers and Counters...................................1.3.10 Data Memories ............................................1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory ............................1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions ...........................

1.4 Special Functions ..............................1 4 1 Input Time Constant Change Function

1 1 Before Creating Programs



1.1 Before Creating Programs

1

1.1 Before Creating Programs

This section describes what you should know before creating pro

tions for the Visual KV Series.

1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation

This section describes an overview of program creation procedurand setting items.In the example described below, a latch circuit is created as a proKV Series.

Introduction

Examining contents of operations

Figure 1 shows a latch circuit which operates as follows.

Pushbutton switch PB1: ONPushbutton switch PB2: OFF

Pilot lamp (PL) turns on.

Pushbutton switch PB1: OFF

Pushbutton switch PB2: OFF

Pilot lamp (PL) remainslit even if PB1 turnsOFF.

Pushbutton switch PB1: OFFPushbutton switch PB2: ON

Pilot lamp (PL) goes outwhen PB2 is set to ON.

Time chartON

OFF

ON

OFF

PLON

OFF

PB1 contact

PB2 contact

Fig. 1PB1 = N.O. contPB2 = N.C. cont

PB1 PB2

Next, a program is created that will use the same operation as this circuit to co

Program examination

Circuit 1 shows relay symbols for the latch circuit.Examine which contact in the Visual KV Series is used for each pushbutton swi(Table 1). When many I/O devices are required for control, expansion units sho

Circuit 1

PL

RL

RL

RL

PB1 PB2

Relay (coil)Relay (contact)

Relay (contact)Pilot lamp

Table 1

I/O device

Pushbutton switch PB1 (N.O. contact)Pushbutton switch PB2 (N.C. contact)

Relay RL

Pilot lamp PL



1.1.2 Scan Time

Scan time

The Visual KV Series repeatedly executes a ladder baas follows.

The duration of time required to perform one cycle is ctime). The scan time varies based on program size anprogram.

Input response time delay

In addition to the I/O processing time, there is also an KV Series caused by the scan time. The input time deinput status can only be read during the input processchanged after input processing, the changed contentsnext scan time.

In the figure below, 1 and 2 can be read but 3 cannot

Input processingWrites the ON/OFF status memory before executing t

Program execution

Reads the ON/OFF status timer, counter, etc.) based arithmetic operations.Writes the arithmetic opera

Output processingOutputs the contents of the

ON

OFF

1 2 Input signal

Read Read

Outputprocess

ing

Inputprocessing

Programexecution

Scan time

Outputprocess

ing

Inputprocessing

Programexecution

Scan time

Outputprocess

ing

Inputprocessing

Prograexecut

1.2 User Memory



y

1

1.2 User Memory

This section describes the allowable size (capacity) of a programcreated in the Visual KV Series.

1.2.1 Program Capacity

When a user program is created for the Visual KV Series, the masteps a program can contain using the mnemonic diagram variescount of the instructions used. The instruction byte count is deterfor each instruction.

For more about byte counts for each instruction, refer to "2.1 Instruction List

Maximum number of lines in a program

In the KV-10xx/16xx, a program with approximately 2,000 steps cthe KV-24xx/40xx, a program with approximately 4,000 steps can

• Total byte count of the memory used by instructions ≤ 6,0bytes

• Total byte count of the memory used by objects of instrubytes / 24,000 bytes

* In the description above, a value on the left side indicates tthe KV-10xx/16xx, while a value on the right side indicatesthe KV-24xx/40xx.

* The memory occupied by objects indicates the memory reqprogram when operation is started.

For example, the allowable number of steps to be written can be memory occupied by the instructions as follows.

12,000 bytes / 3 bytes (average byte count of an instructio

Note: If either the memory occupied by the instructions or the meobjects of a program exceeds the specified memory capacity, thebe written or executed.

Calculating the byte count used

The byte count used in this program can be calculated as shown

T0000500

0000

0500

#00020 T000



1.3 Device Configuration

"Device" is a general name for relays, registers, etc. p

This section describes the available devices in the Visgeneral use.

1.3.1 Device List

Relay list

Note 1: The ON/OFF status of the set functions is alwtion mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN. Howe

.oNyaleR esulamroN deeps-hgiH

)1(esu )2(esudeeps-hgiH

0000

syalertupnItupnitceriD()aeradewolla

stupnitpurretnI3TNIot0TNI

noisrevniytiraloP()dewolla

serutpactupnI

oitcnufyehTorhtsretnuoc

.01-VK1000

2000

3000

4000

syalertupnI

deeps-hgiHtupni0retnuoc

deeps-hgiH0retnuoc esahpA

tupni5000

deeps-hgiHtupni1retnuoc

deeps-hgiH1retnuoc

6000

–

deeps-hgiH0retnuoc esahpB

tupni7000

deeps-hgiH1retnuoc

8000 deeps-hgiH

0retnuoc teserPtupni

9000 deeps-hgiH

1retnuoc

5140ot0100 syalertupnI

0050

syalertuptuOtuptuotceriD()aeradewolla

tuptuo0retnuocdeeps-hgiH

1050deeps-hgiH

1retnuoctuptuo

ycneuqerfdeificepStuptuoeslup

2050 tuptuolortnocnwod / pu-pmaR

3050 –

5190ot4050 syalertuptuO

5191ot0001 syalerytilitulanretnI

5182ot0002 syalerytilitulaicepS

5192ot0092 syalerytilitulaicepS EKH

51971ot0003 syalerytilitulanretnI




1

List of relays in expansion units

Input units

Output units

I/O units

noitcennoC

redro

X4E-VK X8E-VK

42/61/01-VK 04-VK 42/61/01-VK 04-VK 1-VK

tupnits1eludom

301ot001 302ot002 701ot001 702ot002 001

tupnidn2eludom

302ot002 303ot003 702ot002 703ot003 002

tupnidr3eludom

303ot003 304ot004 703ot003 704ot004 003

tupniht4eludom

304ot004 704ot004 004

noitcennoCredro

R/)P(T4E-VK R/)P(T8E-VK

tuptuots1eludom

306ot006 706ot006

tuptuodn2eludom

307ot007 707ot007

tuptuodr3eludom

308ot008 708ot008

tuptuoht4eludom

309ot009 709ot009

noitcennoC

redro

)P(T/RX4E-VK

syalertupnI ptuO42/61/01-VK 04-VK 42/61/01-VK

tupnits1eludom

301ot001 302ot002

tupnidn2eludom

302ot002 303ot003

tupnidr3eludom

303ot003 304ot004

tupniht4

eludom 304ot004tuptuots1

eludom 606ot306

tuptuodn2eludom

307ot307

tuptuodr3308t308



1.3.2 Relay No.

The relay No. configuration is shown below.

Address No.

Address Nos. are assigned to basic units, input expanunits, and I/O expansion units. Zero to 4 are assignedassigned to output units. Address Nos. assigned in a of I/O terminals and the connection position of the uni

* 2 to 4 in KV-40xx

Address No. assignment procedure

• The address No. is represented as a number 0 to 9• Address Nos. 0 to 4 are provided for inputs, while vided for outputs.

1 2 5 1 5Channel No.

Contact No.(00 to 15)

Address No.

(Input: 0 to 4, output: 5 to 9)

ModelKV-10xx

Basic unitsKV-16xx

KV-24xx

KV-40xx

kV-E4X

Input expansion units KV-E8X

KV-E16X

KV-E4R/E4T(P)

Output expansion units KV-E8R/E8T(P)

KV-E16R/E16T(P)

I/O expansion units KV-E4XR/E4XT(P)




1

Contact No.

• Contact Nos. are input/output terminal Nos. of basic units, inpoutput expansion units, and I/O expansion units.

• The contact No. is represented as a number 0 to 15.

Example

In the KV-E4X, with 4 input terminals, the contact Nos. are 0 tE16T(P), with 16 input terminals, the contact Nos. are 0 to 15

• In a unit with 16 or more terminals, the contact No. of the 17th0 and its address No. is increased by 1.

Example

In the KV-40AR, with 40 terminals (24 input and 16 output terNo. 0 is assigned to input terminal Nos. 1 to 16 and address Ninput terminal Nos. 17 to 24

Channel No.

The channel No. is the higher order digit in the contact No.

1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos.

When assigning relay Nos., the unit No. is based on the connectunit, and the address No. is determined based on the unit type a

With the connections above, the relay Nos. for each unit are assithe table below.

a) KV-16ARBasic unitInput: 10 points

Output: 6 points

b) KV-E4X Inputexpansionunit

Input: 4 points

c) KV-E8R Outputexpansion unitOutput: 8 points

Unit Assigned relay Nos.

a) KV-16AR 0000 to 0009 (input) and 0500 to 0505 (output)



1.3.4 Input Relays

Input relays receive ON/OFF signals sent from extern

Note 1: Input relays function as contacts in programs.coils (outputs).

Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.Orelay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.

Basic unit

Input relay time constant

Though the time constant is usually 10 ms ±20%, it cafollowing settings.

• When the HSP instruction is used: 10 µs ±20%

• While special utility relay 2813 remains ON, the tim7 steps by setting data memory DM1940 as follows

When DM1940 is set to 0: 10µs ±20%1: 20 µs ±20%

2: 500 µs ±20%3: 1 ms ±20%4: 2.5 ms ±20%5: 5 ms ±20%6: 10 ms ±20%Never set a numeric va

For more about changing the input time constant, refer to "1.4.Function" (p.3-23).

Hardware input (independent of scan time)

• High-speed counterWhen the time constant is set to 10 µs using the HDM1940 (only while special utility relay 2813 remaresponse of input relays 0004 and 0005 of CTH0 a

• INT instruction: 0000 to 0003This instruction can receive any signal without regathe signal ON time is longer than the input time co

"HSP instruction" (p.3-86), "INT instruction" (p.3-192), "4.1 High (p.3-204)

Note 1: While special utility relay 2813 remains ON, thifi d f ll i t l i b i it




1

Expansion unit

Input relay time constant

By setting special utility relays 2609 to 2612 to ON, the time cons

sion units can be set to 10 µs.

* Not available with the KV-40xx

1.3.5 Output Relays

Output relays output the program execution results to the outsidetypes of outputs, relay and transistor.

Note 1: Output relays function as contacts and relay coils in prog

Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.O. or N.C.) relay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.

Output operation time

• Transistor output

OFF ON: 50 µs or less (10 µs or less in 500 to 502)ON OFF: 250 µs or less (10 µs or less in 500 to 502, 100 µ

outputs in the basic unit)

• Relay outputOFF ON: 10 ms or lessON OFF: 10 ms or less

ytilitulaicepS.oNyaler

noitcnuF

*9062 tinunoisnapxetupnifotnatsnocemittupnI

5110ot0010.soNyalerhtiw FFO

0162 tinunoisnapxetupnifotnatsnocemittupnI



5130ot0030.soNyalerhtiw

FFO



epyttuptuorotsisnarT ptuoyaleR

)P(TD / )P(TA01-VK )P(TD / )P(TA61-VK RD / RA01-VK K

)P(TD / )P(TA42-VK )P(TD / )P(TA04-VK RD / RA42-VK K

T4E-VK )P(T8E-VK R4E-VK K

)P(T61E-VK )P(TX4E-VK R61E-VK K



1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays

In a relay circuit, when one relay contact is used twicemulti-pole relay with the same number of poles as the

Internal utility relays function only in programs, and elcircuits to facilitate circuit design.

Note 1: Internal utility relays function as contacts and

Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.Orelay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.

Retentive function of internal utility relays

Except for internal utility relays, all relays turn OFF whchanged or when operation is stopped via a power shrestarted, all relays remain OFF except relays whose ever, internal utility relays can be set using the MEMSnot they are to be retained. (Internal utility relays 2700retained.)

When an internal utility relay is set to be retained, its O

the power is turned off. By using the retained relay all relays which are set to be retained can be set to OFF.

For more about setting the memory switch, refer to "MEMSW in

Application example of a retentive function: Lift ve

Internal utility relays 1000 and 1001 are set to be retaWhen the upper/lower limit switch turns ON, the directinverted. Even if the power is turned off while the lift is

continues to move up (or down) when the power is tur

(0000)

(0500)

(0001)

Move-up

Upper limitswitch

Lower limitswitch

Move-down




1

1.3.7 Special Utility Relays

Each special utility relay has a unique function. By using special tively, programs can be simplified and program control improved

Note 1: A special utility relay can be used as many times as des

Note 2: Special utility relays dedicated for reading can be used acannot be used as outputs.

For more about relays dedicated for reading, refer to "1.3.8 Special Utility Rela

Description

Relay 2002: Always ON

By setting an output relay to ON using relay 2002, the output rela"running indicator output".

Relay 2003: Always OFF.

Opposite that of relay 2002, use relay 2003 where it is not requireFor example, when using only the up function of an up/down couin the DW (down) input.

Relays 2004, 2005 and 2006: Clock pulse

For each relay, the time ratio is "ON:OFF = 1:1". (Accordingly, th2005 is 0.05 sec/pulse.)However, because these relays depend on the scan time, error atime is generated.

• By combining an output relay, an "intermittent output" can be • By using relay 2006 as input for a counter, the counter can be

term timer.

2002

00000LDA

DM0000STA

2002

HSP0100

Set the input time constant of relay 0100 to 10 µs.Transfer the ON/OFF status data of channel 0000 to DM0000.

C000

1000 #03600

2006C000

1000



Relay 2008: Remains ON during only one scan wh

This relay can be used for an initial reset at the start oAfter one scan, this relay remains OFF.

Relay 2813: Sets the input time constant of the CP

While relay 2813 remains ON, the input time constantusing the value of DM1940.

When operation is started, this relay sets all internautility relays used by the SFT instruction to OFF.

0000

1000

SFTD

CLK

RES2008

1100

1100

#00000LDA

DM0000STA

2008

When operation is started, this relay returns the curvalue of DM0000 to 0.




1

1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List

Special relays and arithmetic operation flags

"1.3.7 Special Utility Relays" (p.3-12)

* Read-only relay.

Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0)

"Chapter 4. High-Speed Counters" (p.3-203)

.oNyaleR noitcnuF

*0012 1(0HTCrofylnodesukcolclanretnI µ )s



3012 0CTCrotarapmocnehw0HTCforaelccitamotuA.NOsnrut

OO

4012 nehw0050ottuptuotceridstimrep / stibihorP.NOsnrut0CTCrotarapmoc

OO

5012 rotarapmocnehwFFOottessi0050ottuptuotceriD.NOsnrut0CTC

OO

6012 rotarapmocnehwNOottessi0050ottuptuotceriD.NOsnrut0CTC

OO

7012 hcaedesreversi0050ottuptuofosutatsFFO / NO

.NOsnrut0CTCrotarapmocemit

O

O


OO

9012 rotarapmocnehwFFOottessi0050ottuptuotceriD.NOsnrut1CTC

OO

0112 rotarapmocnehwNOottessi0050ottuptuotceriD O

.oNyaleR noitcnuF

*2002 .NOsyawlA

*3002 .FFOsyawlA

*4002 )%05:elcycytud(eslupkcolcs-10.0



*7002 .putratsretfanacstsrifgnirudFFOsniameR*8002 .putratsretfanacstsrifgnirudNOsniameR

*9002 evitagensinoitarepocitemhtirafotlusernehwNOsnruT

.detarenegsiwolfrevo

*0102 .0sinoitarepocitemhtirafotlusernehwNOsnruT

*1102 .evitisopsinoitarepocitemhtirafotlusernehwNOsnruT

*2102 renasetarenegnoitarepocitemhtirananehwNOsnruT



Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1)

"Chapter 4. High-Speed Counters" (p.3-203)

* Read-only relay.

Note: Never use special utility relays that are not show

Other special utility relays

.oNyaleR noitcnuF




3022 Crotarapmocnehw1HTCforaelccitamotuA.NOsnrut


5022 ocnehwFFOottessi1050ottuptuotceriD

.NOsnrut2CTC

6022 mocnehwNOottessi1050ottuptuotceriD.NOsnrut2CTC

7022 desreversi1050ottuptuofosutatsFFO / NO.NOsnrut2CTCrotarapmocemit


9022 ocnehwFFOottessi1050ottuptuotceriD.NOsnrut3CTC

0122 mocnehwNOottessi1050ottuptuotceriD.NOsnrut3CTC

1122 desreversi1050ottuptuofosutatsFFO / NO.NOsnrut3CTCrotarapmocemit

2122 Crotarapmocnehw1HTCforaelccitamotuA.NOsnrut

3122 CrotarapmocrofedomnoitacilpitlumstceleSNOFFONOFFO

p2:NO4x:NO2x:FFOeslup1:FFO4122

noitacilpitluMedom

eslup1 2x

3122 FFO NO

4122 FFO FFO

.oNyaleR noitcnuF

0032 delbasidstuptuolanretxE

)5190ot0050stuptuo(

1032delbasidstupnihserferlanretxE




1

.oNyaleR noitcnuF

0042 langislanretxe0HTCfognimiT

FFO teserplanretxE FFOegdegnillaftA

NOegdegnisirtA

1042 FFO desuton NO FFO

2042 TNIfoytiraloptpurretnIFFO

egdegnisirtAFFO

egdegnillaftANO

egdegnisirtA3042 FFO NO FFO

4042 1TNIfoytiraloptpurretnI

FFOegdegnisirtA

FFOegdegnillaftA

NOegdegnisirtA

5042 FFO NO FFO

6042 retnuocgnirsates0HTC teS:NO

7042tacilpitlumonottessi0HTCnehwtupniBesahperongI

.putnuocsyawladnatupniBesahperongI:NO

.laususatupniBesahpesU:FFO

8042 teserplanretxe1HTCfognimiT

FFO teserplanretxE FFOegdegnillaftA

NOegdegnisirtA

9042 FFO desuton NO FFO


FFOegdegnisirtA

FFOegdegnillaftA

NOegdegnisirtA

1142 FFO NO FFO


FFO

egdegnisirtA

FFO

egdegnillaftA

NO

egdegnisirtA3142 FFO NO FFO

4142 retnuocgnirsates1HTC teS:NO

5142tacilpitlumonottessi1HTCnehwtupniBesahperongI

.putnuocsyawladnatupniBesahperongI:NO.laususaBesahpesU:FFO

0052 apecafretnirotarepo02D-VKno]1F[hctiwsdezimotsuC

1052 apecafretnirotarepo02D-VKno]2F[hctiwsdezimotsuC

2052 apecafretnirotarepo02D-VKno]3F[hctiwsdezimotsuC3052 apecafretnirotarepo02D-VKno]4F[hctiwsdezimotsuC

4052 afretnirotarepo02D-VKno1pmalrotacidnidezimotsuC

.dengissa


.dengissa


.dengissa


.dengissa

8052rotareponeewtebegnahcstimreP02D-VKfoedomeciveddnaedom

.lenapecafretnirotarepodettimreP:NO

9052ecafretnirotarepo02D-VKehtstimreP

rotareponeewtebdetfihsebotlenap dettimreP:NO



.oNyaleR noitcnuF

9062 wtinunoisnapxetupnifotnatsnocemittupnI

5110ot0010.soN


5120ot0020.soN


5130ot0030.soN


5140ot0040.soN

3162 tcennocsidnoisnapxetatupnifogniraelC

2172 lamroN:FFOrorretcennocsiD

tinudetcennocninoitcennocsiD:NO

4172 tiucricnoitcerroctupnideeps-hgihfoesU

desutoN:FFOdesU:NO

5172 .noitareponisihctiwsmacelihwNO

0082 AtropnoitacinummocotdneslangiskaerB

1082 tropnoitacinummocmorfatadtxetsevieceR

.atadtxetgniviecerelihwnacs1

2082ecnatpeccaatadtxetAtropnoitacinummoCelihwdeviecersiatadtxetnehwNOnacs1

.NOsi

3082 orreevieceratadtxetAtropnoitacinummoC

txetanehwnacs1ylnognirudNOsniameR

4082 (tratsdnesatadtxetAtropnoitacinummoC

5082 BtropnoitacinummocotdneslangiskaerB

6082 na,atadtxetBtropnoitacinummocsevieceR

.atadtxetgniviecerelihwnacs

7082ecnatpeccaatadtxetBtropnoitacinummoCetnehwNOnacs1ylnognirudNOsniameR

.NOsi8082yalerro6082yaler

8082 orreevieceratadtxetBtropnoitacinummoC

txetanehwnacs1ylnognirudNOsniameR

9082 (tratsdnesatadtxetBtropnoitacinummoC




1

1.3.9 Timers and Counters

Timers and counters can be set in a program, and their outputs ccontacts elsewhere in the program. [There is no restriction on the

or N.C.) and the order of use.]A same number can be assigned to only one timer or counter. Foand C005 cannot be used in the same program.

Timer/Counter list

Description Timers

• When 0.1-s timers (TMR) and high-speed 0.001-s timers (TMcontacts, the "Tnnn" No. is used for both types. However, the different. "TMRnnn#ddddd" is used for 0.1-s timers, "TMHnnnhigh-speed 0.01-s timers, and "TMSnnn#ddddd" is used for htimers (nnn = timer No, ddddd = timer set value).

• In a single program, different timer Nos. must be assigned to TMHnnn, and TMSnnn.

• When the PLC is stopped, all timers are reset and their currenequivalent to set values.

Counters

• When counters (C) and up/down counters (UDC) are used as"Cnnn" No. is used for both types. However, the form for setti"Cnnn#ddddd" is used for counters, while "UDCnnn#ddddd" iscounters.

• In one program, different numbers must be assigned to each up/down counters.

• Even when operation is stopped, each counter stores whatevth t ti

emaN tcatnoC lioC

noitcurtsni(

remiT

)remits-1.0(remiT

942Tot000T

2ot000RMT

remitdeeps-hgiH)remits-10.0(

2ot000HMT

remitsm-1deeps-hgiH)remits-100.0(

2ot000SMT

retnuoCretnuoC

942Cot000C942ot000C

retnuocnwod / pU 2ot000CDU



1.3.10 Data Memories

Data memories store various types of data.Data memories are not usually used in a program that

timers, and counters. When arithmetic instructions areries can be used to store data for arithmetic operationarithmetic operations.

.oNMD ircseD

999MDot0MD esuybdesuebnac(deificepstoN

9901MDot0001MD AtropeviecertxeT

9911MDot0011MD AtropdnestxeT

9921MDot0021MD BtropeviecertxeT9931MDot0031MD BtropdnestxeT

0041MD tuotsrifehT:noitcnufhctiwsmaC

1041MD nosirapmoC:noitcnufhctiwsmaC

edom

2041MD tnuocesluP:noitcnufhctiwsmaC

0HTCot

3041MD esuybdesuebnac(deificepstoN

4041MD )sm(elcyctnemerusaeM5041MD )zH(tnuocycneuqerffotluseR

7041MD/6041MD foeulavteS:noitcnufhctiwsmaC

FFO / NOsnrut

9041MD/8041MD:

9641MD/8641MD

foeulavteS:noitcnufhctiwsmaCFFO / NOsnrut

:foeulavteS:noitcnufhctiwsmaC

FFO / NOsnrut

0741MD uebtonnac(metsysybdevreseR

9741MDot1741MD esuybdesuebnac(deificepstoN

0841MD S:noitcnuflortnocnwod / pu-pmaR

)000,05

1841MD O:noitcnuflortnocnwod / pu-pmaR

)000,05

2841MD A:noitcnuflortnocnwod / pu-pmaR

)000,4ot0(

3841MD esuybdesuebnac(deificepstoN


)535,56ot0(


)535,56ot0(

6841MD E:noitcnuflortnocnwod / pu-pmaR




1

.oNMD noitpircseD

9761MDot7761MD o02D-VKehtrofedomsseccatceridrofaerA

lenap

9961MDot0861MD vedyalpsiD:lenapecafretnirotarepO02D-VK

9971MDot4671MD )resuybdesuebnac(deificepstoN



*1091MD/0091MD eppu / tigidrewol(0HTCmorfdaereulavtib-42

*3091MD/2091MD eppu / tigidrewol(1HTCmorfdaereulavtib-42

*5091MD/4091MD eppu / tigidrewol(0CTCmorfdaereulavtib-42

*7091MD/6091MD eppu / tigidrewol(1CTCmorfdaereulavtib-42

*9091MD/8091MD eppu / tigidrewol(2CTCmorfdaereulavtib-42*1191MD/0191MD eppu / tigidrewol(3CTCmorfdaereulavtib-42

3191MD/2191MD gidrewol(0HTCotnettirweulavtnerructib-42

5191MD/4191MD gidrewol(1HTCotnettirweulavtnerructib-42

7191MD/6191MD gidrewol(0CTCotnettirweulavtnerructib-42




5291MD/4291MD )tigidreppu / tigidrewol(tupniteserp0HTC

7291MD/6291MD )tigidreppu / tigidrewol(tupniteserp1HTC

*9291MD/8291MD rewol(detarenegsi0TNInehwerutpactupnI




6391MD eS:noitcnuftuptuoeslupycneuqerfdeificepS

7391MD noitamrofninoitcennoctinunoisnapxeO / I

8391MD eulavtimilreppU:0.oNremmirtlatigiD

9391MD eulavtimilreppU:1.oNremmirtlatigiD

0491MD

gnittestnatsnocemittupnI01:0 µ 02:1s µ 005:2s µs

sm01:6sm5:5sm5.2:4sm1:3.tesebtonnaceulavrehtoynA

3491MDot1491MD resuybdesuebtonnac(metsysybdevreseR

4491MD nacs1otnidetrevnocsnoitcurtsniforebmuNdemrofrepsinoisrevnoc


0591MD )552ot0(yalpsidrorrewodniwsseccA


1 3 11 T D t M



1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory

These data memories are used for temporary storageare used, temporary data memories can be used to te

arithmetic operations as well as the results of arithmet

Attribute R: Read W: Write

* Both R and W are enabled when special functions are n

Note 1: Temporary data memories are initialized whe

Note 2: TM20, TM30, and TM31 are read-only, so canHowever, TM28 can be used for both reading and writused.

Note 3: TM00 and TM01 are used by the MUL and DIfor any other purpose.

.oNMT egasU

00MT LUM / VID(snoitarepocitemhtirarofdesU

10MT )VID(snoitarepocitemhtirarofdesU

72MTot20MT )resuybdesuebnac(deificepstoN

82MT dnoyeb)sm1:eludom(emitnacsserotS

emrofrepsinoitarepoemitnacstnatsnoc

92MT

tsnocfo)sm1:eludom(eulavtesserotS

noitarepo 03MT oitpurretni3TNInehweulav0CTCserotS

13MT eulavnaem(emitnacsderusaemserotS

.)sm1.0:eludom()snacs


1 3 12 Relay Nos and Functions



1

1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions

Assignment of Relay Nos.The components of a relay no. are shown below.

Unit Nos.

Unit nos. are assigned to units within the KV-300 system, with ththe right of the KV-300 CPU (see the figure below) assigned as nassigned as unit no. 0.

Address Nos.

Address nos. are assigned to the input units, output units, and I/OThe following table shows the assignment of address nos. to uni

0 7 5 1 5

Address No.

Channel No. Relay No. (00 t

Module No. (07 to 17)Input (0 to 4)Output (5 to 9)

Power supply unit CPU

0 7 8 9

Unit

KV-300 CPU CPU

KV-C16X 16-input unit

KV-C32X 32-input unit

KV-B16R 16-output unit

KV-B16S 16-output unit

KV-C32T 32-output unit

1 4 Special Functions



1.4 Special Functions

This section describes special functions to set and co

KV Series, and useful functions for program debugginequipment.

1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function

The input time constant can be changed when a signaWhen connecting external equipment which has no coas transistor outputs does not occur, and inputting pultime constant change function can be used to decreas

Setting the input time constant for basic units using sp

The input time constant for a basic unit can be changeand special utility relay 2813.Though the input time constant is usually 10 ms, it cancorresponds to the number stored in DM1940 by settiON.If the HSP instruction and special utility relay 2813 are

priority is given to the HSP instruction and the numbe

Special utility relay 2813

OFF: Sets the input time constant to 10 ms.ON: Refers to the number stored in DM1940, then d

constant.

Note 1: Be sure to set the input time constant to 10 µs whencounter input.

Note 2: Never enter a number that is 7 or larger to data mem

Note 3: The input time constant specified by data memory Drising edge of special utility relay 2813.

T h h i i fi h d

0491MDniderotsrebmuN tnatsnocemittupnI

0 01 µs

1 02 µs

2 005 µs

3 sm1

4 sm5.2

5 sm5

6 sm01

eromro7 dewollatoN


1 4 2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant KV



1

1.4.2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant

Modifying with External Switches

KV-C32X/C16X KV-R16X/R8X

As shown in above figures, an external switch can be used to selconstant only on the KV-C32X/C16X Connector Input Units and K

Terminal Units.

In the following table, white represents the switch position.

Note: Connect a solid-state contact output device when the inputset to 1 ms for 25 µs. Connection of a contact output device maybounce.

Modification within the CPU

The input time constant for KV-300 CPU input relay nos. 0000 to modified in the program.

5V24V 10 ms0 ms

1 ms

Input time constantselection switch

Input time constant KV-C32X/C16X K

25 µs ±20%

1 ms ±20%

10 ms ±20%

0ms 1ms 10ms

0ms 1ms 10ms

0ms 1ms 10ms

Input time constant Setting

10 µs ±20% Turn ON special utility relay 2813 (0000 to 00

25 µs ±20% Use the HSP instruction

KV

1.4.3 Constant ScanTime Mode



1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode

This function executes a program while keeping the scwhich usually changes based on the processing conte

how to set this function.

Though the scan time changes usually depending on be kept at a constant value by using this function. Thacquire data from external equipment at a constant timThe set value should be longer than the maximum scais kept at a constant value until the end of processing.

Setting procedure

Set the desired scan time to temporary data memory TSet special utility relay 2303 to ON.The scan time is written to TM31.The scan time can be set in 1-ms increments.Enter the desired scan time (ms) to the temporary dat

Setting example

In this example, the scan time is kept at 20 ms.

Note 1: Be sure to set the constant scan time value soscan time.

Note 2: If the actual scan time exceeds the set scan tturns ON (during the next 1 scan) while the actual sca1 ms).

Note 3: The scan time can be set up to 200 ms in tema value larger than 200 ms is input, it will be treated a

2008 2303SET

TM29STA

#00020LDA


1.4.4 Output Disabled Function



1

1.4.4 Output Disabled Function

This function disables outputs from each unit in RUN mode withoprogram used. By disabling external outputs, the program can be

external equipment is connected, even when output of signals toequipment is not desired.

Setting procedure

When special utility relay 2300 turns ON, all outputs from all outp0915) to the outside are cleared after 1 scan is finished.However, the display in the Access Window and the output indicacleared.

Setting example

By setting/resetting special utility relay 2300 using the Access WIncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programminor the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer, the external output procan be used.External outputs are prohibited while input 0000 is ON. External ted, though, while input 0000 is OFF.

For more about operating procedures, refer to the "Chapter 6. Handheld Prog

1.4.5 Input Refresh Disabled Function

This function disables the update of inputs from each unit triggerefrom external equipment.

By disabling external input refresh, inputs from each unit can be monitor status without mechanical operations to enable a progra

Setting procedure

When special utility relay 2301 turns ON, input refresh (read of ininput relays (0000 to 0415 used by the QL Series) is skipped.In this status, inputs can be set to ON/OFF from the Access WindIncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programminor the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.

Setting example

By setting/resetting special utility relay 2301 using the Access WIncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programminor the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer, the external input refre

0000 2300

1.4.6 Contact Comment Save Function



• This function transfers contact comments to the ViIncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV

software.• The Visual KV Series can store not only programs

to each contact using the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" KV" programming support software.A program may not be easy to understand if only dregistering comments to the contacts, the programmore efficiently maintained.

• The number of contact comments that can be tran

normal transfer and compression transfer.• The KV-D20 operator interface panel includes the

function.

For more about operating procedures, refer to "2.5 Entering CoSetting the comment transfer" (p.2-138).

Note 1: Line comments cannot be stored.

Note 2: The KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer cannoments.

Note 3: The KV-D20 operator interface panel cannot dwhich have been compressed and transferred.


1.4.7 Special Functions KV-300 PLC only



1

p

Constant Scan Time Mode

In this mode, operation can take place according to a preset scan

Setting

Write the desired scan time into TM29 (temporary data memory)special utility relay No. 2303. The scan time can also be written iscan time in increments of 10 ms (a value of less than 10 ms is inHere, write a value into TM equivalent to 10 times the scan time.

Example

Set the constant scan time to 20 ms.

Note 1: The set value for the constant scan time must be greaterscan time. Otherwise, special utility relay 2304 turns on during evconstant scan time mode.

Note 2: If the scan time exceeds the set value, special utility reladuring the next scan.

Output Disabled Function

During checking of a program, this function clears output from ouless of the program currently running.

SettingTurn on special utility relay No. 2300. After one scan is complete(00500 to 00503, 07500 to 17915) are cleared.

Example

Use the output disabled function by executing FORCED RESET/utility relay No. 2300 from the monitor display.

To execute FORCED RESET or RESET, refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Progr

Input Refresh Disabled Function

Set this function if it is desired to turn ON/OFF input relays from twithout activating the machine when checking a program.

LDA STA SET

02008 #00200 TM29 2303

1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams



g

This section describes KEYENCE’s unique extended

1.5.1 Features of Extended Ladder Diagram

The extended ladder diagram is a programming methoproblems related to design, testing, operation, and maIn a conventional ladder diagram, output instructions cside of a ladder diagram. On the other hand, in an extinstructions can be written anywhere except on the lefshown below can be written.

Mixture of input and output circuits

Conventional ladder diagram Extende

Connection of two or more instructions on one lin


Branch from output coil


Only input circuitscan be written.

Only outputcircuits can

be written.

Only inpcircuits c

beassembl

Instructions can be written only from theleft end to the right end on one line.

Many


1.5.2 Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams



1

2010

20102002

2010 05

05

05#01000

CMP

DM0000

LDA

#02000CMP

#03000CMP

2002 DM0000

LDA

#01000CMP

2002

2010

#02000CMP

0500

0501

2002

2010

#03000CMP

2010 0502

In a conventional ladder diagramperformed by the program cannounderstood. In an extended laddeoperations performed by the progunderstood at a glance.

When the start switch (0000) is set to ON,timer 0 is activated.

0000 1100

T000

T001

0500

0501

0502 0000

1000STG

1001STG

#00030 T000

#00020 T001

1002STG

1001 J MP

1002 J MP

ENDS

1100DIFU

1000SET

When timer 0 turns ON three seconds latebuzzer (0501) is sounded, and timer 1 is a

When timer 1 turns ON two seconds later,and the motor (0502) starts to rotate.

When the start switch (0000) is set to OFFand all operations are reset.

0000

T

1

0500

0000

1000 T000 #00010 T000

1000DIFU

1001STG

#00010 T000

1000DIFU

The number of lines in a ladder diagram can be reduced.

Because both output instructions and input instructions can be w

the number of program lines can be reduced.As the result, the contents of the program can be seen at a glanc

Example

When DM0000 stores 1000, 0500 turns ON.2000, 0501 turns ON.3000, 0502 turns ON.

Conventional ladder diagram Extended ladder diagram

Processing sequence is clear.

Ladder symbols can be laid out in processing sequence, so the peasier to understand. In addition, maintainability is considerably i

Example

When the start switch is set to ON, a lamp is lit for three seconds

sounded for two seconds, and then the motor starts to rotate.

Conventional ladder diagram Extended ladder diagram

Note: When an extended ladder diagram is used, the diagram may be reduced However this may not nece



0501

05000000

LD 0000

OUT 0500

OUT 0501

LD 0000

OUT 0500

CON

OUT 0501

0505000000

The CON instructio(The scan time is n

At the rising edge of input0001, 1002 turns ON.

0001

1000

1002 0000

0002

1000

1001

1003 1000 1001

1001 0500

1003DIFU

1002DIFU

0000

At the rising edge of input1003, 1002 turns ON.

If input 0000 is ON, 1000turns ON.

If 1000 is ON, 1001 turns ON.

When 1001 turns ON, output 0500turns ON.

Input 0000turns ON.

diagram may be reduced. However, this may not necemnemonics in the program.

Conventional ladder diagram Extended ladde

1.5.3 Example of an Extended Ladder Diagr

Using W-UE

Only when inputs are given in the order "0000 0001

ON.

Conventional ladder diagram Extended

Because the program can be written in only one line wdiagram is used, it is easier to look at and understand

written using a conventional ladder diagram.




1



Chapter 2Instructions

Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KVRefer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-191 for detaRefer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-2speed counters used in the application instruction.

2.1 Instruction List [Visual KV Series] ..2.1.1 Basic Instructions ........................................2.1.2 Application Instructions ...............................2.1.3 Arithmetic Instructions .................................2.1.4 Interrupt Instructions ...................................2.1.5 Function No. List (Alphabetical order) .........

2.2 Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-1

2.2.1 Basic Instructions ........................................2.2.2 Application Instructions ...............................2.2.3 Arithmetic Instructions .................................2.2.4 Interrupt Instructions ...................................

2.3 Convention Details ............................

2.4 Instruction Details .............................2.4.1 Basic Instructions ........................................2.4.2 Application Instructions ...............................

2.4.3 Arithmetic Instructions .................................2.5 Programming Notes ..........................

2.1 Instruction List Visual KV Series




2

The KV Series uses 80 instructions.

The instructions are divided into four categories according to theinstructions, application instructions, arithmetic instructions, and tions.The following is an overview of applications and functions. For derespective description pages for each instruction.

2.1.1 Basic Instructions

LOAD LD

R No.T/C No.

LOAD BAR LDB

AND AND

AND BAR ANB

OR OR

OR BAR ORB

AND LOAD ANL

OR LOAD ORL

OUT OUT

R No.

OUT BAR OUB

SET SET

0000 to 17915

T000 to T249C000 to C249CTC0 to CTC3

0500 to 19152009

2300 to 17915

0500 to 191520092300 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249

0500 to 1915

0.7 to 1.6

0.7 to 1.6

0.7 to 0.9

0.7 to 0.9

0.7 to 0.9

0.7 to 0.9

0.8

0.8

1.5

1.5

1.9 to 12.

Connects N.O. contact to bus.

Connects N.C. contact to bus.

Connects N.O. contact inseries with previous contact.

Connects N.C. contact inseries with previous contact.

Connects N.O. contact inparallel with previous contact.

Connects N.C. contact inparallel with previous contact.

Connects in series blocksmade of one or more

contacts.Connects in parallel blocksmade of one or morecontacts.

Outputs input ON/OFF statusto R coil.

Outputs inverted input ON/ OFF status to R coil.

Forces relay ON and holdsthis status when input is ON.

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand value FunctionExec.time

(µs)

R No.T/C No.

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnnSET

2.1 Instru

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand value Function

16 bit on delay T that



N b f b t t th it

1-msTIMER

TMS(FUN51)

COUNTER C# preset value,C No., counter

input R

UP-DOWNCOUNTER

UDC(FUN52)

C No.,# preset value

#00000 to#65535000 to 249

0000 to 17915

000 to 249#00000 to

#65535

16-bit on-delay T thatcounts down in 1-msdecrements.

Sets 16-bit up-counter

Sets a 16-bit up-downcounter.

000 to 249#0000 to #65535

DIFFEREN-TIATE UP

DIFU(FUN10)

R No.DIFFEREN-TIATEDOWN

DIFD(FUN09)

KEEP KEEP(FUN22)

R No.

SHIFTSFT

(FUN39)

nnnn: 1st RNo. mmmm:Last R No.

HIGHSPEED

HSP(FUN18)

R No.

MASTERCONTROL

MC(FUN24)

MASTERCONTROL

RESET

MCR(FUN25)

MEMORYSWITCH

MEMSW(FUN26)

$ constant

NOPNOP

(FUN30)

END END

END HI ENDH

1000 to 19153000 to 9915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 17915

1000 to 19153000 to 9915

(KV-10)0000 to 0005

(KV-16)0000 to 0009

(KV-24)0000 to 0015

(KV-40)0000 to 0107

$ 0000 to$ FFFF

Turns ON R for 1 scantime at rising edge ofinput.

Turns ON R for 1 scantime at falling edge ofinput.

Turns ON R and holds thstatus when SET input isTurns OFF R when RESinput is ON.

Sets shift register.

Reduces input relay ticonstant to 10 µs forhigher input response

Selects ON/OFF statuR coils, Ts, or Cs.

Represents end of MC

Sets memory switches

Performs no operation

Indicates end of eachroutine of program.

Indicates end of entireprogram.

T No.,# preset value

#ddddd Txxx T

S

#ddddd

nnnnCxxx

UDC xxx#ddddd

UPDWRES

nnnnDIFU

nnnn

DIFD

KEEP

SETRES

nnnn

SFTnnnn

mmmm

DCLK RES

HSPnnnn

MC

MCR

MEMSW$xxxx

END

ENDH


2.1.2 Application Instructions



2

• Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required fo

• Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for obinstruction.

• All operand values are shown in normal notation. The correspnumbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand value FunctionExec.tim

(µs)

WAIT ON

WAIT OFF

WAIT UPEDGE

WAITDOWNEDGE

CONNECT

PUSH

READ

POP

W-ON

W-OFF

W-UE

W-DE

CON(FUN 06)

MPS

MRD

MPP

nnnn:R, T, C

Nos.

mmmm:R No.R No.

17915T000 to T249C000 to C249CTC0 to CTC3

mmmm:1000 to 19153000 to 99151000 to 1915

10.4 to 12

13.6 to 18

13.6 to 18

6.8 to 5.

3.2

6.8

10.5 to 13

R (output operand [mmmm])when R, T, or C (input operand[nnnn]) is ON.

Turns ON R (output operand[mmmm]) at falling edge of R, T,or C (input operand [nnnn]).

Represents series connectionof output instruction togetherwith another instruction.

Stores input status andarithmetic flag.

Reads input status andarithmetic flag stored withPUSH.

STEP

STEP END

STP(FUN 45)

STE(FUN 43)

R No.nnnn:

0000 to

0500 to 9915T000 to T249C000 to C249CTC0 to CTC3

11.2 to 13.4

2.5

5 (12)

Reads & clears input statusand arithmetic flag storedwith PUSH.

Is used with STEP to makeprogram step.

STAGE

JUMP

ENDSTAGE

STG(FUN 44)

JMP(FUN 21)

ENDS(FUN 14)

R, T, CNos.

3000 to 99150000 to 0009

4.5 to 12

4.3 to 7.

Turns ON R (output operand[mmmm]) when R, T, or C (inputoperand [nnnn]) is OFF.

Turns ON R (output operand[mmmm]) at rising edge of R, T,or C (input operand [nnnn]).

Executes instructions in STGblock when R (operand) is ON.

When input is ON, turns R ofcurrent stage OFF and movesto stage specified by operand.

Turns current stage OFF andnext stage ON when input isON.

Executes program betweenSTP & STE when R (oper-and) is ON.

nnnnON

mmmm

nnnnOFF

mmmm

nnnn

mmmm

nnnn

mmmm

nnnn

STG

nnnn

J MP

ENDS

STPnnnn

STE

2.1 Instru


DMnnnn:



INTERVAL

TIMER

16-BITCOUNTER

16-BITCOUNTERCOMPARA-

TOR

16-BITCOUNTER

16-BITCOUNTER

COMPARA-TOR

SUBROUTINECALL

ITVL

CTH

CTC

CALL(FUN 03)

SBN(FUN 38)

RET(FUN 33)

DMnnnn:DM No.

mmmm: RNo.

Count inputR

n:Comparator

No.ddddd:

# presetvalue

n:Comparator

No.

ddddd:# presetvalue

SubroutineNo.

DMnnnn:DM0000 to

DM1985mmmm:

1000 to 19123000 to 9912

0004210021012102

n: 0,1ddddd: #00001

to #65535

00050500220022012202

Measures pulse-to-pinterval & pulse width

specified mode.

16-bit (0 to 65535) udown counter for clopulses with input resfrequency of 30 kHz.

Hardware-based compbetween preset & currvalues of high-speed c(CTH0). This compara

turned ON when thesevalues are equal.

Executes subroutinespecified by operand

Represents beginninsubroutine specified operand.

Represents end ofsubroutine.

REPEATSTART

REPEAT END

16-KEY INPUT

FOR(FUN 16)

NEXT(FUN 29)

HKEY(FUN 17)

# constant,DM No.TMxx

nnnn:Input Rmmmm:Output R

#00000 to#65535

DM0000 toDM1999

TM00 to TM29

nnnn:0000 to 415mmmm:

0500 to 915

Executes programbetween FOR & NEfor number of timesspecified by operan

Represents end ofrepetition.

Reads 16-key data time-sharing and outhese data into specutility Rs 2900 to 29

SUBROUTINEENTRY

SUBROUTINERETURN

CTH

CTC

Count inputR

SubroutineNo.

n: 2,3ddddd: #00001

to #65535

00 to 99

00 to 99

16-bit (0 to 65535) udown counter for clopulses with inputresponse frequencykHz.

Hardware-based compbetween preset & currvalues of high-speed c

(CTH1). This comparaturned ON when thesevalues are equal.

ITVLPLSDMnnnnPAUSEmmmmRES

CTH0nnnn

CTCn#ddddd

CTH1nnnn

CTCn#ddddd

CALLnn

SBNnn

RET

FORnnnn

HKEYnnnn

mmmm

NEXT


2.1.3 Arithmetic Instructions



2

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand value FunctionExec.time

(µs)

DATAMEMORY

WRITE

TRIMMERSETTING

LOAD A

STORE A

COMPARE

ADD

DW

TMIN(FUN 50)

@TMIN@(FUN 50)

LDA(FUN 23)

@LDA@(FUN 23)

STA(FUN 42)

@STA@(FUN 42)

CMP(FUN 04)

@CMP@(FUN 04)

ADD(FUN00)

@ADD@(FUN 00)

SUB

nnnn:#/$ constantDMmmmm:

DM No.

Trimmer No.

R No.,C/T No.,DM No,TM xx,

#/$ constant,

#TMxx

R No.,C/T No.,DM No.,TM xx,

#TMxx

DM/TM No.TMxx,

#/$ constant,#TM

nnnn:#0000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

DMmmmm:DM0000 to

DM1999

0 to 1

0000 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249CTH0 to CTH1

DM0000 toDM1999

TM00 to TM31#00000 to

#65535$0000 to $FFFF#TM00 to

#TM29

0500 to 19152100 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249

CTH0 toCTC3

DM0000 to

DM1999TM00 to TM29

#TM00 to#TM29

DM0000 toDM1999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

8.0

8.9

20.9

6.4 to 14.0

18.4 to 26.0

6.6 to 28.5

18.0 to 40.5

10.8 to 35.6

22.8 to 47.6

9.4 to 34.2

21.4 to 46.2

10 8 to 35 6

Writes constant into datamemory.

Inputs value set byaccess window’s digital

trimmer (0 to 65535) tointernal register.

Inputs value specified byoperand into internalregister or inputs currentvalue when T/C is

specified as operand.

Transfers content ofinternal register tolocation specified byoperand, or changespreset value when T/C is

specified as operand.

Compares content ofinternal register andvalue specified byoperand.

Adds content of internalregister and valuespecified by operand andinputs result back tosame register.

Subtracts value specified

nnnn

DMmmmmDW

n TMIN

n TMIN

nnnnLDA

nnnnLDA

nnnnSTA

nnnnSTA

nnnnCMP

nnnnCMP

nnnn

ADD

nnnnADD

nnnnSUB

2.1 Instru


DM0000 to



@DIV@(FUN 11)

DIVIDE

DIV(FUN 11) Divides content of inter

register by value specifby operand and inputsresult back to sameregister.

R No.,

DM No.,TM xx,#/$ constant,

#TMxx

DM0000 toDM1999

TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

AND A

OR A

EXCLUSIVEOR A

SHIFTRIGHT A

SHIFT LEFTA

ROTATE

RIGHT A

ROTATE

ANDA(FUN 01)

@ANDA@(FUN 01)

ORA(FNC 31)

@ORA@(FUN 31)

EORA(FUN 15)

@EORA@(FUN 15)

SRA(FNC 41)

@SRA@(FUN 41)

SLA(FNC 40)

@SLA@(FUN 40)

RRA(FUN 37)

@RRA@(FUN 37)

RLA(FUN 35)

R No.,DM No.,

TM xx,#/$ constant,#TMxx

R No.,

DM No.,TM xx,

#/$ constant,#TMxx

# constant

0000 to 17915DM0000 to

DM1999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

0000 to 17915DM0000 to

DM1999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

ANDs each of 16 bits ointernal register and thaof value specified byoperand, and inputs resback to same register.

ORs each of 16 bits ofinternal register and thaof value specified byoperand, and inputs resback to same register.

EXCLUSIVE-ORs each16 bits of internal registand that of value specifby operand, and inputsresult back to sameregister.

Moves content of internregister serially left byvalue specified byoperand.

Rotates contents ofinternal register and ca

bit (2009) clockwise byoperand value.

Rotates contents ofinternal register and ca

Moves content of internregister serially right byvalue specified by

operand.

#01 to #16

nnnnDIV

nnnnDIV

nnnnANDA

nnnnANDA

nnnnORA

nnnnORA

nnnnEORA

nnnnEORA

#ddSRA

#ddSRA

#ddSLA

#ddSLA

#ddRRA

#ddRRA

#ddRLA


Instruction Symbol Mnemonic OperandOperand

valueFunction

Exec.t(µs

COM

5 6



2

Converts content ofinternal register (4-digitBCD) into 16-bit binarydata.

Converts content ofinternal register (16-bitbinary) into 4-digit BCDdata.

DEMULTI-PLEXER

TRANSFERBCD

TRANSFERBIN

ASCIICONVERT

REVERSEASCII

CONVERT

DMX

(FUN 12)

@DMX@(FUN 12)

TBCD(FUN 47)

@TBCD@(FUN 47)

TBIN(FUN 48)

@TBIN@(FUN 48)

ASC(FUN 02)

@ASC@(FUN 02)

RASC(FUN 32)

@RASC@(FUN 32)

22.6

34.6

5.6

17.6

9.6

21.6

9.7

21.

9.3

21.3

Converts position of

highest order bit with 1 ininternal register into 4-bitdata.

Converts content of lowerorder 8 bytes of internalregister into 2-digit ASCIIcode.

Converts 2-digit ASCIIcode of internal registerinto 2-digit numericalvalue.

T k t f 32

COMPLE-MENT

INCREMENTMEMORY

DECRE-

MENTMEMORY

MULTI-PLEXER

COM(FUN 05)

@COM@(FUN 05)

INC(FNC 19)

@INC@(FUN 19)

DEC(FNC 07)

@DEC@(FUN 07)

MPX(FUN 27)

@MPX@(FUN 27)

DM/TM No.

DM/TM No.

DM0000 toDM1999TM00 to

TM29

5.6

17.6

9.8

21.8

10.4

22.4

10.1

22.1

Inverts content of each bitin internal register.

Adds 1 to content of datamemory specified byoperand.

Subtracts 1 from content

of data memory specifiedby operand.

Converts 4-bit data(specified by operand) ofinternal register into 16-bitdata.

# constant

DM0000 to

DM1999TM00 toTM29

#0 to #3

COM

COM

nnnnINC

nnnnINC

nnnnDEC

nnnnDEC

#nMPX

#nMPX

DMX

DMX

TBCD

TBCD

TBIN

TBIN

ASC

ASC

RASC

RASC

2.1 Instru

2.1.4 Interrupt Instructions




• Number of bytes represents the memory capacity

• Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity reqinstruction.

• All operand values are shown in normal notation. Tnumbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:

Normal notation X-Y-M notation0000 to 0415 X000 to X04F0500 to 0915 Y050 to Y09F1000 to 6915 M1000 to M6915

7000 to 17915 X700 to X174F or Y75

2.1.5 Function No. List (Alphabetical order)The following list shows the function Nos. used to enteP3E(01) handheld programmer.

Refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" on page 1-195 for


INTERRUPTDISABLED

INTERRUPTENABLED

INTERRUPT

RETURNINTERRUPT

DI(FUN 08)

EI(FUN 13)

INT

(FUN 20)

RETI(FUN 34)

R No.

ComparatorNo.

000 to 003

CTC0 toCTC3

Disables execution of

interrupt.

Enables execution ofinterrupt.

Executes interruptinstructions between Iand RETI at rising/falliedge of input relays 00through 0003.

Used with comparatorCTC0 to CTC3 andexecutes instructionsbetween INT and RET

Represents end ofinterrupt.

DI

EI

INTnnnn

INTCTCn

RETI

.oNnoitcnuF noitcurtsnI

00 DDA

10 ADNA

20 CSA

30 LLAC

40 PMC

.oNnoitcnuF oitcurtsnI

62 WSMEM

72 XPM

82 LUM

92 TXEN

03 PON

.oNnoitcnuF noitcurtsnI

31 IE

41 SDNE

51 AROE

61 ROF

71 YEKH

KV-300 Series, KV-10/802.2 Instruction List

KV-300 Series,

2.2 Instruction List• Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required fo

KV-300 Series, KV-10/80



2

Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required fo• Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for ob

instruction.• Abbreviations: R: Relay, T: Timer, C: Counter, #: Decimal, $:


KV-10/16/24/40/80

nnnnLOAD

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

(SET)nnnn

LD

R No.T/C No.

LOAD BAR LDB

AND AND

AND BAR ANB

OR OR

OR BAR ORB

AND LOAD ANL

OR LOAD ORL

OUT OUT

R No.

OUT BAR OUB

SET SET

RESET RES


0500 to 19152009

2300 to 2915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 2915

T000 to T063C000 to C063

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 2915T000 to T063(RES)

nnnn


0500 to 19152009

2300 to 6915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 6915

T000 to T119C000 to C119

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 6915T000 to T119

1.5 to 2.5

2.1 to 3.5

1.5 to 2.5

2.7 to 4.5

1.5 to 2.5

2.7 to 4.5

1.0 to 1.4

1.0 to 1.4

5.2 to 8.4

6.4 to 10.4

3.1 to 23.0

3 1 to 24 0

3 (4)

3 (6)

3 (4)

3 (8)

3 (4)

3 (8)

1 (2)

1 (2)

3 (13)

3 (17)

3 (8)

3 (8)

Connecto bus.

Connecto bus.

Connecin seriecontact

Connecin serie

contactConnecin paracontact

Connecin paracontact

Connecblocks more c

Connec

blocks more c

Outputstatus tOutput

ON/OFcoil.

Forcesthis sta

ON.

Forceswhen in

KV-10/16/24/40/80

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand valueKV-10/16

Operand valueKV-24/40/80

Exec.time(µs)

Bytes

2.2 Instruction List

KV-10/16/24/40/80



Exec.time(µs)



KV-300

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic OperandOperand value

Exec.time(µs)

LOADnnnn

nnnn

nnnn

nnnn

LOAD BAR

AND

AND BAR

LD

LDB

AND

ANB

R No.T/C No.

0000 to 00090500 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249CTC0 to CTC3

0.15 to 0.70

0.15 to 0.90

0.15 to 0.50

0.15 to 0.80

KV-300

nnnn

DIFU

nnnn

DIFD

KEEPSET

RES nnnn

SFTDCLKRES

nnnn

mmmm

MC

HSPnnnn

MCR

$xxxx

MEMSW$xxxx

END

ENDH

DIFFEREN-TIATE UP

DIFU(FNC10)

R No.DIFFEREN-TIATEDOWN

DIFD(FNC09)

KEEPKEEP

(FNC22)R No.

SHIFTSFT

(FNC39)

R No.1st& last R

Nos.

HIGHSPEED

HSP(FNC18) R No.

MASTERCONTROL

MC(FNC24)

MASTERCONTROL

RESET

MCR(FNC25)

MEMORYSWITCH

MEMSW(FNC26)

$ constant

NOP NOP(FNC30)

END END

END HI ENDH

1000 to 1915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 2915

1000 to 1915

(KV-10)

0000 to 0005(KV-16)0000 to 0009

$ 0000 to $ FFFF

1000 to 19153000 to 6915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 6915

1000 to19153000 to

6915

(KV-24)

0000 to 0015(KV-40)0000 to 0107

11.0 to 13.0

11.0 to 13.0

9.0 to 26.0

(*)

8.0 to 9.0

1.8 to 3.2

0.6 to 1.0

––

––

––

––


KV-300 Series,

KV-300

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand value Exec.time(µs)

Bytes

nnnn



2

OUT

OUT BAR

nnnn

nnnn

(SET)nnnn

(RES)nnnn

#ddddd

T xxx

#ddddd

xxxH

#ddddd

xxxS

nnnn

#dddddC xxx

UDCxxx#dddddUP

DWRES

nnnn

DIFU

nnnn

DIFD

KEEPSET

RES nnnn

SFTDCLK

RES

nnnn

mmmm

HSPnnnn

SET

RESET

0.1-s TIMER

0.01-s TIMER

1-ms TIMER

COUNTER

UP-DOWNCOUNTER

DIFFEREN-TIATE UP

DIFFEREN-TIATE DOWN

KEEP

SHIFT

HIGHSPEED

OUT

OUB

SET

RES

TMR

TMH(FNC49)

TMS(FNC51)

C

UDC(FNC52)

DIFUFNC10)

DIFD(FNC09)

KEEP(FNC22)

SFT

(FNC39)

HSP(FNC18)

R No.

T No.,# preset

value

# presetvalue, CNo., clocksource R

C No.,# presetvalue

R No.

R No.

1st &last R

Nos.

R No.

0500 to 1915

20092300 to 17915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249

0500 to 1915

20092100 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249CTH0 to CTH1CTC0 to CTC3

000 to 249#00000 to 65535

#00000 to #65535000 to 249

0000 to 00090500 to 17915

000 to 249#00000 to #65535

1000 to 19153000 to 6915

(*) 7000 to 9915

0500 to 19152009

2100 to 17915

1000 to 19153000 to 6915

(*) 7000 to 9915

0000 to 0009

0.20 to 0.56

0.50 to 1.20

0.20 to 5.70

0.50 to 4.40

5.60 to 10.40

5.60 to 10.40

5.60 to 10.40

7.60 to 9.45

8.00 to 11.60

6.70

6.70

6.10 to 7.90

6.40 to 8.20

4.66 to 4.92

3 (8)

3 (11)

3 (12)

3 (12)

2 (7)

2 (7)

2 (7)

4 (7)

2 (10)

3 (10)

3 (10)

3 (11)

5 (15)

3 (8)

Outpustatus

OutputON/OFcoil.

Forcesthis stais ON.

Forceswhen

16-bit countsdecrem

16-bit counts

decrem16-bit countsdecrem

Sets 1

Sets acounte

Turns time ainput.Turns time ainput.

Turns this stainput is

Turns

RESE

Sets s

Reduce



KV-10/16/24/40/80



KV-10/16/24/40/80

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand valueKV-10/16 Operand valueKV-24/40/80

Exec.time(µs) Byte

WAIT ON

WAIT OFF

WAIT UPEDGE

WAIT DOWNEDGE

CONNECT

PUSH

READ

POP

STAGE

JUMP

END

STAGE

STEP

STEP END

INTERVALTIMER

8-BITCOUNTER

8 BIT

W-ONnnnnON

mmmm

W-OFFnnnnOFF

mmmm

W-UE

W-D

CON[FNC 06]

MPS

MRD

MPP

STG[FNC 44]

JMP[FNC 21]

ENDS

[FNC 14]

STP[FNC 45]

STE[FNC 43]

ITVL

CTH

nnnn:R,T, or C

No.

R No.

R, T, CNos.

DM & RNo.

Clocksource Rs

n:

nnnn↑

mmmm

nnnn↓

mmmm

nnnn

STG

nnnnJMP

ENDS

STPnnnn

STE

ITVLPLS

PAUSERES

nnnnmmmmDM

nnnnCTH0

nnnn:0000 to 2915T000 to T063C000 to C063CTC0 to CTC3

mmmm:1000 to 1915

1000 to 1915


DM0000 to

DM09851000 to 1912

00042100 to 2102

nnnn:0000 to 6915T000 to T119C000 to C119CTC0 to CTC3

mmmm:1000 to 1915

3000 to 6915

1000 to 19153000 to 6915


DM0000 toDM1985

1000 to 19123000 to 6912

11.0 to13.0

11.0 to13.0

14.0 to18.0

14.0 to18.0

0.4 to0.6

11.0 to14.0

8.0 to10.0

10.0 to12.0

11.0 to14.0

10.0 to13.0

7.0 to

9.0

3.7 to5.3

0.00

29.0 to

79.0

9.0 to39.0

5 (7

5 (7

5 (7

5 (7

30

1 (3

1 (3

1 (3

3 (7

3 (5

1 (3

3 (7

1 (0

5 (7

4 (4


KV-300 Series,

KV-10/16/24/40/80



Exec.time(µs)

Bytes

#00000 to #00000 to



2

KV-300

KV-300


BytesF

WAIT ONnnnn

ON

mmmm

nnnnOFF

mmmm

nnnn

↑mmmm

nnnn↓

mmmm

nnnn

STG

nnnnJMP

WAIT OFF

WAIT UPEDGE

WAIT DOWNEDGE

CONNECT

PUSH

READ

POP

STAGE

JUMP

W-ON

W-OFF

W-UE

W-DE

CON[FNC 06]

MPS

MRD

MPP

STG[FNC 44]

JMP[FNC 21]

nnnn:R,T, orC No.

R No.

nnnn:

0000 to 00090500 to 17915T000 to T249C000 to C249CTC0 to CTC3

mmmm:1000 to 19153000 to 6915

(*)7000 to 9915

1000 to 19153000 to 6915

(*)7000 to 9915

5.00 to 6.10

5.00 to 6.10

6.10 to 7.50

6.10 to 7.50

—

1.30

2.70

1.40

5.60 to 6.50

3.80 to 6.00

5 (9)

5 (9)

5 (10)

5 (10)

1 (0)

1 (9)

1 (18)

1 (9)

3 (10)

3 (7)

Turns ON [mmmm])

operand [nWhen R, T[nnnn]) turoperand [m

R (2nd opturns ON T, or C (1s

R (2nd opturns ON T, or C (1s

Represenof output iwith anoth

Stores inparithmetic

Reads inparithmeticPUSH.

Reads & cand arithmwith PUSH

Executes between S(operand)

Turns curnext stageON.

REPEAT

START

REPEATEND

16-KEYINPUT

FOR

[FNC 16]

NEXT[FNC 29]

HKEY[FNC 17]

# constant,

DM No.

I/O R

nnnn

FOR

NEXT

nnnnmmmm

HKEY

#00000 to#65535


nnnn:0000 to 000910000 to 10415

:17000 to 17415

mmmm:10500 to 10915:17500 to 17915

#00000 to#65535


5.0 to 20.0

1.7 to 2.3

71 to 370

3 (15)

1 (3)

5 (7)

Execbetwfor nuspec

Reprrepet

Readtimeoutpspecto 29


KV-300


Exec.time(µs)

Byt

n:




TOR

16-BITCOUNTER


TOR

SUBROU-TINE CALL

SUBROU-TINE ENTRY

SUBROU-TINE

RETURN

REPEATSTART

REPEATEND

16-KEYINPUT

CTC

CTH

CTC

SBN[FNC 38]

RET[FNC 33]

FOR[FNC 16]

NEXT [FNC 29]

HKEY[FNC 17]

CALL [FNC 03]

#ddddd

CTCn

nnnnCTH1

#dddddCTCn

nn

CALL

nnSBN

RET

nnnnFOR

NEXT

nnnnmmmm

HKEY

n:Comparator

No.ddddd: #

preset value

Clocksource Rs

n:ComparatorNo.

ddddd: #preset value

SubroutineNo.

SubroutineNo.

# constant,DM No.

I/O R

n: 0, 1

ddddd:#00000 to #65535

0005220022012202

n: 2, 3ddddd:

#00000 to #65535

00 to 99

00 to 99

#00000 to #65535DM0000 to DM9999

TM00 to TM29

nnnn:0000 to 0009

10000 to 10415:

17000 to 17415mmmm:0500 to 0503

10500 to 10915:

17500 to 17915

—

3.85

—

3.16

—

1.15 to 1.45

1.55

—

16.50

2

4

2

2 (

2

1

3 (

1

5


KV-300 Series,


KV-10/16/24/40/80

KV-10/16/24/40/80



2

KV 10/16/24/40/80

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand value

KV-10/16

Operand value

KV-24/40/80

Exec.time

(µs) Bytes

Fu

DATAMEMORY

WRITE

TRIMMERSETTING

LOAD A

STORE A

COMPARE

ADD

SUBTRACT

DW

TMIN[FNC 50]

@TMIN@[FNC 50]

LDA[FNC 23]

@LDA

@[FNC 23]

STA[FNC 42]

@STA@[FNC 42]

CMP[FNC 04]

@CMP@[FNC 04]

ADD[FNC 00]

@ADD@[FNC 00]

SUB[FNC 46]

@SUB

#/$constant,DM No.

TrimmerNo.

R No.,C/T No.,DM/TM

No.,#/$

constant,#TMxx

R No.,C/T No.,DM/TM

No.,#/$

constant,#TMxx

DM/TMNo.,#/$

constant,#TMxx

#00000 to#65535$0000 to$FFFF

DM0000 toDM0999

0


DM0000 toDM0999

TM00 to TM31#00000 to

#65535$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

0500 to 19152100 to 2915T000 to T063C000 to C063

DM0000 toDM0999

TM00 to TM29#TM00 to

#TM29

DM0000 toDM0999

TM00 to TM31#00000 to

#65535$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

DM0000

#0000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

DM0000 toDM1999

0 to 1


DM0000 toDM1999

TM00 to TM31#00000 to

#65535$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

0500 to 19152100 to 6915T000 to T119C000 to C119

DM0000 toDM1999

TM00 to TM29#TM00 to

#TM29

DM0000 toDM1999

TM00 to TM31#00000 to

#65535$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

3.6 to 6.0

13.0 to 15.0

25.0 to 29.0

10.0 to 46.0

22.0 to 60.0

9.0 to 99.0

21.0 to 113.0

14.0 to 68.0

26.0 to 82.0

13.0 to 65.0

25.0 to 79.0

15.0 to 68.0

5 (6)

1 (4)

1 (11)

3 (5)

3 (12)

3 (5)

3 (12)

3 (5)

3 (12)

3 (5)

3 (12)

3 (5)

3 (12)

Writes cdata me

Convertrotation to 249 a

into inte

Inputs vby operainternal inputs cuwhen T/

as opera

Transferinternal location operandpreset vC is speoperand

Comparinternal value spoperand

Adds cointernal value spoperand

result baregister.

Subtractspecifiedfrom conregister

lt b

< DW >DMmmmm

nnnn

< TMIN >n

↑ TMIN >n

< LDA >nnnn

↑ LDA >

nnnn

< STA >nnnn

↑ STA >nnnn

< CMP >nnnn

↑ CMP >nnnn

< ADD >nnnn

↑ ADD >nnnn

<

SUB

>nnnn

nnnn


KV-10/16/24/40/80



Exec.time(µs)

ANDA[FNC ] 0000 to 2915 0000 to 6915 11 0 to 64 0ANDA

nnnn



AND A

OR A

EXCLU-SIVEOR A

SHIFTRIGHT A

SHIFTLEFT A

ROTATERIGHT A

ROTATELEFT A

COMPLE-MENT

[FNC 01]

@ANDA@[FNC 01]

ORA[FNC 31]

@ORA@[FNC 31]

EORA[FNC 15]

@EORA@[FNC 15]

SRA[FNC 41]

@SRA@[FNC 41]

SLA[FNC 40]

@SLA@[FNC 40]

RRA[FNC 37]

@RRA@[FNC 37]

RLA[FNC 35]

@RLA@[FNC 35]

COM[FNC 05]

@COM@[FNC 05]

R No.,DM/TM No.,

#/$ No.,#TMxx

R No.,DM/TM No.,

#/$ No.,#TMxx

# constant

0000 to 2915DM0000 to

DM0999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

0000 to 2915DM0000 to

DM0999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

#01 to #16

0000 to 6915DM0000 to

DM1999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

0000 to 6915DM0000 to

DM1999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to#65535

$0000 to$FFFF

#TM00 to#TM29

11.0 to 64.0

23.0 to 78.0

11.0 to 63.0

23.0 to 77.0

10.0 to 63.0

22.0 to 77.0

11.0 to 28.0

23.0 to 42.0

10.0 to 28.0

22.0 to 42.0

12.0 to 30.0

24.0 to 44.0

12.0 to 29.0

24.0 to 43.0

5.0 to 6.0

17.0 to 20.0

<ANDA>

↑ANDA>nnnn

< ORA >nnnn

↑ ORA >nnnn

<EORA>nnnn

↑EORA>nnnn

< SRA >#dd

↑ SRA >#dd

< SLA >#dd

↑ SLA >#dd

< RRA >#dd

↑ RRA >#dd

< RLA >#dd

↑ RLA >#dd

< COM >

↑ COM >


KV-300 Series,

KV-10/16/24/40/80



Exec.time(µs)

Bytes

DMX[FNC 12] 28 0 to 30 0 1 (3) Conve

< DMX >



2

KV-300

Instruction Symbol Mnemonic Operand Operand valueExec.time

(µs)Bytes

KV-300

DATAMEMORY

WRITE

TRIMMERSETTING

DW

TMIN [FNC 50]

@TMIN@[FNC 50]

#/$constant,DM No.

TrimmerNo.

nnnn:#0000 to #65535$0000 to $FFFF

DMmmmm:DM0000 to DM9999

0, 1

0.60 to1.40

5.10 to5.60

2.00 to5.70

5 (11)

1 (11)

1 (25)

Writes data m

Converotation249 aninterna

< DW >DMmmmm

nnnn

< TMIN >n

↑ TMIN >n

DEMULTI-PLEXER

TRANSFERBCD

TRANSFERBIN

ASCIICONVERT

REVERSEASCII

CONVERT

SQUAREROOT

[FNC 12]

@DMX@[FNC 12]

TBCD[FNC 47]

@TBCD@[FNC 47]

TBIN[FNC 48]

@TBIN@[FNC 48]

ASC[FNC 02]

@ASC@[FNC 02]

RASC[FNC 32]

@RASC@[FNC 32]

ROOT[FNC 36]

@ROOT@[FNC 36]

28.0 to 30.0

40.0 to 44.0

19.0 to 21.0

31.0 to 35.0

18.0 to 20.0

30.0 to 34.0

8.0

20.0 to 22.0

12.0 to 14.0

24.0 to 28.0

102.0 to103.0

114.0 to117.0

1 (3)

1 (10)

1 (3)

1 (10)

1 (3)

1 (10)

1 (3)

1 (10)

1 (3)

1 (10)

1 (3)

1 (10)

Convehighes

1 in intinto 4-

Conveinternabit binBCD d

Conve

internadigit Bbinary

Convelower interna2-digit

Convecode idata.

Takes bit dataorder bregistebyte) aback to

< DMX >

↑ DMX >

<TBCD>

↑ TBCD>

< TBIN >

↑ TBIN>

< ASC >

↑ ASC >

<RASC>

↑ RASC>

<ROOT>

↑ ROOT>


KV-300


(µs)B

CMP 9.20 to3< CMP >

nnnn



COMPARE

ADD

SUBTRACT

MULTIPLY

DIVIDE

AND A

OR A

EXCLUSIVEOR A

[FNC 04]

@CMP@[FNC 04]

ADD[FNC 00]

@ADD@[FNC 00]

SUB

[FNC 46]

@SUB@[FNC 46]

MUL [FNC 28]

@MUL@[FNC 28]

DIV[FNC 11]

@DIV@[FNC 11]

ANDA[FNC 01]

@ANDA@[FNC 01]

ORA [FNC 31]

@ORA@[FNC 31]

EORA[FNC 15]

@EORA

@[FNC 15]

DM/TMNo.,#/$

constant,#TMxx

DM/TMNo.,

#/$ No.,#TMxx

R No.,DM/TM

No.,#/$ No.,#TMxx

R No.,DM/TM

No.,#/$ No.,

#TMxx

DM0000 to DM9999TM00 to TM31

#00000 to #65535$0000 to $FFFF#TM00 to #TM29


#00000 to #65535$0000 to $FFFF#TM00 to #TM29

0000 to 00090500 to 17915

DM0000 to DM9999

TM00 to TM31#00000 to #65535$0000 to $FFFF#TM00 to #TM29

0000 to 00090500 to 17915

DM0000 to DM9999TM00 toTM31

#00000 to #65535$0000 to $FFFF

#TM00 to #TM29

36.00

11.20 to38.00

7.70 to35.00

9.70 to37.00

8.40 to

35.00

10.40 to37.00

9.80 to37.00

11.80 to39.00

13.70 to41.00

15.70 to42.00

6.90 to33.00

8.90 to35.00

6.90 to33.00

8.90 to35.00

6.90 to33.00

8.9 to

35.00

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

< CMP >

↑ CMP >nnnn

< ADD >nnnn

↑ ADD >nnnn

< SUB >nnnn

↑ SUB >nnnn

< MUL >nnnn

↑ MUL >nnnn

<

DIV

>nnnn

↑ DIV >nnnn

<ANDA>nnnn

↑ANDA>nnnn

< ORA >nnnn

↑ ORA >nnnn

<EORA>nnnn

↑EORA>nnnn


KV-300 Series,

KV-300


(µs)Bytes

SRA[FNC 41]

10.80 2 (22) Moves c< SRA >#dd



2

SHIFT

RIGHT A

SHIFTLEFT A

ROTATERIGHT A

ROTATELEFT A

COMPLE-MENT

INCREMENTMEMORY

DECREMENTMEMORY

MULTI-PLEXER

DEMULTI-PLEXER

[FNC 41]

@SRA@[FNC 41]

SLA[FNC 40]

@SLA@[FNC 40]

RRA

[FNC 37]

@RRA@[FNC 37]

RLA [FNC 35]

@RLA@[FNC 35]

COM [FNC 05]

@COM@[FNC 05]

INC[FNC 19]

@INC@[FNC 19]

DEC[FNC 07]

@DEC@[FNC 07]

MPX [FNC 27]

@MPX@[FNC 27]

DMX [FNC 12]

@DMX@[FNC 12]

# constant

DM/TMNo.

# constant

#01 to #16


#0 to #3

10.80

12.80

10.80

12.80

12.00

14.00

12.00

14.00

6.10

8.10

7.70

9.70

7.70

9.70

7.30

9.30

6.70

8.70

( )

2 (25)

2 (11)

2 (25)

2 (11)

2 (25)

2 (11)

2 (25)

1 (9)

1 (23)

3 (12)

3 (26)

3 (12)

3 (26)

1 (11)

1 (25)

1 (9)

1 (23)

internal

right by by oper

Moves cinternal left by voperand

Moves cinternal

right, althat leaventer caleftmost

Moves internaleft, allothat leaenter carightmo

Inverts cbit in int

Adds 1 data meby oper

Subtracof data specifie

Convert(specifieof intern16- bit d

Converthighest in intern4-bit da

< SRA >

↑ SRA >#dd

< SLA >#dd

↑ SLA >#dd

< RRA >

#dd

↑ RRA >#dd

< RLA >#dd

↑ RLA >#dd

< COM >

↑ COM >

< INC >nnnn

↑ INC >nnnn

< DEC >nnnn

↑ DEC >nnnn

< MPX >#n

↑ MPX >#n

< DMX >

↑ DMX >


KV-300


By

TBCD[FNC 47]

13.20 1<TBCD>



TRANSFERBCD

TRANSFERBIN

ASCIICONVERT

REVERSEASCII

CONVERT

SQUAREROOT

[FNC 47]

@TBCD@[FNC 47]

TBIN[FNC 48]

@TBIN@[FNC 48]

ASC

[FNC 02]

@ASC@[FNC 02]

RASC[FNC 32]

@RASC@[FNC 32]

ROOT[FNC 36]

@ROOT@[FNC 36]

15.20

14.00

16.00

8.50

10.50

6.80

8.80

77.70

79.70

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

<TBCD>

↑ TBCD>

< TBIN >

↑ TBIN>

< ASC >

↑ ASC >

<RASC>

↑ RASC>

<ROOT>

↑ ROOT>


KV-300 Series,


KV-10/16/24/40/80

KV-10/16/24/40/80



2 KV-300


Exec.time(µs)

Bytes

INTERRUPTDISABLED

INTERRUPTENABLED

INTERRUPT

RETURNINTERRUPT

DI[FNC 08]

EI[FNC 13]

INT[FNC 20]

RETI[FNC 34]

R No.

ComparatorNo.

000 to 003

CTC0 to CTC3

3.20

5.80

40.00 to80.00

40.00 to80.00

60 to 100

1 (9)

1 (0)

1 (0)

1 (0)

1 (0)

Disof

Enof

ExbeREof 00of

Ustor

aninsINT

Reinte

< DI >

< EI >

INTnnn

INTCTCn

RETI

KV-300


KV-10/16 Operand valueKV-24/40/80 Exec.time(µs) Bytes

INTERRUPTDISABLED

INTERRUPTENABLED

INTERRUPT

RETURNINTERRUPT

DI[FNC 08]

EI[FNC 13]

INT[FNC 20]

RETI[FNC 34]

R No.

ComparatorNo.

000 to 003

CTC0 to CTC3

3.0 to 4.6

3.0 to 4.6

35.0 to 48.0

35.0 to48.8

20.0 to23.0

1 (4)

1 (4)

1 (8)

1 (3)

Disof

Enof

Extioaned00fal

UstoraninsINT

Reinte

< DI >

< EI >

INTnnn

INTCTCn

RETI

2.3 Convention Details

In this chapter, each instruction is described as follow



2.4 Instruction Details

2

Example

Coding

Description

• Output relay 0500 remains ON after input relay 0000 turns OFF.

0500 turns OFF when input relay 0001 turns ON.• SET instruction sets a latch whereas RES instruction resets it.

• RES instruction not only turns OFF relay coils but serves as a re

a timer or counter is used as an operand.

Note: The SET and RES instructions can be entered in any order. N

that priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.In the above example, when both 0000 and 0001 are ON, RES has

SET, causing 0500 to remain OFF.

Tips

Differences between SET/RES and KEEP

Basically , SET/RES and KEEP ( p. 3-57 and p. 3-71 ) serve the sa• SET and RES can be used separately. Therefore, RES can be p

SET.

Another instruction may be placed between SET and RES.• KEEP needs only three lines of program, therefore saving memo

used a number of times.

Operands

Key operation

SET: Set

RES: Reset

Turns ON specified relay whand enables this relay to rem

Turns OFF specified relay, ti

when input is ON.

SET1

RES0

nnnnRES

nnnnSET

0000

0001

0500SET

0500RES

Line No. Instruction Operand

0000 LD 0000

0001 SET 0500

0002 LD 0001

0003 OUB 0500

0001 00020001

0002 C000RES

#00100

00000C000

#00100

0000C000

0000

0001 0500SET

0500RES

0000

0001RES

KEEP

0500SET

L D 0 00 0RES 0500

L D 0 00 1SET 0500

:

:

SET / RES

NEW KV KV-300 KV-10/16 KV-24

0500 to 1915 0500 to 1915 0500 to 1915 0500 to2009 2009 2009 20

2100 to 17915 2100 to 17915 2100 to 2915 2100 to

T000 to T249 T000 to T249 T000 to T063 T000 toC000 to C249 C000 to C249 C000 to C063 C000 to

CTH0 to CTH1 (RES only)CTC0 to CTC3 (RES only)

InstructionDescribes the nameand brief function ofthe instruction.

Instruction keyRepresents the key orfunction No. for entry.

LRola

MnemonicRepresents the instruc-tion in ladder language.

• Example

• Timing diagram• DescriptionPerform programmingusing the given exampleto gain experience.

NoteDescribes the notesfor the instruction.

TipsDescribes hands-ontechniques for efficientprogramming.

Operand

Shows operands (elementNos.) that can be used forthe instruction.

Key operation






2

This section describes the basic instructions used for programmicomplete programs with only these basic instructions.

Instruction Mnemonic

Load LD

Load Bar LDB

And AND

And Bar ANB

OR: Or OR

ORB: Or Bar ORB

ANL: And Load ANL

Or Load ORL

OUT: Out OUT

OUB: Out Bar OUB

SET: Set SET

RES: Reset RES

TMR: 0.1-s Timer TMR

TMH: 0.01-s Timer TMH (FUN49)

TMS: 1-ms Timer TMS (FUN51)

C: Counter C

UDC: Up-Down Counter UDC (FUN52)

DIFU: Differentiate Up DIFU (FUN10)

DIFD: Differentiate Down DIFD (FUN09)

KEEP: Keep KEEP (FUN22)SFT: Shift SFT (FUN39)

HSP: High Speed HSP (FUN18)

MC: Master Control MC (FUN24)

MCR: Master Control Reset MCR (FUN25)

MEMSW: Memory Switch MEMSW (FUN26)

NOP: No Operation NOP

END: End END

ENDH: End Hi END

LD: Load

LDB: Load Bar

Connects N.O

Connects N.C

LD7

LDB4

nnnn

nnnn:

:



Example

Coding

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 tuWhen input relay 0001 turns OFF, output relay 0501 t

Description

• LD and LDB instructions are used to connect a con• LD and LDB instructions are also used to separate

ORL instruction is used.

Operands

Key operation

Example: LD C014

0000 0500

0001 0501


0000 LD 0000

0001 OUT 0500

0002 LDB 0001

0003 OUT 0501

( )LD7

Operand ENT ENTLD7

LDB4

CTR SET1

Visual KV KV-300 KV-10/16

0000 to 17915 0000 to 0009 0000 to 2915T000 to T249 0500 to 17915 T000 to T063C000 to C249 T000 to T249 C000 to C063CTC0 to CTC3 C000 to C249 CTC0 to CTCCTC0 to CTC3


AND: And

ANB: And Bar

Connects N.O. contact in previous contact.

Connects N.C. contact in sprevious contact.

AND

8

ANB

5

nnnn

nnnn:

:

AND / ANB



2

Example

Coding

To turn ON 0503, 0002 must be ON, 0003 OFF, and 0004 ON atAND and ANB instructions are used when two or more condition0002: ON, 0003: OFF, 0004: ON) must be satisfied at the same t

Description

• As many contacts as desired can be connected in series provare used in the same program.

• As OUT 0503 shown in the above example, when an AND or

used immediately after an OUT instruction to connect the othecontact (0004 in the example), the AND or ANB can be used desired, provided the program syntax is correct.

• The following two circuits operate in the same manner, but thcircuits are different.

0000 0500

0002

0001

0004

0003 0501

0502

0503


0000 LD 0000

0001 AND 0001

0002 OUT 05000003 LD 0002

0004 ANB 0003

0005 OUT 0501

0006 OUT 0502

0007 AND 0004

0008 OUT 0503

Operand


0000 to 17915 0000 to 0009 0000 to 2915T000 to T249 0500 to 17915 T000 to T063C000 to C249 T000 to T249 C000 to C063



Key operation Example: AND T012

( )SET1

TMR(T)

AND8 AND

8ANB5

ANL2Operand ENT

R-SRCHENTR-SRCH

CTC0 to CTC3 C000 to C249 CTC0 to CTC


OR: Or

ORB: Or Bar

Connects N.O. contact iprevious contact.

Connects N.C. contact inprevious contact.

OR9

ORB6

nnnn

nnnn:

:

OR / ORB



2

Example

Coding

The OR and ORB instructions are used when at least one of the two sets of conditions: <0003: ON, 0004: ON>, and <0000: ON, 0OFF> are given) must be satisfied.

Description

• The OR and ORB instructions are used to connect in parallel these instructions with contacts on the previous line. An LD oused together with the OR and ORB instructions.

• As many contacts as desired can be connected in parallel proin the same program.

Note: Output circuits (except for and )cannot be included in the parallel connection.

0000 0003 0500

0004

0002

0001


0000 LD 0000

0001 OR 0000

0002 ORB 0002

0003 AND 0003

0004 OR 0004

0005 OUT 0500

0000

0001

To turn ON 0500,

0000 must be ON or

0001 ON or

0002 OFF.

0003 must be ON, and

or,

0004 must be ON.

Incorrect

ANL: And LoadConnects in smore contact

ANL2 :



Example

Coding

Description

The above example shows a serial connection betwee

and Block B

0001

0003 . The ANL instruction is used to

series.

Operands

Key operation

0000 0001 0500

00030002

ANL


0000 LD 0000

0001 OR 0002

0002 LD 0001

0003 OR 0003

0004 ANL0005 OUT 0500

ANL2

ENTR-SRCH

2.4 Instruction Details ANL

0000 0002 05000004

Applications of ANL Instruction



2

0003 00050001


0000 LD 0000

0001 OR 0001

0002 LD 0002

0003 OR 0003

0004 ANL

0005 LD 0004

0006 OR 0005

0007 ANL

0008 OUT 0500

Line No. Instruction

0000 LD

0001 OR

0002 LD

0003 OR

0004 LD

0005 OR

0006 ANL

0007 ANL

0008 OUT

Coding (1) Coding (2)

• The ANL instruction can be used as many times as desired. Nin example (2) above, ANL is entered one less time than the nbe connected.

• Also, ANL can be used only 8 times or less in example (2), w(1) it can be used as many times as desired.

Note: "LOGIC ERROR" is displayed on the programmer when A

more times in example (2).

Example

ORL: Or LoadConnects in pmore contacts

ORL3 :



Coding

Description

The above example shows a parallel connection of Bl

and Block B0002 0003

. The ORL instruction is used to

parallel.

Operands

Key operation


0000 LD 0000

0001 AND 0001

0002 LD 0002

0003 AMD 0003

0004 ORL

0005 OUT 0500

0000 0001 0050

00030002ORL

ORL3

ENTR-SRCH


Applications of ORL Instruction

0000 0001 0500

00030002

Block

Block

ORL



2

Coding (1) Coding (2)

• The ORL instruction can be used as many times as desired. Nin example (2) above, ORL is entered one less time than the nbe connected.

• Also, ORL can be used only 8 times or less in example (2), w(1) it can be used as many times as desired.

Note: "LOGIC ERROR" is displayed on the programmer when Oor more in example (2).

00030002

00050004


0000 LD 0000

0001 AND 0001

0002 LD 0002

0003 AND 0003

0004 ORL

0005 LD 0004

0006 AND 0005

0007 ORL

0008 OUT 0500


0000 LD

0001 AND

0002 LD

0003 AND

0004 LD

0005 AND

0006 ORL

0007 ORL

0008 OUT

Block

Block

OUT: Out

OUB: Out Bar

Outputs ON/OF

Outputs inverterelay coil.

OUTA

OUBB

nnnn

nnnn

:

:



Example

Coding

Description

• When input relay 0000 turn ON, output relay 0500 0501 turns OFF.

• The OUT and OUB instructions are used to drive rinternal utility relays, and latch relays. These instrurelays, timers, counters, or data memories.

Note: Double coilWhen one output relay receives input from two or mor

priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.

When 0001 is OFF, 0500 does not turn ON even if 00

Operands

Key operation

0000 0500

0501


0000 LD 0000

0001 OUT 0500

0002 OUB 0501

OUT OUB


0000 to 1915 0500 to 1915 0500 to 1915

2009 2009 20092300 to 17915 2300 to 17915 2300 to 2915


SET: Set

RES: Reset

Turns ON specified relay and enables this relay to r

Turns OFF specified relaywhen input is ON.

SET1

RES0

nnnnRES

nnnnSET:

:

SET / RES



2

Example

Coding

Description

• Output relay 0500 remains ON after input relay 0000 turns OF0500 turns OFF when input relay 0001 turns ON.

• SET instruction sets a latch whereas RES instruction resets it• RES instruction not only turns OFF relay coils but serves as a

a timer or counter is used as an operand.

Note: The SET and RES instructions can be entered in any orde

that priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.In the above example, when both 0000 and 0001 are ON, RES hSET, causing 0500 to remain OFF.

Tips

Differences between SET/RES and KEEP

Basically , SET/RES and KEEP ( See above and p. 3-80 ) serve• SET and RES can be used separately. Therefore, RES can b

SET.

Another instruction may be placed between SET and RES.• KEEP needs only three lines of program, therefore saving me

used a number of times.

0000

0001

0500SET

0500RES


0000 LD 0000

0001 SET 0500

0002 LD 0001

0003 OUB 0500

0001 00020001

0002 C000RES

#00100

00000C000

#00100

0000C000

0000 0500 0000 KE

Example

TMR: 0.1-s TimerSets a 16-bit on-deladown in 0.1-s decrem

TMR(T)

#ddddd

Txxx

0000 #00010

:



Coding

Timing diagram (TMR000 #00010 and 0500 in the a

• 0500 and 0501 turn ON 1 second and 3.5 secondsON.

• TMR000 is a subtraction timer. When the current vcontact T000 turns ON, and then output relay 0500

• When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 ancurrent values of TMR000 and TMR001 are reset.

Note 1: The TMR number cannot be the same as any otherinstructions in the same program.Note 2: The current value of TMR is not retained but is rese

*1 0.1 s*2 0.1 s

0000

T000

T001

0500

0501

#00010

T000

#00035

T001

Preset value: 1 s

Preset value: 3.5 s


0000 LD 0000

0001 TMR 000 #00010*1

0002 TMR 001 #00035*2

0003 LD T000

0004 OUT 0500

0005 LD T0010006 OUT 0501

OFF

ON

ON

#00010

#00000

Output 0500

Scan

Input 0000

Current

value ofTMR000


Example

TMH: 0.01-s TimerSets a 16-bit on-decounts down in 0.0

LDB4

OR9FUN

#ddddd Txxx TH

0000 #00010

:

TMH



2

Coding

Description

• 0500 and 0501 turn ON 0.1-s after 0000 turns ON.• TMH is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "

contact of the timer No. turns ON.• When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 turns OFF an

of TMH000 is reset.

Note 1: The TMH number cannot be the same as any other TMSUDC instructions in the same program.

Note 2: The current value of TMH is not retained but is reset to tpower failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.

• When the number specified by TMH is used as a contact (T00example), this contact can be used as many times as desiredused as both N.O. and N.C. contacts.

• Timer accuracy = 0.01 sec. + (1 scan time) (max.)

Operand

*1 0.01 s x 10 = 0.1

0000

T000 0500

#00010

T000 T

H


0000 LD 0000

0001 TMH 000 #00010*1

0002 LD T000

0003 OUT 0500

Visual KV KV-300 KV-10/16 KV

E l

TMS: 1-ms TimerSets a counts

SET1

ANB5FUN

#ddddd

Txxx T

S:



Example

Coding

Description

• 0500 and 0501 turn ON 0.1-s after 0000 turns ON.• TMS is a subtraction timer. When the current value

contact of the timer No. turns ON.• When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 tu

of TMS000 is reset.

Note 1: The TMS number cannot be the same as anyUDC instructions in the same program.

Note 2: The current value of TMS is not retained but ipower failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.

• When the number specified by TMS is used as a cexample), this contact can be used as many times used as both N.O. and N.C. contacts.

• Timer accuracy = 0.001 sec. + (1 scan time) (max.

Operand

*1 0.00

0000

T000 0500

#00100

T000 T

SPreset value: 0.1 s


0000 LD 0000

0001 TMS 000 #00010*1

0002 LD T000

0003 OUT 0500


No 000 to 249 No 000 to 249 No 000 to 06


Applications of TMR instruction

One-shot circuit

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON andspecified time.

0000 #00020T000

2 sec.

TMR



2

Timing diagram

Coding

Off-delay circuit

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. 05specified time after 0000 turns OFF.

Timing diagram

T0000500 0500

T000

OFF

ON

ONON

0000

0500


0000 LD 0000

0001 OR 0500

0002 TMR 000 #00020

0003 ANB T000

0004 OUT 0500

0000 T000

00000500

0500

#00020 T000

OFF

ON

0000

2 sec.

2 sec. 2 sec.

On-delay circuit

Output relay 0500 turns ON in a specified time after inWhen input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 a

0000 #00020

T0002 sec.



Timing diagram

Coding

Flicker circuit

Output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF repeatedly while

Timing diagram

T000 0500

OFF

ON

ON

0000

0500


0000 LD 0000

0001 TMR 000 #00020

0002 LD T000

0003 OUT 0500

0000 T001

T000

0500

#00020 T000

#00010 T001

2 sec.

1 sec.

OFF

ON

0000

2 s 1 s


Example

C: Counter Sets a 16-bit up-#ddddd

nnnnCxxx

CTR(C) :

Reset input Preset value

C



2

Coding

Timing diagram (C000#00010 and 0500 in the above example

Description

• The counter performs one counting at the rising edge of clockcurrent value reaches the preset value, the coil of specified N

• When a reset input (b [N.C.] contact) turns ON, the current co

to "00000".• Since C is software counter which is set on the program, the

depends on the scan time.

N t 1 Wh t i t i id d i (N O ) t t

0001

C000 0500

0000

#00010C000


0000 LDB 0001

0001 C 000 #00010 0000

0002 LD C000

0003 OUT 0500

ON

#00010 1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

C0000500

OFF

ON

Counter No.

Count input

0000(Count input)

0001(Reset input)

Current valueof C000

Details of counter

Extended ladder

• The counter for the KV Series supports the extend

0001 2007

0000

#00010C005

KV counter



• The extended ladder allows you to connect contaccounter in series, reducing the number of ladder pr

In the following example, the counter starts counting wturns ON. When the current counter value reaches "30ON.

Coding

"CON instruction" (p. 3-102)

For details of the extended ladder, refer to "1.5 Extend(p.3-29).

Operands

Key operation

0002 C002 0500

0004

#00300C002


0000 LDB 0002

0001 C 002 #00300 00040002 CON

0003 AND C002

0004 OUT 0500

0000

CTR(C)

Operand(Counter No.)

Operand(Preset value)

Ope(Coun


No.: 000 to 249 No.: 000 to 249 No.: 000 to 06Count input: Count input: Count input:

0000 to 17915 0000 to 0009, 0000 to 29150500 to 17915

Preset value: Preset value: Preset value#00001 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #655


Applications of C (counter) instruction

Long-duration timer

Sets a long-duration timer by combining a timer and a counter.Output 0500 turns ON in 1 hour.

CodingSpecial utility relay(1-second clock)

C



2

0001

20090000

#09999C002

2002 0500#01000C002

"1.3.7 Special Utility Rela

Accumulator timer (Remains ON in case of power failure)

Coding

Large capacity counter

Coding

Multi-level setting

Sets a multi-level counter using arithmetic instructions.

0000

2006

#03600C002

C002 0500

( )


0000 LDB

0001 C

0002 LD

0003 OUT

0001 C001

2006

#03600C001

0001

1000

#00600C002

C001 1000


0000 LDB

0001 ANB

0002 C

0003 LD

0004 OUT0005 LDB

0006 C

0002 C000

0000

#10000C000

0002

1000

#65535C001

C000 1000


0000 LDB0001 ANB

0002 C

0003 LD

0004 OUT

0005 LDB

0006 C

Coding

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No.

0000 LDB 0002 0010

0001 C 002 #09999 0000 0011

0002 LD 2002 0012

0003 LDA C002 00130004 CON 0014



Counter multi-level setting

Outputs in 3 different levels according to the counter c

Current counter value• 00000 to 00999 0500 turns ON.• 01000 to 01999 0501 turns ON.• 02000 to 02999 0502 turns ON.

Coding

0005 MPS 0015

0006 CMP #01000 0016

0007 CON 0017

0008 ANB 2009 0018

0009 OUT 0500 0019

0001

20110000

#09999C000

2002 0500#00999CMP

2011 0501#01999CMP

2011

0500

0500 0501 0502#02999

CMP

C000LDA


0000 LDB 0001

0001 C 000 #09999 0000

0002 LD 2002

0003 LDA C000

0004 CON

0005 MPS

0006 CMP #00999

0007 CON

0008 ANB 2011

0009 OUT 0500


Example

UDC: Up-Down Counter Sets a 16-bit upUDC xxx

#dddddUPDWRES

ANB5

ANL2FUN

0001 UDC 000

UP

UP input

:

UDC



2

Coding

Timing diagram

• When UP input relay (0001) turns ON, the current value of the

incremented by one. When DOWN input relay (0002) turns Ois decremented by one.

• C000 turns ON when the digit shifts (#00009 to #00000, or #0

0002

0003

C000 0500

UP #00009

DW

RES


0000 LD 0001

0001 LD 0002

0002 LD 0003

0003 UDC 000 #00009

0004 LD C000

0005 OUT 0500

1

2 34

56

78

9

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

DOWN input

RESET input

Current value of C000Carry Carry

ON

C000

Input for up 0001

Input for down 0002

Input for resetting0003

Application of UDC instruction

Multi-level UP/DOWN counter

UP/DOWN counter which allows a count setting value

Low-order 4

0001

0002

UDC 000

UP #09999

BCD



Coding

The example below outputs the high-order 4 digits of 8the low-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC000.

0003

DW

RES

C000

C000

0001

0002

0003

UDC 001

UP #09999

DW

RES

00010002

BCDHigh-order 4


0000 LD 0001

0001 LD 0002

0002 LD 0003

0003 UDC 000 #09999

0004 LD C000

0005 AND 0001

0006 LD C000

0007 AND 0002

0008 LD 0003

0009 UDC 001 #09999

0004 C000LDA TBCD 0500STA

C001LDA TBCD

0600STA

Up-inputDown-input

Low-order4 digits

High-order4 digits


Example

DIFU: Differentiate Up

DIFD: Differentiate Down:

Detects rising edge of inpuON specified relay for 1st

Detects falling edge of inpON specified relay for 1st

nnnn

DIFD

nnnn

DIFU

SET1

RES0

RES0

FUN

FUNOR9

0000 1000

:

:

DIFU / DIFD



2

Coding

Timing diagram (0000, 1000, and 1001 in the above example)

• The DIFU instruction turns ON the relay specified by the operscan time at the rising edge of input signal (0000).

• The DIFD instruction turns ON the relay specified by the operscan time at the falling edge of input signal (0000).

Note 1: Any DIFU/DIFD operand relay No. cannot be duplicated

Note 2: When an expanded ladder is used, the DIFU instruction operates without any problems. However, with the DIFD instructioutput relay 0500 does not turn ON because 1000 turns ON at ththe falling edge of input relay 0000 though input relay 0000 is alrecase, change the ladder diagram as in example c).

0000

1000DIFU

1001DIFD

Line No. Instruction Operand0000 LD 0000

0001 DIFU 1000

0002 DIFD 1001

ON

ON

0000

1000

1001

OFF

ON

0000 1000

1000DIFU

0500 0000 1000

1000DIFD

05

a) 0500 turns ON for one scan at the rising edge

of input relay 0000.

c) 0500 turns ON for one sca

b) 0500 does not turn ON for

the falling edge of input re

ON for 1st scan time only

ON for 1st scan time only

Application of DIFU, DIFD instructions

One-shot circuit using the differentiate instruct

When input relay 0000 turns ON/OFF, output relay 05shot (1 second).

Coding

0000 1000 Li N



Timing diagram

Alternating circuit

Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 050nately.

Coding

0000

1000 T001

0500

1001 T002

0501

0500

1000DIFU

1001DIFD

#00010

T001

0501

#00010 T002

Line No.

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

ON

ON

0000

1000

1001

0500

0501

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

0000 1000DIFU

Line No.

0000

1 s

1 s


Example

KEEP: Keep

Turns ON specified relay wrelay turns ON and enableremain ON. And, turns OFwhen RESET input relay tu

OR9

ORL3FUN

KEEP

SETRES

nnnn

KEEPSET i

:

KEEP



2

Coding

Description

• When SET input relay No. 0001 is ON and RESET input relay0500 turns ON.

• When RES input (0002) is ON, output relay 0500 turns OFF.• When both 0001 and 0002 are OFF, the previous status is ret

Note 1: When 0500 used for KEEP instruction in the above exaOUT instruction ( ), it forms a double coil. In such a case, prinstruction that is entered last "Double coil" (p. 3-65)

Note 2: When both 0001 and 0002 are ON, RESET (0002) has(0001), causing 0500 to turn OFF.

Tips Internal utility relay latching function

The ON/OFF status of an internal utility relay immediately beforestored by setting the memory switch (MEMSW).

"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92)

If this stored utility relay is used for a latching instruction (SET orsettings can be stored while the power is off.

Coding


0000 LD 0000

0001 DIFU 1000

0002 DIFD 1001

0001

0002

KEEP

SET 0500

RESRES RESET input

SET input

0001 KEEP

MEMSW

$0004

Stores the status ofinternal utility relays1000 through 1915.

Line No. Instruct

0000 MEMS

0001 LD

0500

Application of KEEP instruction

Detection of chewing gum packs

Detects chewing gum packs over the carton using the(0001 to 0003). If the switch detects that one or more missing, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.

The timing clock is generated from the visible beam p

E SET h ll i l



• Executes SET when all input relays 0000 to 0003 a• Detects presence/absence of chewing gum packs • Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500

Coding

Reflec

PZ2-6

ESON

GumGumGum

GumGum

GumGumGum

OFF ON

0000

1001

0000 1001DIFD

#00010 T001

1001 1000 T001

0500

0001 0002 0003 KEEP

SET 1000

RESRES

0500


0000 LD 0000 0007

0001 AND 0001 00080002 AND 0002 0009

0003 AND 0003 0010

0004 LD 1001 0011

Executes SET when all inpu0000 to 0003 are ON.

Detects presence/absence ogum packs all Down edge of

Outputs 1-s one-shot plus frrelay 0500 when 1000 is OF


SFT: Shift Sets a shift register.

Example

SFTnnnn

mmmm

DCLK RES

OR9

ORL3FUN

0001SFT

D

Data input

:

SFT

Relay shift



2

Coding

Timing diagram

0002

0003

1002 0500

D

1000

CLK

1002

RES


0000 LD 0001

0001 LD 0002

0002 LD 00030003 SFT 1000 1002

0004 LD 1002

0005 OUT 0500

0500

1002

1001

1000

0002 OFF

ON

0001

0003

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON ON

ON ON

10

0

ON ON

ON ON

10

0

10

10

10

10

10

0

A B C D E F G

RESET input

First relay No.

Clock

Last relay No.

RESET input

Data input

Clock

yoperation

Lost

Lost

Lost

Lost

Lost

Lost

Lost

Operands

* Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not asunit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation


1000 to 1915 1000 to 1915 1000 to 19153000 to 6915 3000 to 6915

*7000 to 9915



Applications of SFT instruction

Alternating circuit

Every time input relay No. 0000 turns ON, 0500 turns

Coding

Timing diagram

Reference: Alternating circuit can be configured withoThe following circuit does the same operation as the c "DIFU instruction" (p. 3-78)

Coding

1000

0000

2003

1000 0500

SFT

D

1000

CLK

1000

RES

Line No.

0000

0001

0002

00030004

0005

ON

OFF

ON ON ON ON ON

0000

0500

Line No.

0000

0001

0002

FUN OR

9ORL

3Operand(Relay No.)

Oper(Relay

ENTR-SRCH

0000

1000DIFU

1000 0500 0500


Resetting internal utility relays

When input relay No. 0000 turns ON, all internal utility relays No.turn OFF.

SFT instruction can be substituted for RES instruction. This applito reset many relays at one time.(All relays 3000 through 9915 can also be turned OFF at one tim

C di g

SFT



2 Line No. Instructio

0000 LD

0001 SET

0002 LDB

0003 T001

0004 LD

0005 LD

0006 LD

0007 SFT

0008 LD

0009 OUT

0010 LD

0011 OUT

0012 LD0013 OUT

0014 LD

0015 OUT

Coding

Repeat shift circuit

Turns ON every output for a second sequentially. Sets 1000 to 2scan only at startup) and shifts outputs from 0500 to 0504 every When 1005 turns ON, 1000 is set and the same sequence as ab

Coding

2003

2003

0000

SFT

D

1000

CLK

1915

RES

Line No. Instructio

0000 LD

0001 LD

0002 LD

0003 SFT

2003

T001

2008

T001

2003

SFT

D

1000CLK

1005

RES

1000

1001

1002

1003

#00010 T001

1000SET

0500

0501

0502

0503

Asynchronous shift register

Turns ON input relay 0002 to reset the shift register (1input to 0000 does not synchronize with the clock inpu

Coding

1100

0000 1100DIFU

1000SET

Line No.0000

0001



Timing diagram

2003

0001

0002

SFT

D

1000

CLK

1010

RES

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

ONOFF

ON

OFFONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

1001

0000

0001

1002

1000

Scan


HSP: High SpeedShortens time constant ofrelay to 10 µs to increase

SET1

AND8FUN

HSPnnnn

0000 HSP

0001

Example

Enable input

:

HSP



2

0001 0500SET

0002 0501SET

0003 0500

RES

0501RES

Coding

Timing diagram


0000 LD 0000

0001 HSP 0001

0002 LD 0001

0003 SET 0500

0004 LD 0002

0005 SET 0501

0006 LD 0003

0007 RES 0500

0008 RES 0501

ON ON ON

ON

0000

0002

0001

0003

0500

ON ON

ONON

ON ON

OFF

ON

5 ms 5 ms 15 ms

Note 3: The HSP instruction must be specified when tspeed counter is used.

Note 4: When special utility relay 2813 and HSP instrtime, priority is given to the HSP instruction and the timµs.

Note 5: Connect a non-contact input for the HSP instrbounce from being entered.

D il f HSP I i



Details of HSP Instruction

This section describes the operation of the HSP instru

Input signal width

Even if the input signal width is shorter than the scan when it turns ON during input process as in 1). Howevit turns ON any other time than the input process as inFor reliable signal reception, the input signal width mutime as in 3).

Scan time < Input signal width < Normal time cons

Switching the input time constant of expansion

Expansion input unit Expansion IKV-E4X KV-E4XTKV-E8X KV-E4XRKV-E16X

The input time constant of an expansion unit is initiallyIt can be changed to 10 µs by creating a ladder prograWindow, the LADDER BUILDER for KV programmingKV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.

Change the values of special utility relays 2609 to 261

OFF

ON

1) 2) 3)

Scan time

Outputdevice

Programexecution

Programexecution

Scan time

Inputdevice

Outputdevice

Outputdevice

Inputdevice

Special utility relay Description

2609 Input time constant of 1st unit. OFF

I i f d i OF


Applications of HSP Instruction

High-speed fetching of input data

When the input signal at 0000 has pulses of 5-ms interval and 2-input relay 0001 is ON, fetches data from input relay 0000 at high1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500.

Coding

0001 HSP Line No. Instructi

HSP



2

Timing diagram

* To input a signal having pulse interval shorter than the scan trupt instruction.

Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" (p. 3-191).

When using the interrupt instruction

0000

0000

0500 T000 0500

#00010 T000

0000 LD

0001 HSP

0002 LD

0003 OR

0004 TMR

0005 ANB

0006 OUT

ONOFF

ONOFF

0500

0000

0001

ON

2813SET

EI

#00010 T000

2008

0500

T000

END

INT

0500RES

0000

Turn ON for 1st scan only at startup.

Input time constant 10 µs

Turns ONtimer for 1swhen 0500is ON.

Resets 0500 when T000 turns ON.

Interrupt enabled

Initial setting

Sets interrupt input at 0000.

1-s timer

Scan

1 s

Turn ON for 1stscan only at startup.

MC: Master Control

MCR: Master ControlReset

Selects ON/OFFor counters set

Used in pairs wexecution of MC

LDB4

ANB5

ANL2

ANL2

MCR

MC FUN

FUN

0000 MC

Example

:

:



MCR

0001 0500

0501

Coding

Description

• When 0000 is OFF, both 0500 and 0501 do not turON.

• When 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON and 0501 turns ON.

• Regard the function of MC-MCR instructions as "p• When the input relay for MC is OFF, the instruction

MCR instructions function as follows:

Note: MC-MCR instructions cannot be used in the foll

1. Nesting 2.Improper c


0000 LD 0000

0001 MC

0002 LD 0001

0003 OUT 05000004 OUB 0501

0005 MCR

Instructions Function

OUT and OUB Correspond

TMR, TMH, and TMS Timer is res

C, SFT, KEEP, SET, RES, and CTH Previous sta

Other instructions such as TMIN Instruction i


Details of MC-MCR Instructions

Position of MC-MCR instructions

MC-MCR instructions can be used in the following positions.

1. MC-MCR instructions canbe placed before or afterSTP-STE instructions.

STP

x x x x

MC

STP

x x x x

STE

2. MC-MCR instructions canbe placed between STPand STE instructions.

3. STP-Sbe plaand M

MC / MCR



2

Making an input condition

The input condition for an MC instruction can be made as shown

Note: The scan time is not shortened even if the input relay of thOFF.

Output relays 0500 within and outside of the MC-MCR instructioncoil as shown below. "Double coil" (p. 3-65)

In this case, priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.

This relay is ignored.

MC

MCR

STE

STE

MC

MCR

0000 0001 0002 MC

MCR

0003 0500

MC

0003

0001

0500

MCR

0002 0500The last relay has priority.

Application of MC-MCR Instruction

Emergency stop circuit

When input relay 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON for 1 s, tand then 0502 turns ON for 3 s, repeatedly.Once input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500 turns ON whe

when 0002 is ON, and 0502 turns ON when 0003 is O

Timing diagram



CodingON ON

ON

ON

ON

ONON

ON ON

0003

0501

0001

0502

0000

Scan

0500

0002

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

1102RES

1101RES

1100RES

00000001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

0016

0017

MC

MCR

MCR

10011000

0001 1203

1200

1203

0500

1201

1204

0501

1202 0502

0002 1204

0003 1205

1200

0000

T000

1000

MC1001

1002DIFU1002

T000#00010

STG1100

J MP1101

1201 T001 T001#00020

STG1101

J MP1102

1202 T002 T002#00030

STG1102

J MP1100

Line N00000001000200030004000500060007

00080009001000110012001300140015001600170018

00190020002100220023002400250026002700280029

003000310032003300340035


FUN ANL2 ORB6 OperandENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Key operation

Operands

MEMSW:Memory Switch

Sets memory switches.FUNMEMSW$nnnn

ANL2

ORB6 :

MEMSW



2

$0000 to $FFFF

Example

Coding

• Specify 3 of SW3 and 0 and 1 of SW4 to reset the values of DM1900

up-down counter, CTH, and CTC when the operation is started.

Description Switch Nos. and functions are as follows. The switch consists of tion of the switch is specified by turning a certain bit ON or OFF.

0 0 1 1

3 2 1 0

1 0 0 0

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0

3 2 1 0

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 MEMSW$3800

SW1SW2SW3SW4

Loads me

from EEP

Uses latc

function.

Uses latc

function.Uses latc

function.

Uses latc

MEMSW

$3800


0000 MEMSW $3800

Switch

No. Function of switch ONRetains e0 Cancels error when power is ON.

1 Action when "Memory error" occurs at

startup (due to data memory, counter

value, or retained content being erased).

2 Uses latch function of internal utility relays

1000 through 1915.


3000 through 3915.0 Uses latch function of internal utility relays

4000 through 4915.


Note 1: When a read-protected program is transferrbe read or modified from this PLC. Before read-proteccreate a backup copy of the program.

Note 2: When a 24-bit high-speed counter comparawhich specifies the numerical values of a 24-bit CTC ihigh-speed counter.

Note 3: The value of MEMSW can be changed eventhe new operation is not actually performed. The chanKV is turned off or stopped once and then restarted.



(8)

23

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

11

1

1

1

1

1

(4)

22

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

00

0

1

1

1

1

(2)

21

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

01

1

0

0

1

1

(1)

20

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

10

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9A

B

C

D

E

F

0 0 0 0

3 2 1 0

0

0 0 1 0

3 2 1 0

2

0 1 1

3 2 1

6

SW4 SW3 SW2

Retains all errors when power is ON.Retains utility relays 3000 through 399

(Example)

Clears DM0000 to DM0999when power is ON.

Retains Internal utility relay5000 through 5999 and 6000through 6999.

Details of MEMSW

Setting memory switches

Specify a hexadecimal number for each switch No.

Tips • The data entered for the memory switch is set into

gram is transferred to the KV PLC.• When MEMSW instruction is not entered into the p

Hexadeci-mal number


NOP: No Operation Performs no opeRES0

ORL3FUN :

NOP END / ENDH

When ALL CLEAR [FNC60] or HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CL[FNC61] is executed to delete the program, NOP appears on all

program.NOP is not written by the KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDgramming support software.



2

END: End

ENDH: End Hi

Indicates end of each rout

Indicates end of entire pro

Normal program

ENDDM

ENDHTM

END

ENDH

EN

END

ENDH

END

Subroutine programInterrupt program

Normal program

END ENDHENT ENT

:

:

Description

• END and ENDH instructions must be used at the end of a pro• A subroutine or interrupt program can be written between EN

• When not using either subroutine or interrupt programs, write after END.

Note: When a program does not have END or ENDH, "ENTER EENDH" or "LOGIC ERROR" occurs when the program is convert

Operands

Key operation

Instruction Mnemo

W-ON: Wait ON W-O


Application instructions are used for batch processingtransmitted to specified memory locations or changedover, parts of a program can be repeated or skipped w



W-OFF: Wait OFF W-OF

W-UE: Wait Up Edge W-U

W-DE: Wait Down Edge W-D

CON: Connect CON (FU

MPS: Push MPSMRD: Read MRD

MPP: Pop MPP

STG: Stage STG (FU

JMP: Jump JMP (FU

ENDS: End Stage END (FU

STP: Step STP (FU

STE: Step End STE (FU

ITVL: Interval Timer ITVL

16-bit high-speed counter CTH

16-bit high-speed counter comparator CTC

16-bit high-speed counter CTH

16-bit high-speed counter comparator CTC

CALL: Subroutine Call CALL (FU

SBN: Subroutine Entry SBN (FU

RET: Subroutine Return RET (FU

FOR: Repeat Start FOR (FU

NEXT: Repeat End NEXT (FU

HKEY: 16 Key input HKEY (FU


Example

W-ON: Wait ON

W-OFF: Wait OFF

Turn ON second operandoperand relay contact turn

Turns ON second operandoperand relay contact turn

nnnnOFF

mmmm

nnnnON

mmmm

W-ONF

W-OFFL i

0000 0001ON

1000 W ON

:

:

W-ON / W-OFF



2

Coding

Timing chart

• W-ON

When input relay 0000 is ON, output relay 0500 turns ON as soo0001 turns ON. 0500 remains ON until 0000 turns OFF.

• W-OFF


0000 LD 0000

0001 W-ON 0001 1000

0002 LD 1000

0003 OUT 0500

0004 LD 0002

0005 W-OFF 0003 1001

0006 LD 1001

0007 OUT 0501

1000 0500

1000

0002

1001 0501

0003OFF1001

W-ON

W-OFF

ON

0000

0001

10000500

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

Description

W-ON

• When input relay 0000 is ON output operand 1000

0000 0001

1000

00000001ON

1000

1000

Sameoperation

Input operand

Output operand



• When input relay 0000 is ON, output operand 1000contact of input operand 0001 turns ON.

W-OFF

• When input relay 0002 is ON, output operand 1001contact of input operand 0003 turns OFF.

Note: Output operand relay Nos. for W-ON/W-OFF incated in a program.

Operands

* Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are

remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility

Key operation

0002 0003

1001

00020003OFF

1001

1001

W ON

Sameoperation

Input operand

Output operand


nnnn: nnnn: nnnn:0000 to 17915 0000 to 0009 0000 to 2915

T000 to T249 0500 to 17915 T000 to T063C000 to C249 T000 to T249 C000 to C063CTC0 to CTC3 C000 to C249 CTC0 to CTC

mmmm: CTC0 to CTC3 mmmm:1000 to 1915 mmmm: 1000 to 19153000 to 9915 1000 to 1915

3000 to 6915*7000 to 9915


Example

W-UE: Wait Up Edge

W-DE: Wait Down Edge

Turns ON second operanedge of first operand rela

Turns ON second operanedge of first operand rela

nnnn

mmmm

nnnn

mmmm

W-UEE

W-DEL o

0000

0001

1000W UE

:

:

W-UE / W-DE



2

Coding

Timing chart

W-UE

• When input relay 0000 is ON, output relay 0500 turns ON at roperand relay 0001.

• As soon as input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 turn


0000 LD 0000

0001 W-UE 0001 1000

0002 LD 1000

0003 OUT 0500

0004 LD 0002

0005 W-DE 0003 1001

0006 LD 1001

0007 OUT 0501

1000 0500

0002

1001 0501

0003

1001

W-UE

W-DE

ON

0000

0001

10000500

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Description

W-UE

• When input relay 0000 is ON, the output operand tthe input operand.

0000 1002

0001

1000

00000001

1000

1000

1002DIFUSame

operation

Input operand

Output operand



W-DE

• When input relay 0002 is ON, the output operand tthe input operand.

Note 1: If the input operand is already ON before inpu

output operand does not turn ON.Note 2: The W-UE/W-DE instruction must be used in executed every scan time (because rising and falling e

Note 3: Output operand relay Nos. for W-UE/W-DE incated in a program.

Operands

* Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility

0002 1003

1001

00020003

1001

1001

0003 1003DIFDSame

operation

Input operand

Output operand


nnnn: nnnn: nnnn:0000 to 17915 0000 to 0009 0000 to 6915T000 to T249 00500 to 17915 0000 to 2915C000 to C249 T000 to T249 T000 to T063CTC0 to CTC3 C000 to C249 CTC0 to CTC

mmmm: CTC0 to CTC3 mmmm:1000 to 1915 mmmm: 1000 to 19153000 to 9915 1000 to 1915

3000 to 6915

*7000 to 9915


Details of W-ON and W-UE Instructions

A combination of W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, and W-DE instructions effective when used in programs controlling sequential operationtion of one operational step starts the next step.This section describes minute differences in the operation of thes

Difference between W-ON and W-UE

Output relay 0100 turns ON when b0000 and 0001 turn ON in any orde

0000

0001ON

1000

W-UE / W-DE



2W-ON: Output relay 0500 turns ON when both input relays 000

ON in any order.

W-UE: Output relay 0501 turns ON only when input relay 0000input relay 0001.

Note: An input operand relay No. for these instructions can be duprogram, but output operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated.

As shown above, W-UE requires a certain order for turning ON re0001, but W-ON does not. Therefore, W-UE is suitable for circuitevery input; W-ON is suitable for circuits that go on to the next opcertain condition is satisfied.

The operation of W-OFF and W-DE instructions are same as abowhich turns relays OFF.

0000 and 0001 turn ON in any orde

Output relay 1001 turns ON only w0000 turns ON before input relay 0

0100 0500

1000

0001

1001

1001 0501

ON

0000

0001

(W-ON)

(W-UE)

10000500

10010501

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

Application of W-UE Instruction

Input sequence check

Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 is O0003 turn ON in this sequence.

Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 is

Coding0000 0001

1000Line No.



Timing diagram

Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement

Checks the input sequence. Output relay 0500 turns O

ON and then 0001 turns ON. Output relay 0501 turns turns ON and then 0000 turns ON.

Coding

0500

1000

1000 0002

1001

1001 0003

1002

1002

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

ON

ON

OFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF0003

00010000

0500

0002

0000 0500

0501

1001

1000

0001

1000

10010000

1001


0000 LD 0000 0005

0001 W UE 0001 1000 0006

Scan

Leave warehouse

Enter warehouse


Example

Coding

CON: ConnectRepresents series connecinstruction with another in

RES0

ORB6FUN

0000 0503050205010500

CON CON CON

:

CON



2

Coding

Description

• When input relay 0000 turns ON, 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503• When input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500, 0501, 0502, and 050• The CON instruction is used to connect instructions after outp

when the extended ladder is used.• When the LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support so

CON instruction is automatically converted into a mnemonic aladder diagram by just writing a connection line.

• The CON instruction does not affect the scan time.

Refer to "1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams" (p. 3-29) for details of eetecded lad

Operands

Key operation


0000 LD 0000

0001 OUT 0500

0002 CON

0003 OUT 0501

0004 CON

0005 OUT 0502

0006 CON

0007 OUT 0503

RES0

ORB6FUN ENT

R-SRCHENTR-SRCH

Example

MPS: Push

MRD: Read

MPP: Pop

Stores current istatus.

Reads input anstored with PUS

Reads and clea

status stored w

MPSC

MRDD

MPPc h

0000 05000001MPS

:

:

:



Coding

Description

• When input relay 0000 is ON:0500 turns ON as soon as 0001 turns ON.0501 turns ON as soon as 0002 turns ON.0502 turns ON as soon as 0003 turns ON.

• The MPS instruction is used at the start of an outp• The MRD instruction is used to connect an output • The MPP instruction is used at the end of an outpu

• When the KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDsupport software is used, the MPS, MRD, and MPPconverted into mnemonics and entered in the ladd


0000 LD 0000

0001 MPS

0002 AND 0001

0003 OUT 0500

0004 MRD

0005 AND 0002

0006 OUT 0501

0007 MPP

0008 AND 0003

0009 OUT 0502

0501

0002

0003 0502

MRD

MPP


MPS/MRD/MPP applications

MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions are used as follows:

Start of branch0002 0003 0004 0500

0006 0501

0007 0502

MPS

MRD

Connection of branch

Connection of branch

MPS / MRD / MPP



2

Coding

Coding

0008 0503MRD

MPP

End of branch

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruct

0000 LD 0000 0009 MPP

0001 MPS 0010 AND

0000 0001

0004

0002 0500

0003 0501

0005 0502

0006 0503

MPS

MPS

MPS

MPP

MPP

MPP


0000 LD 0002 0007 OUT

0001 AND 0003 0008 MRD

0002 MPS 0009 AND

0003 AND 0004 0010 OUT

0004 OUT 0500 0011 MPP

0005 MRD 0012 AND0006 AND 0006 0013 OUT

0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0500

0501

0502

0503

0504

MPS MPS MPS MPS

MPP

MPP

MPP



Coding

MPP


0000 LD 0000

0001 MPS

0002 AND 0001

0003 MPS

0004 AND 0002

0005 MPS

0006 AND 0003

0007 MPS

0008 AND 0004

0009 OUT 0500

0010 MPP

0011 OUT 0501

0012 MPP

0013 OUT 05020014 MPP

0015 OUT 0503

0016 MPP

0017 OUT 0504


Example

STG: Stage

JMP: Jump

ENDS: End Stage

Executes instructions in STG block when

When transition condition relay is ON, turns Ostage and transfers execution to stage specif

When transition condition relay is ONof current stage.

ENDS

nnnn

J MP

nnnn

STG

LDB4

LDB4

LDB4

SET1

SET1

ANL2

FUN

FUN

FUN

Initial setting2008 1000

SET

:

:

:

STG / JMP / ENDS



21) When transition condition relay 0000 is ON, transfers executio2) 0500 turns ON. When transition condition relay 0001 is ON, tr

to STG1002.3) 0501 turns ON. When transition condition relay 0002 is ON, tr

to STG1001 and repeats the process above.When transition condition relay 0003 turns ON, transfers exec

and 1003.4) 0502 turns ON. The process finishes when transition conditio

ON.

Coding

0000

0500

1001 J MP

1000STG

0001 1002

J MP

1001

STG

0502 0004 ENDS1003STG

0501 0002 1001 J MP

1002STG

0003 1000 J MP

1003 J MP

1)

2)

3)

4)


0000 LD 2008 0013 MPS

0001 SET 1000 0014 AND0002 STG 1000 0015 JMP

0003 AND 0000 0016 MPP

0004 JMP 1001 0017 AND

Note 1: The following table shows the status of each JMP/ENDS when STG operand relay turns OFF.

Instruction Function

Relay for OUT instruction Turned OFF.

Relay for OUB instruction Turned ON.

TMR, TMH, TMS, Reset.C (counter) instructions

SET, RES instructions Current status is retain

Other instructions Not executed.



Note 2: STG/JMP/ENDS operand relay Nos. cannot b

Note 3: The STG instruction must be used in combinainstruction.

Note 4: The following instructions are not properly exeENDS instructions:

DIFU, DIFD, KEEP, UDC, SFT, FOR, NEXT, andDifferentiation type instruction (@xxx)

Operands

* Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility

Key operation

FUN

FUN ANL

2

FUN

LDB4

LDB4

LDB4

SET1

SET1

Operand(nnnn)

Operand(nnnn)

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH


1000 to 1915 1000 to 1915 1000 to 19153000 to 9915 3000 to 6915

*7000 to 9915


Details of STG instruction

STG instruction

The STG instruction is suitable for sequential step-by-step proceThe whole process is divided into several operational steps, and assigned to each step.

The process to turn on several lamps sequentially can be dividedfive steps:

1) Wait until the start switch is turned ON.2) Turn on lamp 1 for 1 second.3) Turn on lamp 2 for 3 second

STG



2

3) Turn on lamp 2 for 3 second.4) Turn on lamp 3 for 5 second.5) Turn on lamps 1, 2, and 3 simultaneously for 7 seconds.

These five steps are sequentially performed in order as shown inbelow.If a ladder program is written for such sequential processing withinstructions, the resulting program may be complicated and difficothers.

I/O assignments

Assign the input and output of the Visual KV Series as follows:

1) Start switch: Turned on when 0000 turns ON.2) Lamp 1: Lights when 0500 turns ON.3) Lamp 2: Lights when 0501 turns ON.4) Lamp 3: Lights when 0502 turns ON.

NO

YES

Start

StartSW ON?

Turn on lamp 1for 1 second.



Turn on lamps 1, 2,and 3 simultaneouslyfor 7 seconds.

Sequential processing

Sequence program

Assign the relays to execute the five processes on the

1 Wait until the start switch is turned ON.: Input re2 Turn on lamp 1 for 1 second.: Output3 Turn on lamp 2 for 3 second.: Output

4 Turn on lamp 3 for 5 second.: Output5 Turn on lamps 1, 2, and 3 simultaneously: Output

for 7 seconds.

The following is the ladder diagram for the I/O assignmwith and without STG instructions



with and without STG instructions.

• Without STG instruction

• With STG instruction

0000 T000

#00010 T000

1000SET

1000

T000 T001 1001

1000

#00030 T001

1001

T001

T003

T002 1002

T002 T003 1100

1101

1102

#00050

T002

#00070 T003

1002

1100

1100

05001000

1101

05011001

1102

05021002

OR circuit is reqdouble coil cann

1000 (0500) turnswhen input 0000 t

1001 (0501) turnswhen T000 turns

1002 (0502) turnswhen T001 turns

1100 (0500), 110(0501), and 1102 turn ON for 7 secowhen T002 turns

The process is rebeginning when T


Process progression with Wait instruction

2008

1100

0500

1001 J MP

1000STG

1002 J MP

1001STG

0501 1003 J MP

1002STG

0502

0500 0501 0502

1003STG

1004STG

1004 J MP

1000SET

0000

1100

1101

1102

1103

0000

1101

0000

11020000

1103

STG



2

Description

When using the W-UE instruction in a program with STG instructous page, you can create a program for an operation which moveevery time when start switch 0000 turns ON (process progressio

"W-UE instruction" (p. 3-98)

Tips

Resetting STG instructions (in the above example)

Use the SFT instruction to turn OFF all STG instructions in an em

Enter the initial setting process depending on the program. The acannot start the next operation without the initial setting.

"SFT instruction" (p. 3-82)

Note 1: The scan time is not affected by any instructions betweeENDS instructions which are not executed.

Note 2: STG operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a progr

Note 3: The STG instruction must be connected to the bus.

Note 4: The STG JMP or ENDS instruction cannot be used in s

1104 1000 J MP

0000

1104

2003

2003

SFT

D

1000

CLK

1004

RES

1000SET Initial setting

Reset input

STG start relay

Reset input

STG end relay

Cautions for using STG instruction

Interlock

When an STG instruction moves to another stage, theON simultaneously only for one scan. Provide an interwhich may be dangerous when turned ON in such occ

reverse rotation).

D bl il

0001

0501

0500

1001 J MP

1000STG

1002 J MP

1001STG

0002

0501

0500

Interlock



Double coil

A double coil can be used for an STG instruction.

Note: When STG 1000 and 1002 turn ON simultaneorelay 0500 of STG 1002, which is entered last.

Retaining output

Use the SET instruction to retain output.

When no JMP is usedWhen no JMP instruction is used, the STG instruction0001 turns ON. Be sure to use JMP after STG.

STG operand

When the STG operand relay remains ON, 0500 doesturns ON.

Double coil

1100

0501

0500

1001 J MP

1000STG

1002 J MP

1001STG

1101

0001ON

11000002ON

1101

0500 1003 J MP

1002STG

11020003ON

1102

0000

1001

1002

J MP1000STG

J MP

1001STG

0001

0500SET

0501SET

00011000STG

0500 0501

0000 1000


JMP operand

Unlike the STG operand relay, the JMP operand relay No. can beprogram.

DIFU/DIFD instructions in an STG block

The operand relay for an STG instruction cannot be used as the

00021001STG

1002 J MP

0501

00011000STG

1001 J MP

1002 J MP

0500

STG / JMP



2

The operand relay for an STG instruction cannot be used as the for a DIFU or DIFD instruction.

Application of STG and JMP instructions

Enabling a double coil

When start SW 0000 is pressed, the following output operation is

Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second.Output relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 seconds.Output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for 3 seconds.

Coding

0501

0001

3000

1000STG

3000DIFU

1001 J MP

0500

1100

T000 1001 J MP

1100DIFU

#00010 T000

05001000STG

T001 1002 J MP

#00020 T001

050105001001STG

T002 1000 J MP#00030 T0020502050105001002STG

1000SET

0000

Outputs 0500, 0501, and 0503 seconds.

1000 turns ON at the rising e

Output 0500 turns ON for 1 s

Outputs 0500 and 0501 turn


0000 LD 0000 0016 CON

0001 DIFU 1100 0017 TMR

0002 CON 0018 CON

0003 AND 1100 0019 AND

0004 SET 1000 0020 JMP

0005 STG 1000 0021 STG

Note: The double coils in different STG instruction bloever, when several STG instructions turn ON simultanone programmed last.

Conditional branching

When input relay 0000 (start SW) turns ON, output re

programmed for conditional branching, output relay 05when 0001 turns ON, and 0502 turns ON for 2 secondeach operation is completed, the program returns to threpeats the same steps.

11001100 10000000



Coding

1100

0001 1001

J MP

1100DIFU

1000

STG

0002 1002 J MP

0500

T000 1000 J MP

#00010 T000

05011001STG

T001 1000 J MP

#00020 T001

05021002STG

1000SET

0000


0000 LD 0000

0001 DIFU 1100

0002 CON

0003 AND 1100

0004 SET 1000

0005 STG 1000

0006 OUT 0500

0007 CON

0008 MPS

0009 AND 0001

0010 JMP 1001

0011 MPP

0012 AND 00020013 JMP 1002

0014 STG 1001


Example

STP: Step

STE: Step End

Executes instructions betwSTE when operand relay i

Used with STP to make a

LDB4

LDB4

ANB5

ORL3

STE

STPnnnnFUN

FUN

STP1000

0001 0500

0000 1000

:

:

STP / STE



2

1000STP

STP1001

1)

Coding

Description

• When 1000 is ON, 0500 turns ON/OFF as soon as 0001 turnsWhen 1000 is OFF, 0500 remains OFF after 0001 turns ON. W0500 are ON, 0500 remains ON after 0001 turns OFF.

• The program step specified withSTP-STE instructions are ex-ecuted when the STP operandrelay is ON. When the operandrelay is OFF, the programexecution jumps to STE instruc-tion. (Fig 1).

• STP-STE instructions can benested up to 8 levels deep as

shown in Fig. 2. When 1000 isOFF, steps 1) through 3) are notexecuted. Control jumps to theSTE instruction just above step

STE


0000 LD 0000

0001 OUT 1000

0002 STP 1000

0003 LD 0001

0004 OUT 05000005 STE

1000STP

STE

A

BF

Tips

Operation when STP turns OFF

Using a timer in an STP block

When a timer is used in a program defined with an STas follows:

a) 1000 is reset immediately when thetimer turns ON. The STE instruction isstarted with the timer remaining ON.

0000

T000

a)



b) 1000 is not reset immediately when thetimer turns ON but is reset at the nextscan. The timer is reset before the STEinstruction is started.

Usage of STG and STP instructions

STG instructionUse the STG instruction for process progression with

STP instruction

1000

T000

0000

T000

T000

1000

b)

0000

ENDS

ENDS

1002

J MP

1001

J MP

1000

STG

1001

STG

1002

STG

0001

0002

0003

0004

0500

0501

0502

1000SET


Operands

* Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to exunit ports can be used for internal utility relays.

Key operation

STP / STE


0000 to 17915 0000 to 0009 0000 to 2915 000T000 to T249 0500 to 6915 T000 to T063 T00C000 to C249 *7000 to 9915 C000 to C063 C00CTC0 to CTC3 T000 to T249 CTC0 to CTC3 CTC

C000 to C249CTC0 to CTC3



20000 1000

T000

1001SET

T000

1001

T000

1001RES

0500

0501

1002RES

STE

STP1002

STP1001

1002SET

1000DIFU

#00020 T000

1002

T001

T001

#00030 T001


0000 LD

0001 DIFU

0002 CON

0003 AND

0004 SET

0005 STP0006 LD

0007 RES

0008 LDB

0009 OUT

0010 LD

0011 TMR

0012 LD

0013 SET

0014 STE0015 STP

0016 LD

0017 RES

Application of STP and STE instructions

Process progression

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON for

output relay 0501 turns ON for 3 seconds automatically.Coding

FUN

FUN

LDB4

LDB4

ANB5

ORL3

Operand(nnnn)

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH ENTR-SRCH

Example

ITVL: Interval Timer Measures pulse-width in specified

ITVLPLSDMnnnnPAUSEmmmmRES

ITVL#TM

0000

0001

0002

PLS

DM0000

PAUSE

1000

RES

ITVL

"Pulse" input

Beginning of workpiece data table

"Measurement Pause" inputFirst flag relay

:



Coding

Operation in the above example

Measures pulse-to-pulse interval or pulse width for inpITVL instruction has two functions:• Measures pulse-to-pulse interval (cycle) or pulse w• Obtains the average of the contents of data memo

Each input has the following functions:• PLS

Executes measurement. In data memory measuredisabled in modes 0006 to 1999. Values are fetche

input is ON in modes 10000 to 11999.The measured value is written into the specified da

In the above example, the measured vwritten into DM0004 (DM0000 + 4 add

• PAUSEPauses the measurement when turned ON.

• RES

Initializes the contents of data memory (DM) when In the above example, DM0004 to DM0015 are

• DM0000 to DM0003 are designated as the area to

"Reset" input


0000 LD 0000

0001 LD 0001

0002 LD 0002

0003 ITVL DM0000 1000


Setting procedure

The ITVL instruction reserves 16 data memories: 1 specified datasuccessive data memories. It also reserves 4 relays: 1 specified sive relays.

Note: Do not use the 16 data memories and 4 relays specified w

tion for any other purpose.

Data memory (DM) assignment

• Set the initial setting data to the first four data memories.

Data memory

ITVL



2

ModeDM XX + 00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11 to 12

MAX value

MIN value

Measured value

MAX measured value

MIN measured value

Mean

Preset No.ofmeasurements

No.of measurementsperformed*

Higher digits*

Lower digits*

Work memory

MAX errorRelay +0

+1

+2

MIN error

Everymeasurements

completion

Used for computing measured valuesmeasured values, Min. measured valuvalues, and accumulating totals. (Can

Specifies measurement mode (0 to 5)

Presets highest value in measuremen

range.Presets lowest value in measurementrange.Specifies number of measurements fomean calculation (1 to 65535).

Stores current measured value.

Stores Max. measured value.

Stores Min. measured value.

Stores mean value.

Stores number of times measurementactually performed.

Stores higher 16 bits of accumulatingtotal of measurements. (#00000 to#65535) ($0000 to $FFFF)

Stores lower 16 bits of accumulatingtotal of measurements. (#00000 to#65535)($0000 to $FFFF)

Turns ON and remains ON for one scmeasured value exceeds Max preset

Turns ON and remains On for one sc

measured value goes below Min pres

Turns ON at completion of every mearemains ON for one scan time.

Relay assignment

Relay

Mode setting

Write the desired mode No. into the first data memory

Mode for pulse measurement

ModePulse-to-pulse

interval Unit Mode

10 m sec

100 m sec

1

Pulse-to-pulse interval measurement Puls

0 1

2 3

4 5



Mode for DM measurementWrite the desired mode No. into the specified data me

Example

Write "#0006" to obtain the average of the contents of

Note 1: When the mode No. is set to 10000 through 1the scan only when the PLS input relay is ON.

Note 2: When the average of a data memory is calcul"65535" are converted into corresponding compliment

Note 3: Some data memories after DM1000 are assig

1 sec

Mode No. DM No.

10000 DM0000Measure the coaverage.

10001 DM0001Measure the coaverage.

• • •• • •

10005 DM0005 Measure the coaverage.

000610006 DM0006

Measure the coaverage.

0007 10007 DM0007 Measure the coaverage.

• • • •• • • •

1999 11999 DM1999 Measure the coaverage.

2000 to 9999 12000 or more Not provided Cannot be use

4 5


Application of ITVL instruction

This section describes examples of pulse interval measurement.

Pulse interval measurement

Turns ON output relay 0500 for 3 seconds when the pulse intervarange of 490 to 510 ms.

2008

2008

2008

#00000LDA

DM0000STA

#00051LDA

DM0001STA

#00049 DM0002

Sets mode 0 (Unit:10 ms).

Sets max. setting value of measurement range to 5

ITVL



2

Coding

2008

2008

0000

0001

0002

T0001000

1001

0500

#00049LDA

DM0002STA

#00010

LDA

DM0003

STA

PLS

DM0000

PAUSE

1000

RES

ITVL

0500

#00030 T000


0000 LD 2008 0013 LDA

0001 LDA #00000 0014 CON

0002 CON 0015 STA

0003 STA DM0000 0016 LD

0004 LD 2008 0017 LD

0005 LDA #00051 0018 LD

0006 CON 0019 ITVL

0007 STA DM0001 0020 LD0008 LD 2008 0021 OR

0009 LDA #00049 0022 OR

1001 turns ON for one scan when measured valueis below min. setting value (490 ms).

Sets min. setting value of measurement range to 49

Sets number of averaging measurements to 10.

Measures pulse interval when input relay 0000 turn

Pauses measurement while input relay 0001 turns O

Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns O

1000 turns ON for one scan when measuredvalue exceeds max. setting value (510 ms).

A/D data measurement

Turns ON output relay 0500 when the analog input fro(range: 1 to 5 V) exceeds +3 V. Turns ON output relay+2 V. Writes the average into DM0100.Refer to the "KL-4AD/KL-2AD User’s Manual" for data4AD.

2008

2008

2008

#01600LDA

DM0000STA

#02000LDA

DM0001STA

#01000 DM0002

Measures contents of DM1600.

Sets max. setting value to +3 V (20



Coding

2008

2003

0001

0002

1000

LDA STA

#00100LDA

DM0003STA

PLS

DM0000

PAUSE

1000RES

ITVL

1001

1003 DM0100STA

DM0007LDA

0500

0501

Writes average into DM0100 every

Sets min. setting value to +2 V (10

Sets number of averaging measure

Pauses measurement when input Resets measurement when input r

0500 turns ON when measured va

0501 turns ON when measured va


0000 LD 2008 0014

0001 LDA #01600 0015

0002 CON 0016

0003 STA DM0000 0017


Example

CALL: Subroutine Call

SBN: Subroutine Entry

RET: Subroutine Return

Executes subroutine spe

Represents beginning offied by operand.

Represents end of subro

RES0

RES0

AND8

ORL3

ORL3

ORL3

FUN

FUN

FUNRET

SBNnn

CALLnn

0000 00CALL

END

:

:

:

CALL / SBN / RET



2

Coding

Description

• When input relay 0000 turns ON, the subroutine specified by executed. When the subroutine ends, instructions following C

• When the input relay is ON, the CALL instruction executes thefied by the operand.

• A subroutine program must be defined between the SBN and• A subroutine must be defined between END and ENDH instruct• Once a CALL instruction has been encountered, program exe

the subroutine specified by the SBN and RET instructions. On


0000 : :: : :

: LD 0000

: CALL 00

: : :

: END :

: SBN 00

: : :

: RET :

: ENDH :

SBN00

RET

ENDH

Application of subroutine

00

CALL

SBN00

2008

RET

END

B)

A)

Subroutine program

Normal scan

Subroutine

Program

Program



When CALL00 is encountered during normal scan exeexecuted. At the completion of this subroutine, progragram at B) immediately following CALL00. Then, the nan END instruction is encountered.

With no CALL instruction With CALL instru

Nesting structure of a subroutine

• Subroutine instructions can be nested up to 4 leve• A subroutine which is called from another subrouti

the call.

00

CALL

0000

A)

B)

ENDH

Program

Program

0000

B

AProgram

Program

00CALL

0001

END

Program


Calling a subroutine from an interrupt program

• Subroutines can be called from interrupt programs.• A subroutine which is called from an interrupt program should

the call.

SBN00

0001

RET

END

0500

Program

Subroutine program

CALL / SBN / RET



2

Note 1: Subroutine Nos. for SBN instructions cannot be duplicate

(It can be duplicated for CALL instructions.)Note 2: When a subroutine is executed, the scan time is extendeneeded for subroutine execution.

Note 3: The following instructions cannot be used in subroutinesSTG, JMP, ENDS, INT, RETI, and MEMSW

Note 4: The following instructions can be used only in subroutineecuted every scan time:

TMR, TMH, TMS, C, SFT, UDC, DIFU, DIFD, W-UE, W-DE, HK

and Differentiation type instruction (@xxx)

00CALL

0002

INT

0000

ENDH

RET

RETI

Call

Example

FOR: Repeat Start

NEXT: Repeat End

Executes progby number of

Represents e

FUN

FUN

SET1

ANL2

OR9

ORB6

NEXT

FORnnnn

2008 00CALL

END

SBN00

:

:



Coding

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No

0000 LD 2008 0107

0001 CALL 00 0108

: : 0109

0099 END 0110

0100 SBN 00 0111

0101 LD 2002 0112

0102 LDA #00100 0113

0103 CON0104 STA TM02

0105 CON

LDA

Specify the first DM No.

Specify the number of DMs to beinitialized.

#00100

LDA

2002

2002

#00050FOR

NEXT

RET

ENDH

TM02

STA

#00000

LDA

#TM02STA

TM02INC

(DM100)


Tips

Note 1: The FOR-NEXT instruction pair repeats the program for period at each scan. It usually is used in steps or subroutines.

Note 2: When a large number of loops or long programs are defiand NEXT instructions, the processing time for one scan may beresulting in "Cycle time error". In such a case, reduce the numbe

the ladder program.

• The FOR-NEXT instruction set can be nested up to 8 levels dnested levels will result in a FOR-NEXT error.

FOR#05

FOR / NEXT



2

• After repeating FOR-NEXT 3) five times, program execution t

instructions following the NEXT instruction.• FOR-NEXT 2) is repeated twice while FOR-NEXT 3) is execu

Thus, FOR-NEXT 2) is executed 10 times.• FOR-NEXT 1) is repeated 5 times while FOR-NEXT 2) is exe

Thus, FOR-NEXT 1) is executed up to 50 (5 x 2 x 5) times.

Operands

Key operation

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

FOR#05

FOR#02

1) 2) 3)

FUN

FUN

SET1

ANL

2

OR

9

ORB6

OperandENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENT

R-SRCH

ENT

R-SRCH


#0000 to #65535 DM0000 to DM1984 #00000 to #65535 #0000DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM000

TM02 to TM28 TM00 to TM29 TM00 to TM29 TM0

Indirect addressing

Indirect addressing

Indirect addressing is used to so you don't have to useNos. when the contents of data memory or a relay is swhen the contents of the internal memory is stored in

Method for indirect addressing

• Specify the operand for instructions as "#TMxx". Tconsidered to be the specification No. (indirect add

Example

When TM02 value is "0000", "#TM02" represents DWhen TM02 value is "10000", "#TM02" represents



, p

• Any of "02" through "29" can be specified for "xx".

• Specify the desired decimal number for "xx".• Numbers "0000" through "1999" specify DM0000 t

memory).Numbers "10000" through "27915" specify 0000 th

Example: LDA #TM15

This is the same operation whether "LDA DM0020" orspecified data memory or relay can be changed as deTM15.

Example: STA #TM02

This is the same operation whether "STA DM0000" orspecified data memory or relay can be changed as deTM02.

Range of DM and relay Nos. that can be specifi

TM15 value Data entered into internal register

20 DM0020

11000 1000 to 1015

TM02 value Specified destination

00 DM0000

13000 3000 to 3015

TMxx value DM/relay0000 to 1999 DM0000 to DM1999

2000 to 9999 Cannot be used.


Data memory block transfer

DM0000

DM0099

DM0100

DM0199

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The block transferred

The contents of DM0000 aretransferred to DM0100.

The contents of DM0099 aretransferred to DM0199.

Transfer ablock of

data.

FOR / NEXT



2

• Comparison between a program with normal addressing and addressing.

Program with normal addressing Program with indirect add

0000

1000

1000

1000

1000

DM0000LDA

DM0100STA

DM0001LDA

DM0101STA

DM0002LDA

DM0102STA

DM0003LDA

DM0103STA

1000 DM0098LDA

DM0198STA

1000 DM0099LDA

DM0199STA

1000

DIFU

END

ENDH

0000

1000

2002 #00000LDA

TM02STA

#00100LDA

T

2002 #TM02LDA

#TM03STA

TM02INC

T

#

N

E

1

C

The contents of DM0000 are transferredto DM0100.The contents of DM0001 are transferredto DM0101.The contents of DM0002 are transferredto DM0102.

••

•••

The contents of DM0099 are transferredt DM0199

Program stepsare reduced byone-eighth.

The first No. of the source D(DM0000).The first No. of the destinatio(DM0100).The contents of the DM indi"#TM02" is transferred to the

The contents of the internal to the DM indirectly address

Add "1" to both "TM02" and the Nos of the source and d

Description

• On line 1), "TM02" is assigned to the first No. of thassigned to the first No. of the destination 0100. Th

• On lines 2) to 4), the contents of DM0000 to DM00to DM0199.

• The ladder program on line 3) is executed 100 time

1st operation: TM02 value: 0000, TM03 value: 0100

2002 #TM02LDA

#TM03STA

T

DM0000 isindirectlyaddressed

DM0100 isindirectlyaddressed.

Addcurr"TM



2nd operation: TM02 value: 00001, TM03 value: 0101

100th operation: TM02 value: 0099, TM03 value: 0199

When the ladder program on line 3) is repeated 100 tispecified DM block are transferred.

This operation is repe

2002 #TM02LDA

#TM03STA

T

2002 #TM02LDA

#TM03STA

T

•

•

•

•

addressed.



Addcur"TM



Adcuof


Application of SBN-RET and FOR-NEXT instructions

Data memory shift

Shifts the contents of the current data memory (DM) to the next Dedge of the synchronous (timing) signal. As the number of DMs tcreases, the required scan time becomes longer.

0000 1000

2002

#00010LDA

TM03LDA

TM04STA

TM02SUB

TM05STA

#00001ADD

TM02STA

#00030 TM03LDA STA

00CALL

1000DIFU

END

SBN00

FOR

Synchronoussignal

Shift start DMNo. (DM0010)is designated.

Shift end DMNo. (DM0030)is designated.

Shift level

Data is shifted fromDM0030.

FOR / NEXT



2 Coding

2002 TM03DEC #TM03LDA #TM04STA TM04DEC

NEXT

FOR

2002 #00000LDA

#TM02STA

RET

TM05

ENDH

Shift level

Indirect addressing is usedto designate DM Nos.

Program lines whichdata shift are groupsubroutine.

Shift start DM No. is cleared to"#00000" after data is shifted.


0000 LD 0000 0020 STA

0001 DIFU 1000 0021 CON

0002 CON 0022 SUB

0003 AND 1000 0023 CON

0004 LDA #00010 0024 STA

0005 CON 0025 FOR

0006 STA TM02 0026 LD

0007 CON 0027 DEC

0008 LDA #00030 0028 CON

0009 CON 0029 DEC

0010 STA TM03 0030 CON

0011 CON 0031 LDA0012 CALL 00 0032 CON

0013 END 0033 STA

HKEY: 16-Key InputReads hexadecsharing basis aspecial utility re

FUN SET

1LD7

HKEYnnnn

mmmm

0005 HKEY00000500

Input relay

Output relay

:

Example

Coding




0000 LD 00050001 HKEY 0000 0500

COM24VDC

+

-

000 001KV

002 003

0

COM 500 501 502 503

4

8

C

1

5

9

D

2

6

A

E

3

7

B

F

Description

• When input relay 0005 turns ON, the operand hexa• HKEY instruction employs four inputs and four outp

Refer to "Fetching 16-key input" (p. 3-133) for the programming

• The HKEY instruction employs four input relays anspecified number.

• Inputs are processed on a time-sharing basis, so thscan time cycles (approx. 160 msec when the scan

• When a hexadecimal key is pressed, the HKEY inssponding special utility relay (2900 to 2915).


HKEY

Note 4: When two or more keys are pressed simultaneously evescan while relay 2814 is ON, relays 2900 through 2915 keep the soon as relay 2815 turns ON.

Note 5: The HKEY instruction does not properly operate if the scthan 200 ms.

Note 6: When the expansion I/O module is used as an operand,

unless the scan time is fixed to 2 ms or longer.

Operands

Visual KV KV-300 KV-10/16/

Input relay Output relay Input relay Output relay Input relay

0000 to 0500 to 00000 to 00500 to 0000 to 0415 0915 00009 00503 0415

10000 t 10500 t



2

2002 0001 C000

2815

0005

#09999C0000000

HKEY01040512

ENDH

END

2900LDA TBIN

C000STA

0600

FUN SET

1LD7 Output relayInput relay ENT

R-SRCHENTR-SRCH

Key operation

Application of HKEY instruction

Changing the preset value of internal counters using a BC

Coding

Line No. Instructio

0000 LD

0001 ANB0002 C

0003 CON

0004 AND

0005 OUT

0006 LD

0007 HKEY

0008 LD

0009 LDA

0010 CON

0011 TBIN

0012 CON

10000 to 10500 to10415 10915

: :17000 to 17500 to17415 17915

COM24VDC

+

-

0104 0105KV

0106 01071

100 101 102

2 4 8

COM 0512 0513 0514 0515

BCD Digital switch

Diode



2815

2002

2008

2010 20102900

LDA

$03FF

ANDA

TM05

CMP

TM05CMP

TM05

STA

TM06

STADMX

2815

2815 2915

2010 2010

DM0000STA

#00000

DM0000DW

TM06STA

#04SLA

DM0000LDA

2900LDA

$03FFANDA

TM05STA

END

ENDH

2814SET

HKEY

05000000

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No

0000 LD 2008 0020

0001 SET 2814 0021

0002 LD 2002 0022

0003 HKEY 0000 0500 0023

0004 LD 2815 00240005 LDA 2900 0025

0006 CON 0026

Fetching 16-key input

Writes the following 16-key input value into DM0000 aPressing the [F] key clears the input value.

Coding



Arithmetic instructions handle data as integers to perform arithmelogical operations.

Instruction Mnemonic

DW: Data Memory Write DW

Trimmer In TMIN (FUN50), @TMIN @(FUN50)

LDA/@LDA: Load A LDA (FUN23), @LDA@ (FUN23)

STA/@STA: Store A STA (FUN42), @STA@ (FUN42)

CMP/@CMP: Compare CMP (FUN04), @CMP @(FUN04)



2

p ( ) ( )

ADD/@ADD: Add ADD (FUN00), @ADD @(FUN00)

SUB/@SUB: Subtract SUB (FUN46), @SUB @(FUN46)

MUL/@MUL: Multiply MUL (FUN28),@ MUL @(FUN28)

DIV/@DIV: Divide DIV (FUN11), @DIV @(FUN11)

ANDA/@ANDA: And A ANDA (FUN01), @ANDA @(FUN01)

ORA/@ORA: Or A ORA (FUN31), @ORA @(FUN31)

EORA/@EORA: Exclusive Or A EORA (FUN15), @EORA@ (FUN15)

SRA/@SRA: Shift Right A SRA (FUN41), @SRA @(FUN41)

SLA/@SLA: Shift left A SLA (FUN40), @SLA @(FUN40)

RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right A RRA (FUN37), @RRA@ (FUN37)

RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A RLA (FUN35), @RLA @(FUN35)

COM/@COM: Complement COM (FUN05), @COM @(FUN05)

INC/@INC: Increment Memory INC (FUN19), @INC @(FUN19)

DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory DEC (FUN07), @DEC@ (FUN07)

MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer MPX (FUN27), @MPX@(FUN27)

DMX/@DMX: Demultiplexer DMX (FUN12), @DMX @(FUN12)

TBCD/@TBCD: Transfer BCD TBCD (FUN47), @TBCD @(FUN47)

TBIN/@TBIN: Transfer BIN TBIN (FUN48), @TBIN @(FUN48)

ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert ASC (FUN02), @ASC @(FUN02)

Internal register

KV executes all arithmetic instructions (i.e. data excharegister, in order to increase the processing speed.This section begins by describing details of the interna

Internal register

An internal register stores 16-digit binary data. That isstoring ON-OFF status data (1-0 status data). The intethe KV performs arithmetic operation. Because this is it is not necessary to take into consideration how the ioperates.

Arithmetic instructions executed using interna



1. ON-OFF status of the specified relay and 15 succe

resister.2. Current T/C value (decimal value = #*****) is autombinary value and input to the internal register.

3. Constant (decimal value = #*****, hexadecimal valconverted into a binary value and input to the inter

4. The range of numbers that can be specified is as fDecimal #00000 to #65535Hexadecimal $0000 to $FFFF

The constants can be entered by using @#, $ and the

keys.(Pressing @

#, $ once allows you to enter decimal valuhexadecimal values.)

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3

(Arithmetic instructions executed as binary code.)

Relay No.1.Current T/Cvalue. 2.

Constant 3. 4.

(decimal,hexadecimal)

Data memory,temporarymemory

LDA instruction

Internal registerSTA direction

Relay NoPreset T/Cvalue. 5.

Data memory,temporarymemory

Data mein indiretempora


Example

Coding

DW: Data Memory Write Directly writes constant iDW nnnn

DMmmmmDW

2008 #00050DM0001

DW$0018DM0000

DW


0000 LD 2008

:

First operand

Second operand

DW



2

• When starting operation, $0018 is written into DM0000 and #

Description

• Values are directly written into data memories, without using

Note: The contents of the internal register and the arithmetic flageven after the DW instruction is executed.

Tips

• The DW instruction can be used to reset the contents of data

Operands

0000 LD 2008

0001 DW $0018 DM00000002 CON

0003 DW #00050 DM0001

D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0


2008 #00000

DM0001

DW#00000

DM0000

DW

Operand

Data memory

Example

Description

• Arithmetic instructions have two instruction types: dscan type.

• The differentiation type instruction is executed onlyrelay 0000.

@xxxx: DifferentiationExecutes instrinput to input

@#,$ FUN xxxx

0000 0000 DM0000INC

Every-scan type instrDifferentiation type instruction

:



y

• The every-scan type instruction is executed every 0000 is ON.

Timing diagram

• Instructions with the DIFFERENTIATION function LDA, SAT, CMP, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, ANDA, ORRLA, COM, INC, DEC, MPX, DMX, TBCD, TBIN, A

Note:In the executhe coinput r

In the tion is DM00

relay 0

ONOFF0000

INC

ONOFF0000

INC

Diffe

Executed StoppedStopped Stopp

Every-scan type instruction

0000 DM0000INC

0000 DM0000INC

0000 1000 DM00001000


T000 preset value can be changed with trimmer as follows (#000

TMIN: Trimmer In

@TMIN: Trimmer Setting

Inputs numerical value strimmer of access windowinternal register.@

#,$

FUN

FUN RES

0ANB

5

RES0

ANB5

n TMIN

n TMIN

Inputs trimmer rotation angle of 0 to internal register.

Transfers contents of internal register to timfor use as preset value.

Turns ON output 0500 when current value

02002

TMIN

T000

STA

#000100000 T000 0500

T000

:

:

TMIN / @TMIN



2

Coding

Description

The TMIN instruction transfers the value of the KV series’ digital 65535) to the internal register. Additionally, if this value is transfecounter, relay, or data memory (by using the STA instruction), thethe destination can be changed without modifying the program.

Note: To check the setting value of the digital trimmer with the Khandheld programmer, select the "READ TRIMMER SETTING" f(Only values 0 to 9999 can be displayed.)

The @TMIN instruction is executed only once at the rising edge

pT000 reaches "#00000".

Timer T000 operates as ON-delay timer when 0000 is

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instructi

0000 LD 2002 0005 TMR

0001 TMIN 0 0006 CON

0002 CON 0007 AND

0003 STA T000 0008 OUT

0004 LD 0000

STATMIN

Digital trimmervalue of accesswindow [0 to 65535]

Internalregister

TransferNumeric data0 to 65535

Input

• T

va• R• D• Te

Applications of TMIN (Analog timer) instruction

Changing the timer setting value

Uses the digital trimmer (TMIN0) to change the settingsec.).

Coding

Line No Instruction Operand Line No

0 TMIN

T000STA

2002

0000

0500 0500 T000

#00010 T000



Changing setting values for multiple timers

Uses the digital trimmer (TMIN0) to change setting va6553.5 sec.).


0000 LD 2002 0005

0001 TMIN 0 0006

0002 CON 0007

0003 STA T000 0008

0004 LD 0000

0 TMIN

T000STA

T001STA

T002STA

#00010 T000

2002

0000

0500 T000

#00010 T001

0001

0501 T001

0500

0501

#00010 T002

0002

0502 T0020502


The LDA instruction inputs each data item to the internal registerThe STA instruction transfers the contents of the internal registerdestination.

LDA: Load A

@LDA: Load A

STA: Store A

@STA: Store A

Inputs value specified byregister.

Transfers contents of intedestination specified by o

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@

#,$

FUN

FUN

LDB4

ANL2

ORL3

ORL3

LDB

4

ANL2

ORL3

ORL

3

nnnnSTA

nnnnSTA

nnnnLDA

nnnnLDA

(#XXXXX)($XXXXX)

1 Constant Decimal

Hexadecimal

Storage Transfer Des

r

T/C presevalue

InputSource

LDA / @LDA / STA @STA



2

"Internal Register" (p. 3-126)

Operands

T XXXC XXX

DM XXXXTM XX

XXXX

2

3

4

LDA STA

T/C currentvalue

Data memoryTemporary memory

Relay No. Relay No.

Internalregister

Data memTemporary m

Relay No

(Data type: operand) (Data typ

Visual KV KV-300 KV-10/16 KV-

LDA STA LDA STA LDA STA LDA

0000 to 0500 to 0000 to 0000 to 0000 t17915 1915 0009 2915 6915

T000 to 2100 to 0500 to 0500 to T000 to 0500 to T000 tT249 17915 17915 1915 T063 1915 T119

(Currentvalue)

C000 T000 to T000 to 2100 to C000 to 2100 to C000 t to 249 T249 T249 17915 C063 2915 C119(Current (Presetvalue) value)

CTH0 to C000 C000 to T000 to CTH0 to T000 to CTH0 t CTH1 to C249 C249 T249 CTH1 T063 CTH1

(Presetvalue)

DM0000 to CTC0 to CTH0 to C000 to DM0000 to C000 to DM0000 DM1999 CTC3 CTH1 C249 DM0999 C063 DM199

TM00 to DM0000 to DM0000 to CTC0 to TM00 to CTC0 to TM00 t TM31 DM1999 DM9999 CTC3 TM31 CTC3 TM31

#00000 to TM00 TM00 to DM0000 to #00000 to DM0000 to #00000#65535 to TM29 TM31 DM9999 #65535 DM0999 #6553

$0000 to #TM00 to #00000 to TM00 to $0000 to TM00 to $0000

Arithmetic flag

2009 No change2010 Turns ON when the contents of the

"LDA #00000" is executed. Turns O2011 No change2012 Turns ON when the DM or relay ind

out of range. "Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Application of LDA and STA instructions

Changing the counter setting value

When 0000 is ON, #001preset value.

0000 #00100LDA

C001STAa)



Coding

Description

• In step a), contents of DM00100 is transferred to Cuse as the C001 preset value, when 0000 is ON.

• In step b) , contents of #00200 is transferred to C0

When 0000 is OFF, #00preset value.

When C001 current valu0500 turns ON.

C001 0500

b)0000

0002

#00200LDA

C001STA

#09999C0010001


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA #00100

0002 CON

0003 STA C001

0004 LDB 0000

0005 LDA #00200

0006 CON

0007 STA C001

0008 LD 0002

0009 C 001 #09999 0001

0010 CON

0011 AND C001

0012 OUT 0500


Transferring the current counter value to data memory (D

Coding

The C010 current value is transferred to D

0001

2002 C010LDA

DM0000STA

#09999C0100000

a)


0000 LDB 0001

0001 C 010 #099999 0000

0002 LD 2002

0003 LDA C010

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0000




2

Description

In step a), the C010 current value is transferred via the internal reinto DM0000, throughout the operation.

Transferring the contents of data memory as a setting va

Coding

Description

• In step a) contents of DM0010 is transferred to T002 via the

0005 S 0000

0002

T002 0500

b)

DM0010

LDA

T002

STA

0002

0003

DM0011LDA

T002STA

#00010 T002

a)

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruct0000 LD 0002 0007 STA

0001 LDA DM0010 0008 LD

0002 CON 0009 TMR

0003 STA T002 0010 CON

0004 LDB 0002 0011 AND

0005 LDA DM0011 0012 OUT

0006 CON

Outputting the input (ON/OFF status) of a basicsion output unit

The ON/OFF status of a KV series basic unit is outputnected next to the basic unit.

Coding

2002 0000LDA

0600STA


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA 0000

0002 CON

0003 STA 0600



Description

• The LDA instruction transfers the input (ON/OFF sthe internal register using binary numbers.

• The STA instruction outputs the binary data in the

OFF status from the KV-E16T(P) (output unit).

Refer to "1.3 Device Configuration" (p. 3-5) for relay number as

1 : ON0 : OF

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

D13

D14

D15

1

1

1

1

00

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

000

001

002

003

004005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

0000

0001

0002

0003

00040005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFFOFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

0600<STA>

0000<LDA>

Input (KV basic unit)

(Internal register) 16-bit

Binary number

Input


When a BCD (2-digit) digital switch is connected to inputs0007 and a toggle switch is connected to inputs 0008 thro

a) Use the value of the digital switch (2 digits) as the setting valu(C001).

b) The current value of the counter (C001) is output to 0500 to 0output.

Coding

0008

0010 0000LDA

$00FFANDA TBIN

C001STA

#09999C0010009

0011 C001LDA TBCD

0500STAb)

a)


0000 LDB

0001 C

0002 LD

0003 LDA

0004 CON

0005 ANDA

0006 CON




2 Description

<59>

D0

D1

D2

D3D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

D10

D11

D12

D13

D14

1

1

0

11

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

<TBIN>

1

0

0

11

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

$00FF<ANDA>

1

0

0

11

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

ON

OFF

OFF

ONON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

000

001

002

003004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

07000<LDA>

Digital switch

Reset input

ProximitySW input

SW input

Internal register

ON/OFFstatus istrans-ferred tointernal

register.

Only low-order 2digits isused.

BCDdata isconvertedinto binarydata.

0007 TBIN

0008 CON

0009 STA

0010 LD

0011 LDA

0012 CON

0013 TBCD

0014 CON

0015 STA

Note 3: When an STA instruction is executed while tha timer is smaller than the current value, the current vsetting value.

First-in first-out (FIFO)

The data once fetched is written into DM0004,DM0003, …, to DM0000 in this order. At the

unloading timing, data is fetched fromDM0004 and the contents of DM are shiftedto the next DM.

The OK/NG judgment and unloading timings can be ugrams.



Coding

0000 1000 0001

DM0004LDA

$1111LDA

DM0000STA

$0000CMP

DM0003LDA

DM0004STA

$0000LDA

DM0003STA

1000

0001 $5555LDA

DM0000STA

DIFU

2002 2010

DM0003LDA

$0000CMP

DM0002LDA

DM0003STA

$0000LDA

DM0002STA

2002 2010

DM0002LDA $0000CMP DM0001LDA DM0002STA $0000LDA DM0001STA2002 2010

DM0001LDA

$0000CMP

DM0000LDA

DM0001STA

$0000LDA

DM0000STA

2002

$0000 DM0004STA

0002

2010

LDA

ContentsWhen twprevious transferre

"$0000" is transferred to DMat unloading timing.

OK/NG judgmenttiming OK/NG judgment

"$1111" is transferred toDM0000.

"$5555" is transferred to DM0000.

Unloadingtiming


0000 LD 00000001 DIFU 1000

0002 CON

0003 AND 1000

0004 MPS

0005 AND 0001

0006 LDA $1111

0007 CON

0008 STA DM0000

0009 MPP

0010 ANB 0001

0011 LDA $55550012 CON

0013 STA DM0000

LD

Line No.

00350036

0037

0038

0039

0040

0041

0042

0043

0044

0045

00460047

0048


CMP instruction compares the contents of the internal register w

fied by the operand, and turns ON/OFF the special utility relays (according to the result of comparison.

Comparing the current value of the counter and CMP value

CMP: Compare

@CMP: Compare

Compares contents of intvalue specified by operan@

#,$

FUN

FUN

LDB4

RES0

LDB4

RES0

nnnnCMP

nnnnCMP

2009 2010

(Internal register) < (Operand) ON OFF

(Internal register) = (Operand) OFF ON

(Internal register) > (Operand) OFF OFF

:

:

CMP / @CMP



2

1) Output relay 0500 turns ON when the counter value is smalle< #01000).

2) Output relay 0501 turns ON when the counter value is equal t#01000).

3) Output relay 0502 turns ON when the counter value is greate> #01000).

4) Output relay 0503 turns ON when the counter value is equal t"2000" (C001 ≥ #02000).

Coding

0001

C001LDA

#01000CMP

0500

#09999

0003C001

2) (=)

1) (<)

3) (>)

4) (≥)

2002

C001LDA

#02000CMP

2002

2009

05012010

05022011

05032009


0000 LDB 0001 0012 OUT

0001 C 001 #099999 0003 0013 MPP0002 LD 2002 0014 AND

0003 LDA C001 0015 OUT

Operands

Key operation

Arithmetic flag

2009 T ON h h l f h CMP i

@#,$ FUN

FUNLDB

4RES

0 ENT

R-SRCHENTR-SRCH

Operand


DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM3

#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #655$0000 to $FFFF $0000 to $FFFF $0000 to $FFF#TM00 to #TM29 #TM00 to #TM29 #TM00 to #TM



2009 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operationother times.

2010 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operationtimes.

2011 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operationother times.

2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM

"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)

Description

• As shown in the above example, the CMP instructspecial utility relay (2009 to 2011) immediately afte

• The operation of the CMP instruction varies depeninternal register.

Note: Special utility relays 2009 to 2011 are used as a

varies depending on the execution of other arithmetic

Tips

An operand is compared with the internal register usin

When the internal register is assumed as "a" and the ostatuses of the special utility relays are as follows:

#00999CMP

DM0000LDA

2009

aLDA CMP

b


Application of CMP instruction

Multi-level counterCoding

0001

C000

LDA

#00999

CMP

#01999CMP

#02999CMP

0500

#09999

0000C000

2002 2011

05012011

05022011

0500

0500 0501

Line No. Instruc

0000 LDB

0001 C

0002 LD

0003 LDA

0004 CON

0005 MPS

0006 CMP

0007 CON

0008 ANB

0009 OUT

CMP / @CMP



2

20092002 0500DM0000<#01000

DM0000LDA

#01000CMP

Description

The following outputs are provided according to the current value

(Current value) (Output)0000 to 0999 0500 turns ON.1000 to 1999 0501 turns ON.2000 to 2999 0502 turns ON.

When comparing values with no specific range

Turns ON 0500 when the DM0000 value is smaller than the CMPTurns ON 0501 when the DM0000 value is equal to the CMP valTurns ON 0502 when the DM0000 value is greater than the CMP

0009 OUT0010 MRD

0011 CMP

0012 CON

0013 ANB

0014 ANB

0015 OUT

0016 MPP

0017 CMP0018 CON

0019 ANB

0020 ANB

0021 ANB

0022 OUT

Setting the upper/lower limit

Turns ON 0500 when the C001 value is 1000 or less.Turns ON 0501 when the C001 value is 2000 or more

Coding

2011

2009

0001

2002

2002

C001≤#01000

C001≥#02000

C001

LDA

C001LDA

#01000

CMP

#02000CMP

0500

0501

#09999

0000C001


0000 LDB 0001 0008

0001 C 001 #09999 0000 0009



Changing the CMP setting value

Compares the current value of counter C000 with the value of the CMP instruction is specified with the digitfollowing example changes the setting value to the ranThe upper limit of the digital trimmer is set to "100".

0500 turns ON when the current value of C000 is smavalue.0501 turns ON when the current value of C000 is equ

setting value.

0001 C 001 #09999 0000 00090002 LD 2002 0010

0003 LDA C001 0011

0004 CON 0012

0005 CMP #01000 0013

0006 CON 0014

0007 ANB 2011 0015

Sets range of

2009

2009

0001

2002

2002

C000LDA

DM0000CMP

DM0000STA

0 TMIN

0500

0501

#09999

00000C000


ADD: Add

@ADD: Add

SUB: Subtract

@SUB: SubtractMUL: Multiply

@MUL: Multiply

DIV: Divide

@DIV: Divide

Adds value specified by operinternal register, and inputs reinternal register.

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@#,$

FUN

FUN

LDB4

SET1

SET1

RES0

RES0

AND8

ANL2

ORB6

LDB

4

SET1

SET1

RES0

RES0

AND8

ANL2

ORB

6

nnnnDIV

nnnnDIV

nnnnMUL

nnnnMUL

nnnn

SUB

nnnnSUB

nnnnADD

nnnnADD:

:

:

::

:

:

:

Subtracts value specified by ocontents of internal register, a

back to same register.

Multiplies contents of internalspecified by operand, and inpsame register.

Divides contents of internal respecified by operand, and inpsame register.

ADD / @ADD / SUB / @SUB / MUL / @MUL / DIV / @DIV



2

ADD, SUB, MUL, and DIV allow arithmetic instructions between internal register and the value specified by the operand.

Note: Arithmetic instructions use binary numbers (BIN). Thereforthe internal register used for the arithmetic instruction must be BI

TBIN instruction to convert BCD data into BIN data.

Operands

Key operation

ADD

SUB

MUL

DIV

(#XXXXX)

($XXXX)

DM0000 to DM1999TM00 to TM31#TM00 to #TM29In

ternalregister

Op

erand

C o n s

t a n

t s

Datamemories

Hexadecimal

ResultArithmetic operation

Decimal

Interna

lregister


DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM000TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31 TM0

#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #0000$0000 to $FFFF $0000 to $FFFF $0000 to $FFFF $000

#TM00 to #TM29 #TM00 to #TM29 #TM00 to #TM29 #TM0

ADD (Addition)

Coding

Description

Th ADD i i dd h d l h

DM0000LDA

#00100ADD

DM0001STA

2002


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 ADD #00100

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001



• The ADD instruction adds the operand value to theregister and inputs the result back to the internal re

• In the above example, "#00100" is added to the coresult is stored in DM0001.

• When the contents of DM0000 is "#00100", for exaDM0001.DM0000 (#00100) + #00100 → DM0001(#00200)

Note 1: An overflow occurs when the operation result#65535). In such a case, only the data of the low-ordeinternal register. For example, when the contents of thand the operand is "$0001", the result will overflow.

Note 2: When an overflow occurs, special utility relay

Tips

Solution when operation result overflows 16 bits

Example:Internal register 1

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0+ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0

2009

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Operand

Overflow

Specialutility relay

Input back internal register

DM0000 DM0001 DM0002 #00000 DM00032002 2009


Application of ADD instruction

Total count

Writes the total count of counters C001 to C003 into DM0100. Thbe within #65535.

C di

Writes C001 current value intoC001LDA

DM0001STA

0000

C002LDA

DM0002STA

0000

C003LDA

DM0003STA

0000

DM0002ADD

DM0001LDA

DM0003ADD

DM0100STA

2002

#09999C003

#09999C001

0001

0002

#09999C002

0003

Writes C002 current value int

Writes C003 current value int

Writes total count (DM0001 +DM0003) into DM100.

ADD / @ADD



2

Coding


0000 LDB 0001

0001 C 010 #099999 0000

0002 CON

0003 LDA C001

0004 CON0005 STA DM0001

0006 LDB 0000

0007 C 002 #099999 0002

0008 CON

0009 LDA C002

0010 CON

0011 STA DM0002

0012 LDB 00000013 C 003 #099999 0003

0014 CON

0015 LDA C003

0016 CON

0017 STA DM0003

0018 LD 2002

0019 LDA DM0001

0020 CON

0021 ADD DM0002

SUB (Subtraction)

Coding

Description

• The SUB instruction subtracts the operand value f

DM0000LDA

#00100SUB

DM0001STA

2002


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 SUB #00100

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001



pregister and inputs the result back into the internal

• In the above example, "#00100" is subtracted fromthe result is stored in DM0001.

• When the contents of DM0000 is "#00150", for exaDM0001.DM0000 (#00150) – #00100 DM0001 (#00050)

Note 1: When the operation result is a negative valueis also stored in the internal register.Special utility relay 2009 turns ON.

Note 2: To convert the complement into an antilogarittion:

Inverted bit of complement + 1 = Antilogarithm

Tips

Solution when operation result is a negative value

0

1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

2009

Internal register

Operand

Underflow

DM0000LDA

DM0001SUB

DM0002STA

#0001 DM0003

2002 2009

2009

(Stores positive va


Application of SUB instruction

Comparing absolute values

Compares the DM0000 value to the DM0001 value and turns ONdifference between the two absolute values is greater than 5.

Coding

2002 20092009DM0000LDA

DM0001SUB

#0005CMP

1001

1000

2009 DM0001LDA

DM0000SUB

1000

2009#00005CMP

1001

0500


SUB / @SUB



2

0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 SUB DM0001

0004 MPS

0005 ANB 2009

0006 CMP #00005

0007 CON

0008 ANB 2009

0009 OUT 1000

0010 MPP

0011 AND 2009

0012 LDA DM0001

0013 CON

0014 SUB DM00000015 CON

0016 CMP #00005

0017 CON

0018 ANB 2009

0019 OUT 1001

0020 LD 1000

0021 OR 1001

0022 OUT 0500

MUL (Multiplication)

Coding

Description

• The MUL instruction multiplies the contents of the

DM0000LDA

#00100MUL

DM0001STA

2002


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 MUL #00100

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001



and value and inputs the result back to the internal• In the above example, the contents of DM0000 are

the result is stored in DM0001.• When the contents of DM0000 is "#00200", for exa

DM0001.DM0000 (#00200) x #00100→DM0001 (#20000)

Note 1: An overflow occurs when the operation resultsuch a case, only the data of the low-order 16 bits areand the overflow data of the high-order 16 bits is storehigh-order 16 bits is always stored in TM00.)

Note 2: When an overflow occurs, special utility relay

Tips

Solution when operation result overflows 16 bits

DM0000 x DM0001 DM0003 (High order 16 bits) D

F

(TM00)

F F F

0 0 0 2

F F F F0 0 0 1

(Internal register)

Internal register

Operand Hexadecimal number

2002 DM0000LDA

DM0001MUL

DM0002STA

TM00LDA

DM0003STA


Application of MUL instruction

Multiplying the counter current value by the DM value

Multiplies the counter current value by the DM0000 value and wr16 bits of the product into DM0101 and low-order 16 bits of the pDM0100.

Coding

0001

C001LDA

DM0000MUL

DM0100STA

TM00LDA

DM0101STA

2002

#09999

0000C001


0000 LDB 0001

0001 C 001 #099999 00000002 LD 2002

MUL / @MUL / DIV / @DIV



2

2002 DM0001LDA

TM00STA

DM0000LDA

#00100DIV

DM0002STA

TM00LDA

DM000STA


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA DM0001

0002 CON

0003 STA TM00

0004 CON

DIV (Division)

Coding

0002 LD 2002

0003 LDA C001

0004 CON

0005 MUL DM0000

0006 CON

0007 STA DM0100

0008 CON

0009 LDA TM00

0010 CON

0011 STA DM0101

High-order Low-order Low-order High-ord

Arithmetic flag

2009 No change2010 Turns ON when all 32 bits are "0" after a DIV o

times.2011 No change2012 Turns ON when the divisor of a DIV operation

indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.


Description

• The 32-bit value (binary) consisting of the higher 1bits from the internal register is divided by the valuThe higher 16 bits of the result is input back to TMsame internal register. The remainder is stored in T

TM00 Internal register Operand



Note 1: When data of 16 bits or less is divided by the

TM00 must be cleared (set to "#00000") before the DINote 2: If the contents of TM00 are not cleared, the dused for the operation.

Tips

Solution when data of 16 bits or less is divided

TM00 TM01

DM0000DM0001

DM0002DM0003 DM0004

#00100

Quotient

Example

Low-order 16 bits

Remainder (1

High-order 16 bits

Internal register

Remainder (1Low-order 16 bitsHigh-order 16 bits

Low-order 16 bitsHigh-order 16 bits

Low-order 16 bitsHigh-order 16 bits

Quotient

02002 #00000

LDA

TM00

STA

DM0000

LDA

DM0001

DIV

DM0002

STA

TM01

LDA

DM0003

STA

TM00 • DM0000 = TM00 • DM0002 ••• DM0003


Application of DIV instruction

Total count average

Outputs the average of 3 counter values in 4-digit BCD.(C001 + C002 + C003) ÷ 3 BCD output valueThe BCD value is output to 500 to 515.

C001LDA DM0001STA0000

C002LDA

DM0002STA

0000

C003LDA

DM0003STA

0000

DM0001LDA

DM0002ADD

DM0003ADD

2002

#09999C0030003

#09999C001

#09999

0001

0002C002

(DM0001+DM0002+DM0003)

TM00STA

#00000LDA

2002

Writes the C001 current value into



DIV / @DIV



2

Coding

STALDA

#00003DIV TBCD

0500STA

2002÷ 3 Output to 0500 to 0515


0000 LDB 0000

0001 C 001 #099999 0001

0002 CON

0003 LDA C001

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001

0006 LDB 0000

0007 C 002 #099999 00020008 CON

0009 LDA C002

0010 CON

0011 STA DM0002

0012 LDB 0000

0013 C 003 #099999 0003

0014 CON

0015 LDA C003

0016 CON

Example

Coding

ANDA:

@ANDA:

ANDs convalue spec16 bits, anregister.

AND A

(Logical product) @#,$

FUN

FUNSET

1RES

0

SET1

RES0

nnnnANDA

nnnnANDA


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 ANDA $00FF

0000 DM0000

LDA

$00FF

ANDA

DM0001

STA

(DM0000) ^ ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Logical product

:

:



Description

• The contents of DM0000 are transferred to the inte0000 is ON.

• The contents of the internal register (DM0000) and

operand ($00FF) are ANDed for each bit and the rback to the same register.

• When the operation result is "0", special utility rela• The contents of the internal register are transferred• The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001

Contents of DM0000are transferred to theinternal register.

1

AND

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

DM0000LDA

$00FFANDA

DM0001


These values are ANDed foreach bit to obtain logical produc

The result is transferred

Internalregister

Operand ($F0F0

Internalregister

DM0000 ($F0F0

($F0F0

($F0F0


Arithmetic flag

2009 No change2010 Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an ANDA

Turns OFF at other times.2011 No change2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of r


Tips

Solution when connecting one-digit data of a BCD digital swto 0103, while ignoring other inputsOnly one-digit data of the BCD digital switch is transferred as thefetching counter (C004).Other inputs (0104 to 0115) are ignored.

0004

2002

#00300C0040005

0100LDA

$000FANDA TBIN

C004STA

ANDA / @ANDA



2

Application of ANDA instruction

Fetch input data separately

Sets the low-order 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 700and the high-order 2 digits (7008 to 7015) to timer T001.

Coding

LDA ANDA TBIN STA

7000LDA

$00FFANDA TBIN

C000STA

2002

TBIN#08SRA

$FF00ANDA

7000LDA

T001STA

2002

0001

0001

#09999C0000000

#09999

T001


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA 7000

0002 CON

0003 ANDA $00FF

0004 CON

0005 TBIN

C

Converts data of 7000 twrites it into C000.

Shifts data to right by 8 and writes it into T001.

Sets C000.

Sets T001.

Example

Coding


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 ORA $00FF

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001

ORA:

@ORA:

ORs contentspecified by and inputs re

Or A

(Logical sum) @#,$

FUN

FUNSET

1ORL

3

SET1

ORL3

nnnnORA

nnnnORA

0000 DM0000LDA

$00FFORA

DM0001STA

(DM0000) U ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Logical sum

:

:



Description

• The contents of DM0000 are transferred to the inte0000 is ON.

• The contents of the internal register (DM0000) andoperand ($00FF) are ORed for each bit and the res

to the same register.• When the operation result is "0", special utility rela• The contents of the internal register are transferred• The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F

0005 STA DM0001

1

OR

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DM0000LDA

$00FFORA

DM0001STA


Contents of DM0000 aretransferred to the internalregister.

These values are ORed foreach bit to obtain logical sum.

The result is transferredto DM0001.

Internalregister

Operand ($00FF)

Internalregister

DM000 ($F0F0)

($F0F0)

($F0FF)


#00300

C0040005

0004

ORA / @ORA

Arithmetic flag

2009 No change2010 Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an ORA o

OFF at other times.2011 No change2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of r


Tips

Solution when connecting two-digit data of a BCD digital swto 0103 for the first digit and 0200 to 0203 for the second digFetches the two-digit data of the BCD digital switch, which are sefirst digit (0100 to 0103) and the second digit (0200 to 0203), andvalues as the setting value of a counter (C004).



2

0000

TBCDC000LDA

0500

STA

DM0000

ORA

$00FFANDA

$FF00ANDA

0500LDA

DM0000STA

2002

2002

2002

#00099C0000001

Sets C000.

Writes data of 0008 to 0015 into D

ORs the data in the internal registdata and sends the ORed data to

2002 0100LDA

$000FANDA

DM0000STA

0200LDA

$000FANDA

#04SLA

DM0000ORA

C004STA TBIN

Converts the current value of C00the low-order 2 digits of BCD in th

Application of ORA instruction

Output of BCD 2-digit data

Converts the current value of counter C000 to BCD and sends 2 to output relays 0500 to 0507.However, retain ON/OFF of 0508 to 0515 which are loaded.

0000

ANDA0100LDA

DM0000ORA TBIN

C001STA

#04SLA

$000F

$000F

ANDA0000LDA

DM0000STA

2002

2002

2002

#00099C0000001


0000 LDB 0001

Sets C00

Writes da

Writes dater.

Separate input of 2-digit BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (0000 tto 0103 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter va

Coding

ORs contto left by converts C001.



0000 LDB 0001

0001 C 001 #00099 0001

0002 LD 2002

0003 LDA 0000

0004 CON

0005 ANDA $000F

0006 CON0007 STA DM0000

0008 LD 2002

0009 LDA 0100

0010 CON

0011 ANDA $000F

0012 LD 2002

0013 SLA #04

0014 CON

0015 ORA DM0000

0016 CON

0017 TBIN

0018 CON

0019 STA C001


Example

Coding

EORA:

@EORA:

EXCLUSIVE ORs conregister and operand and inputs result back

Exclusive Or A

(Exclusivelogical sum)

@#,$

FUN

FUN SET

1ANB

5

SET1

ANB5

nnnnEORA

nnnnEORA

0000 DM0000LDA

$00FFEORA

DM0001STA

(DM0000) ($00FF) = (DM0001)U

Exclusivelogical sum


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 EORA $00FF

0004 CON

:

:

EORA / @EORA



2

Description

• The contents of DM0000 is transferred to the internal register0000 is ON.

• The contents of the internal register (DM0000) and the value

operand ($00FF) are EORed (exclusive OR) for each bit and back to the same register.• When the operation result is "0", special utility relay 2010 turn• The contents of the internal register is transferred to DM0001• The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F0F0".

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001

1

EORA

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

DM0000LDA

$00FFEORA

DM0001STA


Contents of DM0000 aretransferred to the internal

register.

Only whinternal operandwill the ebe "1".

These values are EORed for eachbit to obtain exclusive OR value.

The result is trans-ferred to DM0001.

Internalregister

Operand ($00FF)

Internalregister

EOR (Extruth tab

Internalregister

1

1

0

0

DM0000 ($F0F0)

($F0F0)

($F00F)

$

Arithmetic flag

2009 No change2010 Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after

OFF at other times.2011 No change2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM


Tips

Turning output 0500 ON when inputs 0000 through 00constant ($0F0F)

When the values match, special internal relay 2010 tuturns ON.In this example, the constant is "$0F0F", or "0000 111

output relay 0500 turns ON when input relays 0000 th0011 are ON.



Application of EORA instruction

Judgment of matching data

Turns ON 0500 when the ON/OFF statuses of input reDM0000 setting value.

Coding

2002 2010 0500$0F0FEORA

0000LDA

STA$00AA DM0000LDA

$00FFANDA

0100LDA

DM0000EORA

2008

2002 2010 0500

$BBBB



0000 LD 2008 0007

0001 LDA $00AA 0008

0002 CON 0009

0003 STA DM0000 0010

0004 LD 2002 0011

0005 LDA 0100 0012

0006 CON


Example

Coding

SRA: Shift Right A

@SRA: Shift Right A

SLA: Shift Left A

@SLA: Shift Left A

Moves contents of inteserially right by value and.

Moves contents of inteserially left by value s

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@#,$

FUN

FUN

LDB4

LDB4

SET1

RES0

LDB4

LDB4

SET1

RES0

#ddSRA

#ddSRA

#ddSLA

#ddSLA

0000 DM0000LDA

#05SRA

DM0001STA

0001 DM0010LDA

#10SLA

DM0011STA


:

:

:

:

SRA / @SRA / SLA / @SLA



2

Operands #01 to #16

Key operation

0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 SRA #05

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001

0006 LD 0001

0007 LDA DM0010

0008 CON

0009 SLA #10

0010 CON

0011 STA DM0011

@# $ FUN

FUN

@#,$ FUN

FUNLDB

4

LDB4

SET1

RES0

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand

Description

• Operations using the SRA instruction

When input relay 0000 is ON, the contents of DM0000register and shifted serially right by the operand valuewritten into DM0001. The contents of D0 are shifted toIn the above example, the contents shift to the right byscan time while input relay 0000 is ON.

Use @SRA, a differentiation type instruction, to execuwhen input relay 0000 turns ON.

• Operation using the SLA instruction

Carry

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 00

2009

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

2009



Carry



p g

When input relay 0001 is ON, the contents of DM0000register and shifted serially left by the operand value (written into DM0011. The contents of D15 are shifted toIn the above example, the contents shift to the left by scan time while input relay 0001 is ON.Use @SLA, a differentiation type instruction, to execu

when input relay 0001 turns ON.

Note: Special utility relay 2009 may turn ON in accordresults; however, it changes immediately when anothe

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 00

2009

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01

2009



Carry

Carry


Application of SRA/SLA instructions

Fetching four-digit data of the BCD digital switch (inputs for low-order 2 digits and 0100 through 0107 for high-ordetransfer them as a counter setting value

Separate input of BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (0112 to 0115 for t0003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.

2002 0000LDA

$0FF0ANDA

#04SRA

DM0000STA

0100LDA

$00FFANDA

#08SLA

DM0000ORA

C004STA

0001 #09999

C0040000

0001 #00099




2

Coding


0000 LD 0001

0001 C 001 #00099 0000

0002 LD 2002

0003 LDA 0100

0004 CON

0005 ANDA $F0000006 LD 2002

0007 SRA #12

0001

STA#12SRA

$000FANDA

0000LDA

$F000

DM0000

ANDA0100LDA

2002

2002

2002

#00099C0010000

DM0000ORA

#04SLA

2002

C001STA TBIN

2002Converts the data of internal register to BIN C001.

Sets C001.

Sends the data of 0112 to 0115 to internal re

Shifts the value of internal register to right by

into DM0000.

Sends the data of 0000 to 0003 to internal re

Shifts the data of internal register to left by 4register data and the data of DM0000, and sthe internal register.

Example

Coding

RRA: Rotate Right A

@RRA: Rotate Right A

RLA: Rotate Left A

@RLA: Rotate Left A

Rotates concarry (2009)

Rotates concarry (2009)value.

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@

#,$

FUN

FUN

LD7

ANB5

ORL3

ORL3

LD7

ANB

5

ORL3

ORL

3

#ddRRA

#ddRRA

#ddRLA

#ddRLA

0000 DM0000LDA

#01RRA

DM0001STA

0001 DM0010LDA

#04RLA

DM0011STA


:

:

:

:



Operands

#01 to #16

Key operation

p

0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 RRA #01

0004 CON

0005 STA DM0001

0006 LD 0001

0007 LDA DM0010

0008 CON

0009 RLA #04

0010 CON

0011 STA DM0011

@#,$ FUN

FUN

@#,$ FUN

FUNLD7

ANB5

ORL3

ORL3

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH Operand


Use @RRA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instrwhen input relay 0000 turns ON.

• Operation using the RLA instruction

When input relay 0001 is ON, the contents of DM0000 are transfregister. The contents of the internal register and carry (2009) areclockwise by the operand value.In the example above, the contents are rotated counterclockwisewhile input relay 0001 is ON.

Use @RLA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instrwhen input relay 0001 turns ON.

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 00

2009

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 002009



Carry

Carry




2

#01RRA

2002

2002 2009 TM10INC

0000LDA

NEXT

FOR#00016

Writes the data of 0000 to 0015 int

Executes FOR-NEXT instruction 16

Shifts the data including carry (200

increments TM10 by 1 when 2009

Note: Special utility relay 2009 may turn ON in accordance with tresults; however, it changes immediately when another operation

Application of RRA/RLA instructions

Error input count

Writes the number of error detection sensors, which are connecte(0000 to 0015) and turn ON, into DM0000.

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

2009

1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

2009



Carry

Carry

Example

Coding

COM:

@COM:Inverts contenregister.@

#,$

FUN

FUN

RES0

ANB5

RES0

ANB5

COM

COM

Complement

(Bit inversion)

0000

COM

DM0001

STA

DM0000

LDA


0000 LD 0000

0001 @LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 @COM

0004 CON0005 @STA DM0001

:

:



Description

• Each time input relay 0000 turns from OFF to ON, transferred to the internal register. The COM instrubit and transfers the result to DM0001.

• Special utility relay 2010 turns ON when the result

• The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$5

Note:

When an every-scan type COM instruction is used, thevery scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.

Use @COM, a differentiation type instruction, to execwhen input relay 0000 turns ON, as shown in the exam

Operands

0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

DM0001

DM0000 = $5F

= $A01 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0


COM instructionBit inversion

0000 DM0000LDA COM

DM0001STA


Example

Coding

INC: Increment Memory

@INC: Increment Memory

DEC: Decrement Memory

@DEC: Decrement Memory

Adds 1 to contents ospecified by operan

Subtracts 1 from comemory specified b

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@

#,$

FUN

FUN

LD7

SET1

SET1

RES0

LD

7

RES

0

OR9

OR9

nnnnINC

nnnnINC

nnnnDEC

nnnnDEC

0000 DM0000INC

DM0001DEC


0000 LD 0000

0001 @INC DM0000

:

:

:

:

INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC



2

Description Operation using the @INC instruction

Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, "1" is added to the content

memory specified by the operand. The result is then input back tmemory. (In the above example, "1" is added to the contents of D1 DM0000) When the data memory specified by the operand iresult of the addition is "#00000" so that special utility relay 2009

Operation using the @DEC instruction

Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, "1" is subtracted from the memory specified by the operand. The result is then input back tmemory. (In the above example, "1" is subtracted from the conteDM0001 - 1 DM0001) When the data memory specified by the"#00001", the result of the subtraction is "#00000" so that speciaturns ON.When the specified data memory is "00000", the result of the sub

0001 @INC DM0000

0002 @DEC DM0001

Contents of data memory specified by operand

Contents of data memory specified by operand

1 is added.

0 0 1 0

@

0 0 0 1+

0 0 1 1

INC instruction

Key operation

Arithmetic flag

2009 Turns ON when the result is "0" after an result is "$FFFF (#65535)" after DEC opetimes.

2010 Turns ON when the internal register is "0tion. Turns OFF at other times.

2011, 2012 No change

Note: When an every-scan type INC/DEC instruction instruction is executed every scan time while input rel

@

#,$ FUN

FUN

@#,$ FUN

FUNSET

1OR9

LD7

RES0

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand



instruction is executed every scan time while input rel

Use a differentiation type instruction (@INC or @DEConly once when input relay 0000 turns ON, as shown

Tips

When using DM0000 as an UP/DOWN counterPerforms an UP count (addition) when input relay 000Performs a DOWN count (subtraction) when input rela

Applications of INC/DEC instructions

UP/DOWN count

Performs an UP count when input relay 0000 turns ONPerforms a DOWN count when input relay 0001 turnsWrites the count value into DM0000.Reset input relay is 0005.

0000 DM0000INC

0001 DM0000DEC

#00000LDA

2008 DM0000STA

0000 D0000 DM0000INC

S t #00000 t DM


Total count 1

Writes the total count of 4 lines (0000 to 0003) into DM0000.Reset input relay is 0005.

Coding

#00000LDA

2008

0000

DM0000STA

0005 #00000DW

DM0000INC

0001 DM0000INC

0002 DM0000INC

0003 DM0000INC

DM0000Clears DM0000 to #00000 when

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startu

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP e




INC / @IN



2

Cod g

Total count 2

Counts the number of boxes transferred on 5 production lines. Pwhen the number becomes 100 or more.


0000 LD 2008

0001 LDA #00000

0002 CON

0003 STA DM00000004 LD 0000

0005 @INC DM0000

0006 LD 0001

0007 @INC DM0000

0008 LD 0002

0009 @INC DM0000

0010 LD 0003

0011 @INC DM0000

0012 LD 00050013 DW #00000 DM0000

0000 DM0000INC

0001 DM0000INC

Increments DM0000 by 1 at

input relay 0000.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at

Coding

Programming technique

Two kinds of instructions can be used for the countinginstruction and an INC instruction with data memory.The following examples show how to program the tota


0000 LD 0000 0011

0001 @INC DM0000 0012

0002 LD 0001 0013

0003 @INC DM0000 0014

0004 LD 0002 0015

0005 @INC DM0000 00160006 LD 0003 0017

0007 @INC DM0000 0018

0008 LD 0004 0019

0009 @INC DM0000 0020

0010 LD 0005

INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC



As the example of the INC instruction shows, using disimplifies the program even for the same control.Simpler programming reduces the time for debugging

It is convenient to use the CMP instruction for compar

OR instruction

Compare the following two programs.With program 1), input relays 0000 through 0004 are ithey turn ON simultaneously.With program 2), when some input relays 0000 througneously, duplicated inputs are ignored.

Use the appropriate program according to your applic

0005 DM0001STA

C001LDA

#09999

0000C001

DM0002STA

C002LDA

#09999

0001C002

DM0003

STA

C003

LDA

#09999

0002C003

DM0004STA

C004LDA

#09999

0003C004

DM0005STA

C005LDA

#09999

0004C005

DM0000STA

DM0005ADD

DM0004ADD

DM0003ADD

DM0002ADD

DM0001LDA

2002 0005

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

Programminwith data me

Programming with the C instruction


Example

Coding

MPX:

@MPX:

DMX:

@DMX:

Converts 4-bit daregister into 16-bdata to be conveoperand.

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@#,$

FUN

FUN

LD7

LD7

SET1

ANL2

SET

1

ANL

2

ANL2

ANL2

#nMPX

#nMPX

DMX

DMX

Multiplexer

(4-to-16 decoder),

Demultiplexer

(16-to-4 encoder)

0000 0000LDA

#1MPX

1000STA

0001 0100LDA DMX

DM0000STA


0000 LD 0000

:

:

:

: Converts positioncant bit with 1 in

into 4-bit data.

MPX / @M



2

Operands

#0 to #3

Key operation

0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA 0000

0002 CON

0003 MPX #1

0004 CON

0005 STA 1000

0006 LD 0001

0007 LDA 0100

0008 CON

0009 DMX

0010 CON

0011 STA DM0000

@# $ FUN

FUN

@#,$ FUN

FUNSET

1OR9

LD7

RES0

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

Operand

Description

Operation with the MPX instruction

When input relay 0000 is ON, the ON/OFF status of inis transferred to the internal register. The section of ththe operand (input relays 0004 through 007: 4 bits) is number (0 to F). Only the bit at the position specified bset to "1" and other bits are set to "0". The resulting O

the internal register, and then output to inputs 1000 toIn the example, when the value specified by inputs 00"A", internal relay 1010 turns ON.

1 0 1 0

#3 #2 #1

A

#0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

No. represented binternal register sp

Operand

Internal register

Internal register

MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX



Operation with the DMX instruction

When input relay 0001 is ON, the ON/OFF status of inis sent to the internal register. Within the 16-bit data onumber corresponding to the position of the most signconverted into 4-bit data and input back to the internainternal register are then transferred to DM0000.In the example, when input relay 0114 turns ON, "E" i

The DMX instruction is disabled when all bits in the insuch a case, special utility relay 2012 turns ON.

Application of MPX and DMX instructions

0 to F

0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

The value is converted into a hexadeci

Most significant bit with "1"

Enter the num

significant bit


DMX instruction

Connect sensors 0 to 15 to input relays 0000 through 0015.Connect output relays 0500 through 0503 to the one-digit data ofThe sensors which are currently ON are shown by the BIN indica* Assume that several sensors do not turn on simultaneously.

When sensor 8 is ON, the indicator shows "8".

Output of error input No. in BCD

Outputs the error sensor No. from input relay 0000 to 0015 to ou0507 in 2-digit BCD.

2002 0000LDA DMX

0500STA

0000

LDA

2002

2002

DMX

TBCD$00FFANDA

0500STA Converts internal register data to

ANDA instruction, and outputs the

Converts the most significant bit o0015) to 4-bit BIN data and sends

MPX / @M



2

a

Coding

Display of 7-segment LED

Displays the current value of counter C007 to the 7-segment LEDOutputs from 0600 to 0615.

7-segment configuration


0000 LD 2002

0001 LDA 0000

0002 CON

0003 DMX

0004 LD 2002

0005 TBCD

0006 CON

0007 ANDA $00FF

0008 CON

0009 STA 0500

ANDA instruction, and outputs the

C000LDA

#0MPX

C000 #00009C0000000

1000STA

$003F

LDA

0600

STA

1000

0

$0006LDA

0600STA

10011

$005BLDA

0600STA

10022

$004FLDA

0600STA

10033

$0066LDA

0600STA

1004

4

$006DLDA

0600STA

10055

Converts the counter value to 16-bitdata using the MPX instruction.

7-segme

Auto-resetcounter

Sends internal register data tooutput relays starting from 0600.

MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX



$007DLDA

0600STA

0600STA

10066

$0007LDA

10077

$007FLDA 0600STA1008 8

$006FLDA

0600STA

10099


0000 LDB C000 00240001 C 000 #00009 0000 0025

0002 CON 0026

0003 LDA C000 0027

0004 CON 0028

0005 MPX #0 0029

0006 CON 0030

0007 STA 1000 0031

0008 LD 1000 0032

0009 LDA $003F 00330010 CON 0034

Coding


Example

Coding

TBCD: Transfer BCD

@TBCD: Transfer BCD

TBIN: Transfer BIN

@TBIN: Transfer BIN

Converts contents of i(16-bit binary) into 4-d

Converts contents of i(4-bit binary) into 16-d

@#,$

FUN

FUN

@#,$

FUN

FUN

LD7

LDB4

LDB4

AND8

LD7

LDB4

LDB4

AND8

TBCD

TBCD

TBIN

TBIN

TBCD

TBIN

0000

0001

DM0000LDA

DM0001STA

DM0010LDA

DM0011STA


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

:

:

:

:

TBCD / @TBC



2

Operands

Key operation

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 @TBCD

0004 CON

0005 @STA DM0001

0006 LD 00010007 LDA DM0010

0008 CON

0009 @TBIN

0010 CON

0011 @STA DM0011

@#,$ FUN

FUN

@#,$ FUN

FUNLD7

LDB

4

LDB4

AND

8

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENT

R-SRCH

ENT

R-SRCH

Description

Operation using the TBCD instruction

When input relay 0000 turns ON, the contents of DM0internal register. The contents of the internal register (verted into 4-digit BCD data, which is input back to thetransferred to DM0001.

Operation using the TBIN instruction

When input relay 0001 turns ON, the contents of DM0internal register. The contents of the internal register (

Data is converted into B

103

(0)102

(0)101

(2)100

(4)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

216 20

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

TBCD / @TBCD / TBIN / @TBIN



verted into 16-bit binary data, which is input back to thtransferred to DM0011.

Note 1: The TBCD instruction can only convert data uconversion of data of "#10000" or greater is attempted

turns ON and the conversion is disabled.

Note 2: When the data in the internal register is not B2012 turns ON and the TBIN instruction is disabled.

Applications of TBCD instruction

Output of 4-digit BCD data

Outputs the current value of counter C001 to 0700 to

Data is converted into bin

(5)103

(5)

102(5)101

(5)100

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1


0001 #09999C001 S t C001



Outputs the calculated product of DM0000 x DM0001 (0 to 99999digits at maximum as below:

High-order 4-digit BCD data To 0600 to 0615Low-order 4-digit BCD data To 0500 to 0515

DM0000LDA

DM0001MUL

DM0101STA

#10000DIV

TM01LDA TBCD

0500STA

2002

TM00DM0000 x DM0001 =

TM00

0600 to 0615 0500 to 0515

... TM01

÷ #10000

=

Display

Internal register

High-order 4 digits Low-order 4 digits

High-order 4 digits

Internal register

Internal register

TM00

Low-order 4 digits Remainder

High-order 4 digits Low-order 4 digits

TBCD / @TBC



2

0400LDA

C001STA

2002 TBIN Converts data of 0400 to 0415 to

into C001.

Coding

Application of TBIN instruction

Input of 4-digit BCD data

Sets 4 digits of the BCD digital switch (0400 to 0415) as the coun

DM0101LDA TBCD

0600STA

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruct0000 LD 2002 0010 CON

0001 LDA DM0000 0011 TBCD

0002 CON 0012 CON

0003 MUL DM0001 0013 STA

0004 CON 0014 CON

0005 DIV #10000 0015 LDA

0006 CON 0016 CON

0007 STA DM0101 0017 TBCD

0008 CON 0018 CON

0009 LDA TM01 0019 STA

Example

Coding

ASC: ASCII Convert

@ASC: ASCII Convert

RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert

@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert

Convertsof internacode.

Convertsrepresen

@#,$

FUN

FUN

ORL3

ORL3

@#,$

FUN

FUN

RES0

ANL2

ANL2

ANL2

RES0

ANL2 ASC

ASC

RASC

RASC

ASC

RASC

0000

0001

DM0000LDA

DM0001STA

DM0010LDA

DM0011STA


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0000

ASC / @ASC / RASC / @RASC

:

:

:

:



Operands

Key operation

0001 LDA DM0000

0002 CON

0003 @ASC

0004 CON

0005 @STA DM0001

0006 LD 00010007 LDA DM0010

0008 CON

0009 @RASC

0010 CON

0011 @STA DM0011

ORL

3@#,$ FUN

FUN

@#,$ FUN

FUNRES

0

ANL

2

ANL2

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH


Description

Operation using the ASC instruction

When input relay 0000 turns ON, the contents of DM0000 are trainternal register. The contents of the internal register (low-order 8cal value) are converted into 2-digit ASCII code. This 2-digit codeinternal register, and then transferred to DM0001.

Operation using the RASC instruction

When input relay 0001 turns ON, the contents of DM0010 are trainternal register. The contents of the internal register (2-digit ASCverted into a low-order 8-bit, 2-digit numeric value. This 2-digit nuback to the internal register, then transferred to DM0011..

1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

4 1 3 5

A 5

0 1

ASC / @ASC



2

Hex number Bit configuration Code Bit config

0 0 0 0 0 $30 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 0 1 $31 0 0 1 1

2 0 0 1 0 $32 0 0 1 1

3 0 0 1 1 $33 0 0 1 1

4 0 1 0 0 $34 0 0 1 1

5 0 1 0 1 $35 0 0 1 1

6 0 1 1 0 $36 0 0 1 1

The value is converted only when the high- and low-order 8-bit varegister is within the range of "$30" to "$39" and "$41" to "$46", rthe conversion. (When either of the high- or low-order 8-bit valuerange, the conversion is disabled. In this case, special utility relay

Example of conversion between hex and ASCII numbers

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

4 33 6

6 C

0 0

0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Example

Coding

ROOT: Square Root

@ROOT: Square Root

Takes squarehigher order border byte), aregister.

ROOT

ROOT

ORB6

ORL3

ORB6

ORL3

@#,$

FUN

FUN

ROOT0000 TM00STADM0001LDA DM0000LDA DM0100STA


0000 LD 0000

0001 LDA DM0001

0002 CON0003 STA TM00

0004 CON

0005 LDA DM0000

CON

:

:

ROOT / @ROOT



Description

• The ROOT instruction takes the square root of 32-which the high-order 16 bits are contained in DM00contained in DM0000, and then input the result to

• The figures to the right the decimal point of the obtand the result is input back to the same register.

• When the result is 0, special utility relay No. 2010 • The ROOT instruction takes the square root of a 3case, the high-order 16 bits are contained in TM00contained in the internal register.

Operands

0006 CON

0007 ROOT

0008 CON

0009 STA DM0100

T M 0 0 Internal register Internal registe

Higher order 16 bits Lower order 16 bits


Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flags) by ainstructions (1/3)

Instruction Mnemonic Operand A < 0 A = 0 A >2009 2010 201

DATAMEMORY DW $,# constant — — —WRITE

3-136 Relay No. — 5 —

LOAD A LDA Timer/counter No. — 5 —

3-140 [FUN23] Data memory No. — 5 —

$,# constant — 5 —

# TM — 5 —

Relay No. — — —

STORE A STA Timer/counter No. — — —

3-140 [FUN42] Data memory No. — — —

# TM — — —

COMPARECMP

Data memory No. 1 2 3

3-146 [FUN04]

$,# constant 1 2 3



2

3 6[FUN04]

$,# co sta t 1 2 3

# TM 1 2 3

ADDADD

Data memory No. 4 5 —

3-150 [FUN00]

$,# constant 4 5 —

# TM 4 5 —SUBTRACT

SUBData memory No. 6 5 7

3-150 [FUN46]

$,# constant 6 5 7

# TM 6 5 7

MULTIPLYMUL

Data memory No. I 8 —

3-150 [FUN28]

$,# constant I 8 —

# TM I 8 —

DIVIDEDIV

Data memory No. — 8 —

3-150 [FUN11] $,# constant — 8 —# TM — 8 —

AND AANDA

Data memory No. — 5 —

3-159 [FUN01]

$,# constant — 5 —

# TM — 5 —

—: No change in arithmetic flag

Refer to the description of each instruction for details of the operating co

Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flainstructions (2/3)

Instruction Mnemonic Operand A < 0 A = 02009 2010

OR AORA

Data memory No. — 5

3-161[FUN31]

$,# constant — 5

# TM — 5

EXCLUSIVEEORA

Data memory No. — 5

OR A[FUN15]

$,# constant — 5

3-164 # TM — 5

SHIFTSRA

Number of shifts 0 5

RIGHT A[FUN41]

3-166

SHIFTSLA

Number of shift 0 5

LEFT A[FUN40]

3-166 ROTATE

RRANumber of rotations 0 5

RIGHT A[FUN37]

3-169

ROTATE Number of rotations 0 5



ROTATERLA

Number of rotations 0 5

LEFT A[FUN40]

3-169

COMPLE-COM

— 5

MENT

[FUN05] 3-171

INCREMENTINC

Data memory No. A 5

MEMORY[FUN19]

3-172

DECRE-MENT DEC Data memory No. B 5

MEMORY [FUN07] 3-172

MULTI-

MPX

Digit No. — —

PLEXER [FUN27] 3-176

DEMULTI-DMX

— —PLEXER

[FUN12] 3-176

TRANSFERTBCD

— —BCD

[FUN47] 3-180

TRANSFER

TBIN

— —

BIN[FUN48]

3-180


Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flags) by ainstructions (3/3)

1 When the result of COMPARE is negative, the relay turns ONnot negative, the relay remains OFF.

2 When the result of COMPARE is "0", the relay turns ON. Whe"0", the relay remains OFF.

3 When the result of COMPARE is positive, the relay turns ON.not positive, the relay remains OFF.

4 When the result of the arithmetic operation exceeds the 16-bitthe relay turns ON. When the result is within the 16-bit range,OFF.

5 When, as a result of the arithmetic operation, the data in the i"0", the relay turns ON. When the data is not "0", the relay rem

6 When the result of the arithmetic operation is negative, the reWhen the result is not negative, the relay remains OFF.

7 When the result of the arithmetic operation is positive, the relaWhen the result is not positive, the relay remains OFF.

8 Wh lt f th ith ti ti ll f th 32 bit



2

8 When, as a result of the arithmetic operation, all of the 32 bitsturns ON. When any of them is not "0", the relay remains OFF

9 When the divisor is "0", in the division, the relay turns ON. In tnot executed.

0 When, as a result of SHIFT or ROTATE, "1" is entered into 20When "1" is not entered, it remains OFF.

A When as a result of INCREMENT MEMORY, the data of the dthe relay turns ON. When the data is not "0", the relay remain

B When as a result of DECREMENT MEMORY, the data of the EXCEEDS 16 BIT RANGE ($FFFF), the relay turns ON. Whethe 16-bit range, the relay remains OFF.

C When there is no "ON" bit in the internal register at execution DEMULTIPLEXER, the relay turns ON. (In this case, "0" is enregister.) When there is a "ON" bit(s), the relay remains OFF.

D When the data in the internal register exceeds $270F (#09999TRANSFER BCD, the relay turns ON. (In this case, TRANSFexecuted.) When the data does not exceed $270F, the relay r

E When the data in the internal register is not BCD data at exec

FER BIN, the relay turns ON. (In this case, TRANSFER BIN iWhen the data is BCD, the relay remains OFF.

2.5 Programming Notes

This section describes important points and precautiograms.

Circuits that must be modified

1. The circuit shown below left cannot be programmeright.

2. Output is disabled in 0500 in the circuit shown beloshown on the right, output of one scan only is disa

C D

A B 0500

E

A E

C E 0500

A

D

B

C

A 1000 A 1000 0500



3. If the same coil is used in two positions, the latter pcoil in the former position is ignored.

4. The circuit shown below left cannot be programmeright.

1000

A 1000

0500

A 1000 0500

A 1000

E

A

C

B 0500

0500

A B 0500

C E

A B C

D E

0500 B C

D E

A 0500

2.5 Programming Notes

0500

2002 #0010 T000

0500

#0010 T000

A B D E E0500

C

A B

C

Programming precautions

1. A coil output or timer/counter cannot be connected directly frooutput coil or a timer/counter is required, insert a 'b' contact ofutility relay, a 'b' contact of an unused special utility relay, or a2002 (always ON) as a dummy.

2. A contact cannot be connected to an output line.

3. Make sure that every contact/coil is located on a path from a line. Make sure that there are no unconnected portions.



2

0500

C

D

B C 0500

0501

A

B C

0500

A

A B D 0500

D 0501

4. Make sure that illegal short-circuits are not generated in para

5. Circuits including output coils cannot be connected in parallel

However, parallel connection is enabled when each circuit in is connected to an output line.

Chapter 3

InterruptsThe interrupt processing function executes an interrupinput or request from the high-speed counter comparatered during KV operation.This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as



This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors asencountered during interrupt processing.

For KV-10/80 Series, see Chapter 6.

3.1 Interrupt Instructions ...........................

3.2 Interrupt Processing ............................

3.2.1 Interrupt Processing ....................................3.2.2 Types of Interrupts ......................................3.2.3 Interrupt Priority...........................................3.2.4 Interrupt Program ........................................

3.3 Direct Input/Output ...............................

3.3.1 Direct Input ..................................................3.3.2 Direct Output ...............................................

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs ..

3.4.1 Interrupt with a Signal Converter.................3.4.2 Interrupt with a High-speed Counter ...........3.4.3 Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Puls3.4.4 Measuring the Period in which a Target Pas

Two Points ..................................................

3.1 Interrupt Instructions

VisualKV

Series


This section describes the INT, RETI, DI, and EI instructions useprocessing.

INT: Interrupt

RETI: Return Interrupt

Executes interrupt betweinstructions at rising or fa

specified by operand.

Represents termination o

FUN

FUN LDB

4

RES0

ANL2

ORL3

RETI

INTnnnn

0500

0000

T000 0500

#00020

T000

a)

0000

Normal

input

Example

Coding for normal in

(Input ON time: 10 ms min.)

Line No. Instructio

0000 LD

0001 OR

0002 TMR

0003 ANB

0004 OUT



3

Coding for interrupt Interruptinput

0004 OUT

Line No. Instructi

0000 LD0001 EI

0002 LD

0003 HSP

0004 LD

0005 OR

0006 TMR

0007 OUT

0008 LD0009 RES

0010 END

0011 INT

0012 LD

0013 OUT

0014 RETI

0015 ENDH

1000

0500

#00020 T000

1000

2002

b)

0000

2008EI

END

INT0000

HSP0000

RETI

ENDH

2002

T0 1000(RES)

DI: Interrupt Disabled

EI: Interrupt Enabled

Disab

Enab

Example

Coding

FUN

FUN

RES0

ORL3

DI

EISET

1

AND8

1000EI

DI1000


0000 LD 0000

0001 EI• •• •• •

0021 LDB 1000

0022 DI• •



Description

• When 1000 is ON, execution of interrupt is enabled• When 1000 is OFF, execution of interrupt is disabl• Interrupts are enabled between EI instruction and • Once an EI instruction is executed, an interrupt is e

executed.• Any interrupt is disabled when the Visual KV Serie• The DI instruction disables execution of an interrup

temporarily disable an interrupt.• The EI instruction enables execution of an interrup

release an interrupt that was disabled by a DI instr• To execute another interrupt during execution of th

instruction in this first interrupt. EI-DI instruction se

Note 1: When any interrupt occurs between DI and Eperiod), the disabled interrupt is stored (to 8 levels maexecuted as soon as an EI instruction is executed.

Note 2: If an INT CTC instruction is stored before a R

ecuted, the stored INT CTC is deleted.

• •• •

3.2 Interrupt Processing

Vis

ualKV

S

eries


This section describes interrupt processing.

3.2.1 Interrupt Processing

Outline

Normally, a PLC processes a ladder sequence program by repeainput processing, program execution, and output processing. Thewhich are shorter than the scan time cannot be received.When the interrupt processing function is used, a process can beinstant of the interrupt, independent of the scan time.When any interrupt occurs, the Visual KV series suspends the cuprogram and executes the interrupt program in accordance with tWhen the interrupt program completes, the Visual KV resumes e

suspended program. For more about scan time, refer to "1.1.2 Scan Time" (p. 3-3).



3

Direct input/output

The direct input/output functions are used during interrupt procesallows the KV PLC to fetch the input status of input relays 0000 t10xx: 0000-0005, KV-16xx: 0000-0009) during execution of the inDirect output allows the Visual KV PLC to output the ON/OFF sta0500 through 0503 during execution of the interrupt program.

No special setting is required to use the direct input/output functiocan be used only by using the devices assigned for direct input/o

Inputprocessing

Programexecution

Outputprocessing

Scantime

Interrupt input

Return to the nextline of the interrupt.

Interruptprocessing

3.2.2 Types of Interrupts

Interrupts can be divided into two types: an interrupt binterrupt by the high-speed counter comparator. This sinterrupt types.

Interrupt by an external input

This interrupt is executed by input relays 0000 through

relay to specify the polarity of the interrupt factor to a

Interrupt by the high-speed counter comparator

This interrupt is executed when the current value of thmatches the preset value of the high-speed counter co

Polarity setting for interrupts by an external input

Turn ON the appropriate special utility relay to specify

or falling edge.The interrupt polarity can be changed as follows by se2402/2403 (INT0), 2404/2405 (INT1), 2410/2411 (INT

tpurretnIepyt

yaleR.oN

sutatS yaleR

.oN sutatS



Use SET-RES instructions to turn the special utilitCAUTION

0TNI 2042

FFO

3042

FFOccotpurretnI

NO FFO

FFO NO ccotpurretnI

NO NO ccotpurretnI

1TNI 4042

FFO

5042

FFOccotpurretnI

NO FFO

FFO NO ccotpurretnI

NO NO ccotpurretnI

2TNI 0142

FFO

1142

FFOccotpurretnI

NO FFO

FFO NO ccotpurretnI

NO NO ccotpurretnI

3TNI 2142

FFO

3142

FFOccotpurretnI

NO FFO

FFO NO ccotpurretnI

NO NO ccotpurretnI


Vis

ualKV

S

eries

• Use SET-RES instructions to turn the special utility relay• The input capture function stores the high-order bit data

bit high-speed counter is used. The data is undefined whspeed counter is used.

"4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221)

• Timing of the input capture execution depends on the inpspecified with special utility relays 2402 through 2405 and2413.

3.2.3 Interrupt Priority

When many interrupts occur sequentially, priority is given to the ioccurs earlier.When two or more interrupts occur simultaneously, priority is give0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, CTC2, CTC3, CTC0, and CTC1.

Note 1: While one interrupt is being executed, other interrupts arlevel interrupts are possible by placing an EI instruction within an

Note 2: When other interrupts occur during execution of an interrare stored up to 8 levels deep. The stored interrupts are executeof the previous interrupt, according to the priority order. Howeveruses the same device as a previous interrupt cannot be stored.

CAUTION



3

uses the same device as a previous interrupt cannot be stored.

3.2.4 Interrupt Program

The interrupt program is a program which is executed by an interto execute an EI (Interrupt enabled) instruction before executing gram.To temporarily disable an interrupt, execute a DI (Interrupt disablWhen an interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts are not execuntil the next EI instruction.

"EI instruction", "DI instruction" (p. 3-193)

Example of an interrupt program

2008EI

HSP0000

END

INT0000

An interrupt program is not executed unless an EI inst

Set the input time constant shorter by using the HSP i(to 10 µs) or by turning ON special utility relay 2813.

Write the interrupt program between the END and ENinstructions.

2002

2008

HSP0000

HSP

EI

3.3 Direct Input/Output

This section describes direct input and output.

3.3.1 Direct Input

The direct input function is used during interrupt proce

KV PLC to fetch the input status of the input relays duprogram.

Direct input is available only with input relays 0000 thr0005, KV-16xx: 0000-0009). (KV-300: 0000-0005)

• The input time constant must be set to 10 µs by usturning ON special utility relay 2813.

• The direct input data is effective only within the inteinternal utility relay must be provided.



END

INT0000

1000

0005

RETI

ENDH

0500

HSP0005

1000SET

2002

2008

EI

HSP

3.3.2 Direct OutputDirect output allows the Visual KV PLC to output the Oduring execution of the interrupt program. Direct outpurelays 0500 through 0503.

• Direct output is not affected by the scan time.

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

Vis

ualKV

S

eries

3.4 Applications of Interrupt Progra

This section presents program examples of interrupt processing.

3.4.1 Interrupt with a Signal Converter

Outline

Converts the short pulses which are input by interrupt processingconstant width and then outputs them.

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ONONON

1 sec

Scan

Input 0000

Output 0500

1 sec. 1 sec.



3

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

2008EI

2002

2002

T00000500

HSP

0000

END

INT0002

RETI

#00010 T000

0500RES

0500

SET

Ladder diagram

• Converts the short pulses input from input relay 0000 into pulwidth and then outputs them from output relay 0500.

• Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second from the rising edge

1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.

When inpON, outp

When poinstructio

Sets the input 000

Turns ONsecond a

3.4 App

3.4.2 Interrupt with a High-speed Counter Outline

Uses the input value of a high-speed counter from one input rstatus of another input relay to control the ON/OFF status of a

Example: Filling control for medicine (tablets)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Output 0500

Scan

Input 0004

Input 0000



0001

0002

0003

2008EI

2002 HSP0004

2002 CTH00004

#10000

CTH0RES

2103SET

Ladder diagram

• Output relay 0500 turns ON when the input value of the hiinput relay 0004 reaches "10000".

• Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 turns

SensorVisual KV


Vis

ualKV

S

eries

3.4.3 Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulse

Outline

Measures the pulse width of the pulse input to an input relay.

Example: Measurement of workpiece length

OFF

ON

Sensor input 0000

Pulse width (µs)

Visual KV

Sensor



3

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

2008EI

2002 HSP0000

2002 CTH02100

END

INT

0000

KEEPTM02DM19282403

Ladder diagram

• Special utility relay 2100 is turned ON to measure the pulse wunits.• The values when input relay 0000 is ON is written into tempo

TM02, and the values when input relay 0000 is OFF is writtenDM1912. The pulse width can be obtained by subtracting the the value of DM1912.

• The obtained value is written into data memory DM0000 (Unit

• Turns ON ininterrupt.

• When poweinstruction e

• Sets an inpinput 0000 t

• CTH0 couninternal cloc

3.4 App

3.4.4 Measuring the Period in which a Target

Two Points

Outline

Measures the period in which two input relays turn ON

Example: Measurement of tact time

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Sensor 1 input 0002

Sensor 2 input 0003

Passing time (µs)

Sensor 1

Visual KV



Ladder diagram

• Measures the time from when input relay 0002 turnturn ON.

• The measured value is written to data memory DM

0001

0002

0003

0004

2008EI

2002 HSP0002

HSP0003

2002 CTH1

2200

2411RES

2412RES

2413RES

2410RES

END

Sensor 2


VisualKV

S

eries



3

Chapter 4

High-speed Counters

This chapter describes high-speed counters and high-which allow high-speed pulse measurement and pulsescan time.




4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions .....

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters .......

4.2.1 High-speed Counters and High-speed Coun4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters ......

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed4.3.1 Reading the Current Value of the High-spee4.3.2 Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Co4.3.3 Comparator Output .....................................4.3.4 Count Input Method.....................................4.3.5 Resetting the High-speed Counter ..............4.3.6 Differences with the CTH Instruction betwee

Conventional and Visual KV Series ............4.3.7 Applications of High-speed Counters ..........

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed C4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter ..........................4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High4.4.3 Application Example of 24-bit High-speed C

4.4.4 Ring Counter Function ................................4.4.5 Applications of Ring Counters .....................

4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions

VisualKV

S

eries

CTH0: 16-Bit High-speed counter

CTH1: 16-Bit High-speed counter

CTC: High-speedcounter comparator

• 16-bit (0 to 65535) up/dclock pulses with a 30-

response frequency.• Can be changed to 24

counters with the MEM• Enables 30 kHz, two-p

two channels.1.

• Hardware-based comppreset value and currehigh-speed counter.

• The current value can

preset value by extern

SET1

CTC

CTH

CTH

RES0

CTH1nnnn

CTCn#ddddd

CTH0nnnn

2008 HSP0004

4.1 High-speed Counter Instruction

This section describes the CTH0, CTH1, and CTC instructions, whigh-speed counters.

Example

:

:

:

1.2.



4

0000

CTH0RES

0500SET

2103SET

CTC0

RES

2008

0500

RES

CTC0

0500 T000

#60000CTC0

#00030

T000

CTH00004

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Input-enable relay Count input

Coding


0000 LD 2008 0009 LD

0001 HSP 0004 0010 SET

0002 LD 2008 0011 LD0003 SET 2103 0012 TMR

4.1 H

Operands

CTH0: 00042100 to 2102

CTH1: 000505002200 to 2202

CTC0 to 3: Preset value

#00001 to #65535

Key operation

Description

1) Initializes the setting when power is turned on.• The HSP instruction sets the input time constan• The current value of CTH0 is reset as soon as

SET1

RES0

CTC

CTH

Operand

Clock input

Preset

value

ENTR-SRCH

ENT

R-SRCH



CTC0 when special utility relay 2103 is ON.2) The counting is disabled when input relay 0000 is

when input relay 0000 turns ON.3) Sets "60000" as the preset value of the high-speed4) When the current value of CTH0 reaches "60000",

and the current value is reset.5) Turns OFF both CTC0 and 0500 for three seconds

ON.

Tips

Unlike software-based counters, the high-speed counprogram-independent counter. It achieves an input reswithout being affected by the scan time.

• Input relays 0004 and 0005 can independently couinput response frequency.

• Two-phase encoder input can be captured through• CTH0 uses input from relay 0004 as phase A inpu

phase B input (KV-10xx: 0000). CTH1 uses input f

and input from 0007 as phase B input (KV-10xx: 00

4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

VisualKV

S

eries


This section describes the outline and specifications for high-spehigh-speed counter comparators featured with the Visual KV Ser

4.2.1 High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter

torsThe high-speed counter is a hardware-based counter that can copulses that cannot be counted by counters written in main routine(Pulses with a maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be counted.). *High-speed counter comparators are hardware-based comparatotheir preset value with the current value of one of the a high-speeBoth counters and comparators perform processing with hardwasoftware programs, enabling high-speed performance independe

Structure of high-speed counters and high-speed counter com

The Visual KV PLC has two high-speed counters, each equippedspeed counter comparators and dedicated internal clocks.

Block diagram of high-speed counters



4

1. With the KV-10xx, the external input relay for CTH0 is 0004 (p

(phase B), and for CTH1 is 0005 (phase A)/0001 (phase B).2 With th KV 10 th t i t l f CTH0 i 0002

CTC2

CTH1

CTC3

DM1932, DM1933(INT2)DM1934, DM1935(INT3)

2

ININ

2200 (1.0 µs)2201 (10.0 µs)

2202 (100.0µs)

0500

0005/0007

CTC0

CTH0

CTC1

DM1928, DM1929(INT0)DM1930, DM1931(INT1)

2

ININ

2100 (1.0 µs)2101 (10.0 µs)2102 (100.0 µs)

0004/0006

0005(0007)

0004(0006)

0008 (RESET) 2.

0009 (RESET) 2.

Phase APhase B

Internal clocks*

External input

16-bit high-speedcounter

high-speedcountercomparator


Input capture device S

C

Input capture deviceInternal clocks*

External input

16-bit high-speedcounter



S

C

Phase APhase B

Internal connectionfor external clock

4.2 O

List of special utility relays for high-speed coun

* Read-only relay.

yaleR.oN

noitcnuF




3012 snrut0CTCrotarapmocnehw0HTCsraelcyllacitamotuA

4012 otarapmocnehw0050morftuptuotceridselbane / selbasiD

.NOsnrut

5012 CTCrotarapmocnehw0050morftuptuotceridFFOsnruT

6012 0CTCrotarapmocnehw0050morftuptuotceridNOsnruT

7012 cemithcae0050morftuptuofosutatsFFO / NOsesreveR

.NOsnrut0CTC


.NOsnrut


0112 CTCrotarapmocnehw0050morftuptuotceridNOsnruT


.NOsnrut1CTC


3112 .0HTCrofedomnoitacilpitlumstceleSO / FFO2x:FFO / NO)eslup1(noitacilpitlumoN:FFO / FFO

seslup2:NO / NO4112

noitacilpitluM noitacilpitlumoN



List of special utility relays for high-speed coun

noitacilpitluMedom

noitacilpitlumoN)eslup1(

2x

3112 FFO NO

4112 FFO FFO

yaleR.oN

noitcnuF






.NOsnrut




.NOsnrut2CTC


.NOsnrut




VisualKV

Series

Other special utility relays

Data memory

yaleR.oN

noitcnuF

0042 langislanretxeybeulavteserpot0HTCfoeulavtnerrucsegnahCegdegnillaftA:NO / FFOegdegnisirtA:FFO / NOdesutoN:FFO / FFO1042

6042 oN:FFOseY:NO.retnuocgnirsa0HTCsteS

7042 .0HTCrofdesusiedomnoitacilpitlumonnehwtupniBesahpserongI

pniBesahpesU:FFO.putnuocsyawladnatupniBesahperongI:NO

8042 langislanretxeybeulavteserpot1HTCfoeulavtnerrucsegnahC egdegnillaftA:NO / FFOegdegnisirtA:FFO / NOdesutoN:FFO / FFO9042

4142 oN:FFOseY:NO.retnuocgnirsa1HTCsteS

5142 .1HTCrofdesusiedomnoitacilpitlumonnehwtupniBesahpserongI

niBesahpesU:FFO.putnuocsyawladnatupniBesahperongI:NO

.oNMD noitpircseD

1091MD / 0091MD ro-hgih / stibredro-wol(0HTCtib-42foeulavtnerruC


5091MD / 4091MD ro-hgih / stibredro-wol(0CTCtib-42foeulavtnerruC





5191MD/4191MD ro-hgih/stibredro-wol(1HTCtib-42foeulavtnerruC



4Note 1: As with the internal register, the contents of data memorbit binary data.

Note 2: The contents of data memory are stored even when the

off or "ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR" is executed. It is stored mowith the KV-10xx, and more than two months with other models.

Specifications of high-speed counters

• The high-speed counter is a hardware-based up/down counteto 65535 with an auto-reset function.

• The following operands can be specified for count inputs.

5191MD / 4191MD rohgih / stibredrowol(1HTCtib42foeulavtnerruC

7191MD / 6191MD dro-hgih / stibredro-wol(0CTCtib-42foeulavteserP




5291MD / 4291MD stibredro-hgih / stibredro-wol(0HTCfoeulavteserP

7291MD / 6291MD stibredro-hgih / stibredro-wol(1HTCfoeulavteserP

retnuocdeeps-hgiH dnarepO saeM

4.2 O

Note 1: CTH instructions cannot be duplicated in a prcounters, CTH0 and CTH1, can be used in one progra

Note 2: The operands for a high-speed counter cannoexecution.

Note 3: When using a high-speed counter with externstant must be set to 10 µs with the HSP instruction or (Pulses with a maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be c

Note 4: When using input 0004 as an operand, use inphase B input. Therefore, do not use input 0006 (KV-1high-speed counter.

Note 5: When selecting no multiplication mode, and y0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) as phase B input, turn ON spec

Note 6: When using input 0005 as an operand, use inphase B input. Therefore, do not use input 0007 (KV-1high-speed counter.

Note 7: When selecting no multiplication mode, and y0007 (KV-10xx: 0001) as phase B input, turn ON spec

Note 8: When using the high-speed counter internal csingle-phase input is available. In this case, external iCTH1 can be used as normal input relays.

Note 9: When using phase differential input, pulses wkHz can be counted, provided the pulses have a duty



difference of 90°. Inputting pulses with an irregular dudecrease the allowable input frequency.

Note 10: The current value of the high-speed counter electrical double-layer capacitor for more than two mothan 20 days). The value can also be stored in EEPRO

"3.5 System Mode" (p.1-94).

High-speed counter comparators

• The high-speed counter comparator (CTC) compa

value of the high-speed counter (CTH).• The CTC contact turns ON when the current value

preset value of the CTC.• Among CTC contacts, the ON/OFF status of outpu

changed with hardware (direct output) or can be usspecial utility relays (2103 to 2112, 2203 to 2212) tof output relays 0500 and 0501.

• The following table shows the relationship betweenhigh-speed counter comparators.

deeps-hgiH retnuocdeeps-hgiH eulavteserP


VisualKV

Series

4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters• Each high-speed counter (CTH) is equipped with a dedicated• To use the internal clock, specify the appropriate relay No. as

CTH instruction.• The internal clock or external pulses cannot be changed durin

tion.• Each clock has the following count period:

High-speed counter internal clock error• Absolute error: ± 200 ppm• Temperature coefficient: 00

• Relative error between CTH0 and CTH1: ± 0

retnuocdeeps-hgiH 0HTC 1HTC

.oNyaleR

0012 0022

1012 1022

2012 2022



4

4.3 Setting and Op

retnuocdeeps-hgiH eulavtnerruC

0HTC53556ot0

1HTC

4.3 Setting and Operation of HCounters

The high-speed counters and high-speed counter comspecified with special utility relays.

4.3.1 Reading the Current Value of the High

The current value of a high-speed counter is normally 65535).The range of the current value for high-speed counter

Refer to "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221) when usi

4.3.2 Preset Value of the High-speed Count

The preset value of a high-speed counter comparator 65535)



retnuocdeeps-hgiH retnuocdeeps-hgiH

rotarapmoc

0HTC 0CTC

1CTC

1HTC 2CTC

3CTC

65535).The relationship between high-speed counters and hig

is as follows:

Refer to "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221) when usi

4.3.3 Comparator Output

The high-speed counter comparator provides the comturns ON outputs as soon as the comparator turns ONscan time.Comparator output is controlled by setting special utiliamong the high-speed counters, high-speed counter crelays are as follows:

4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters

VisualKV

Series

4.3.4 Count Input MethodSelect the input source for the high-speed counter.

When using an internal clock as input

Three types of internal clocks are provided: 1 µs, 10 µs, and 100Set the desired internal clock with a special utility relay.

When using external inputs as count inputs

Set special utility relays as follows:

edomnoitarepO0HTC

3112 4112 7042

noitacilpitlumoNesahp-elgnis(

)tupni

tnemegdu jnoitceridhtiWtupniBesahpnehwputnuoC(nwodtnuoc,FFOsi]7000[6000

)NOnehw

FFO FFO FFO

tnemegdu jnoitceridtuohtiWgnirongiybputnuocsyawlA(

)]7000[6000tupniBesahpFFO FFO NO

laitnereffidesahPtupni

2x NO FFO —

4x FFO NO —



4 Operation mode

The counting method can be selected from the following when exused.

The ring counter function is available for each counting method. For more about the ring counter, refer to "4.4.4 Ring Counter Function" (p. 3-

Types of operation modes

No multiplication mode (single-phase input)

Counts up at the rising edge of phase A while phase B is OFF.Counts down at the rising edge of phase A while phase B is ON.

• With direction judgement (Special utility relay 2407: OFF)

ON(Phase A)

dohtemeslup-2 )nwodtnuoc:Besahp,putnuoc:AesahP( NO NO —

tupni)1HTC(0050 — — —

4.3 Setting and Op

Double (x2) mode: Counts up/down basebetween two-phase pphase B).

Quadruple (x4) mode: Counts up/down bbetween two-phasphase B).

7 6

0006

0004

CTH00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

0006

0004 OFF

ON

OFF

ON

(Counter value)

(Phase A)

(Phase B)

(Phase A)

(Phase B)



2-pulse method mode: Counts up at the rcounts down at the

Count up: Rising edge of phase ACount down: Rising edge of phase B

Note 1: Use SET-RES instructions to set the special u

15 14 13 12 11 1

CTH00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

0006

0004

CTH0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 4

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

(Counter value)

(Counter value)

(Phase A)

(Phase B)


VisualKV

Series

4.3.5 Resetting the High-speed CounterReset is an operation used to set the current value of a high-speeFour types of reset operations are available: reset with input-enaexternal input, reset automatically after counting up, and reset wiinstruction.

Automatic reset after counting up

Resets the counter value as soon as the preset value matches th(CTC = CTH).This reset operation is independent of the scan time.

Note: Do not specify the same values for CTC0 and 1 (2 and 3) treset the counter with both comparators.

deeps-hgiHretnuoc

deeps-hgiHretnuoc

rotarapmoc.oNyaleR repO

0HTC

0CTC 3012 alerytilitulaicepsnehWCtnerruceht,NOdenrutCehtsehctamtisanoos

.eulav1CTC 2112

1HTC

2CTC 3022 alerytilitulaicepsnehWCtnerruceht,NOdenrutCehtsehctamtisanoos

.eulav3CTC 2122



4

p

Reset with the RES CTH instruction

Resets the counter by writing a RES CTH instruction to the progrThis reset operation is dependent on the scan time.

* CTH is reset by the output process of the scan which execute

CTH

CTH = CTC

CTH is reset when CTH value equals CTC va

Scan

CTH

Execution of RES CTH instruction

Scan

4.3 Setting and Op

Reset with external input

Resets the counter at the instant the external reset inpThe external reset is assigned to input relay 0008 (KVinput relay 0009 (KV-10xx: 0003) for CTH1.The timing of the reset can be changed by setting relaor 2408 and 2409 (for CTH1) as follows.This reset operation is independent of the scan time.

deeps-hgiH retnuoc .oNyaleR sutatS .oNyaleR sutatS

0HTC 0042

FFO

1042

FFO iD

NO FFOeR00

FFO NOeR00

NO NOeR

K(

1HTC 8042

FFO

9042

FFO iD

NO FFOeR00

FFO NOeR00

NO NOeR

K(



* CTH is reset at the instant the external reset input

Preset function

The current value of CTH can be changed to any desireset function of input relays 0008 (KV-10xx: 0002) (fo0003) (for CTH1) specified with special utility relays 242408 and 2409 (for CTH1). (The external reset functioWrite the desired value of the preset input into the foll

ScanExternalreset input

CTH

.oNMD

)stibredro-hgih(5291MD,)stibredro-wol(4291MD lavteserP


VisualKV

Series

4.3.6 Differences with the CTH Instruction betweeConventional and Visual KV Series

The Visual KV Series has some different high-speed counter opeconventional KV Series [KV-10/16/24/80R(W)/T(W)].

Input-enable relay

• With the conventional KV Series, the current value of the highreset when the CTH instruction is executed while the input-enHowever, the counter continues counting until the end of the sresult, when the input-enable relay starts counting again, the ready be incremented by the length of the scan time.

• With the Visual KV Series, the current value of the high-speedthe falling edge of the input-enable relay, so that the counter dcounting.

High-speed counter (CTH)

• The conventional KV Series includes high-speed counter CTHcounter. The period of the internal clock is different from that iSeries

0001 CTH00004

Count inputInput-enable relay



4

Series.• The Visual KV Series allows you to reset a high-speed counte

inputs. Its high-speed counter CTH0 is a 16-bit counter (can abit counter).

• With the Visual KV Series, when using the high-speed counteconstant must be set shorter by using the HSP instruction or bspecial utility relay 2813.

Phase differential input

The Visual KV Series allows phase differential input for the high-

Response frequency

The Visual KV Series provides a response frequency of 30 kHz.

High-speed counter comparator

• The high-speed counter comparator turns ON the contact whmatches the current value of the high-speed counter. Conseqmay turn ON during the scan time.

Be careful when using the contact for one comparator in seveprogram

4.3 Setting and Op

2008

2002

0000

2214RES

2213SET

2114RES

2113SETEI

#60000

CTC0

CTH0RES

CTH00004

CTH10005

HSP0005

HSP0006

HSP0004

HSP0007

END

4.3.7 Applications of High-speed CountersComparing encoder values

Uses two encoders to input phase differential signals and 0005 and 0007. Turns ON output relay 0500 if theis greater than that of 0004 and 0006 when 0004 and

Initial sSET 21RES 2SET 22RES 2

Sets in0005,

Phase0006

Specifi

Phase 0007



0500RES

INT

CTC0

2002 2009

2009

2002

ENDH

RETI

0500SET

CTH0RES

CTH1RES

CTH1LDA

#60000CMP

Compa"#6000greatewhen v

Setting multi-level high-speed counters

Sets the preset value of the high-speed counter compcounter for input relay 0005 as follows:

#01000 DM0000#02000 DM0001

#03000 DM0002


VisualKV

Series

Clearing the current value of the high-speed counter

Counts pulses at input relay 0005. When the current value reach"60000", clears the current value of high-speed counter CTH1 anrelay 0502 for 3 seconds.


0000 LD 2008 0015 CTH1

0001 LDA #01000 0016 LD

0002 CON 0017 LDA

0003 STA DM0000 0018 MPS

0004 CON 0019 CMP

0005 LDA #02000 0020 ANB

0006 CON 0021 OUT

0007 STA DM0001 0022 MRD

0008 CON 0023 CMP

0009 LDA #03000 0024 ANB

0010 CON 0025 OUT

0011 STA DM0002 0026 MPP

0012 LD 2002 0027 CMP

0013 HSP 0005 0028 ANB

0014 LDB 0001 0029 OUT

Cording



4

2203SET

CTH1RES

CTC2RES

CTC2 T001

2008

2002

#60000CTC2

CTH1

0005

2002 HSP

0005

0502 #00030 T001

Cording

Line No. Instructio

0000 LD

0001 SET

0002 CON

0003 RES

0004 LD

0005 HSP

0006 LD0007 CTH1

0008 CTC2

0009 LD

0010 OUT

0011 CON

0012 TMR

0013 CON

0015 AND

4.3 Setting and Op

Phase differential input • Inputs phase differential signals from input relays 0

pulses at CTH0.• The count value is written to DM0000.• When the current value of CTH0 reaches "60000",

output 0500, and stops counting at CTH0.• Input relay 0008 is used as an external reset.

2103

SET EI

2113

SET

2114

RES

2401

RES

CTH0

RES

0500

2008

0500

2002

CTH0

0004

2002

END

INT

CTC0

RETI

#60000

CTC0

2002 HSP

0004

HSP

0006

HSP

0008

CTH0

LDA

DM0000

STA

SET

2400

SET



Cording

ENDH


0000 LD 2008 0016

0001 EI 0017

0002 CON 0018

0003 SET 2103 0019

0004 CON 00200005 SET 2113 0021

0006 CON 0022

0007 RES 2114 0023

0008 CON 0024

0009 SET 2400 0025

0010 CON 0026

0011 RES 2401 0027

0012 CON 00280013 RES CTH0 0029


VisualKV

Series

Fetching counts from encoder Uses the double (x2) multiplication mode to fetch phase differentencoder.The fetched data is output as BCD data. Phase differential inputoutput: 0600 to 0615 (4 digits)

2103SET

2113SET

2114RES

CTH0RES

2400SET

2008

CTH0LDA

TM00STA

#00002DIVLDA TBCD

0600STA

2002 #00000

0000 CTH0

0004

2002 HSP0004

HSP

0006

HSP

0008

END

ENDH

Initial setting



4

Cording


0000 LD 2008 0015 CTH

0001 SET 2103 0016 LD

0002 CON 0017 LDA

0003 SET 2113 0018 CON

0004 CON 0019 STA

0005 RES 2114 0020 CON0006 CON 0021 LDA

0007 RES CTH0 0022 CON

0008 CON 0023 DIV

0009 SET 2400 0024 CON

0010 LD 2002 0025 TBCD

0011 HSP 0004 0026 CON

0012 HSP 0006 0027 STA

0013 HSP 0008 0028 END

4.4 Expanded Fun

4.4 Extended Functions of HighCounters

This section describes the 24-bit high-speed counter a

4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter

Normally, the high-speed counter operates with 16 bitwith 24 bits (0 to 16777215) using special utility relaysSet the 24-bit operation with the MEMSW instruction.

"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92)

MEMSW instruction: SW3

MEMSW instruction: SW4

.oN hctiwsfonoitcnuF NO FFO

3 retnuoctib-61 / tib-42gnitteS

0HTCrofrotarapmoc tib-42 tib-61

.oN hctiwsfonoitcnuF NO FFO

0 retnuoctib-61 / tib-42gnitteS

1HTCrofrotarapmoc tib-42 tib-61

Visual KV Series Only



The following data memories are used for 24-bit operaRead areas

.oNMD noitpircseD .oNMD

0091MD tnerrucfostibredro-woL

eulav0HTC 6091MD

1091MD tnerrucfostibredro-hgiH

eulav0HTC 7091MD

2091MD tnerrucfostibredro-woL

eulav1HTC 8091MD

3091MD tnerrucfostibredro-hgiH

eulav1HTC 9091MD

4091MD 0CTCteserpfostibredro-woL

eulav 0191MD

5091MD teserpfostibredro-hgiH

eulav0CTC 1191MD

1HTCrofrotarapmoc

4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters

VisualKV

Series

The high-speed counter and high-speed counter comparator updthe read area of data memory each scan time.At the start of an interrupt routine, the current value is updated. Twrite area of data memory is updated with the data write operatio

"Setting the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator" (below) and "4.4.2 Changa 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-223)

Note 1: Use the SET, RES instruction pair to set the special utilitNote 2: The 16-bit/24-bit high-speed counter setting with the MEeffective when the Visual KV is in RUN mode.You must change the program to change between 16-bit and 24-

Setting the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator

To specify the preset value for the 24-bit high-speed counter comvalue into the write area DM1916 to DM1923 and execute the STtions to specify or change the preset value.

When the setting or change is properly performed, the CTC readthrough DM1911 are updated with the new values after one scan

Changing the preset value

Change the preset value for the 24-bit high-speed counter compaAccess Window, programming support software, handheld progrpanel with the following procedure.

1 Write the desired preset value into data memory



4

1. Write the desired preset value into data memory.

Write the desired preset value to the CTC preset value write athrough DM1923.

2. Change the preset value of CTC. (See the notes on the ne

• With the Access WindowCall CTC in device mode and change the value.

• With the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" programming support softwChange the preset value of CTC with the "Edit Device CTC" [

• With the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support sChange the preset value of CTC in the dialog box.

• With the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmerChange the preset value of CTC with the "TIMER COUNTERCHANGE" function.

For more about detailed operation, refer to "Chapter 3 Access Window" (p. 1Handheld Programmer" (p. 1-195) and "Chapter 2 Instructions" (p. 3-33).

4.4 Expanded Fun

4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of a 24-biCounter

Change the current value of the 24-bit high-speed couprogramming support software, handheld programmefollowing procedure.

1. Write the desired current value into data memo

Write the desired current value to the CTH current through DM1915.

2. Change the current value of CTH. (See notes be

• With the Access WindowCall CTH in device mode and change the value.

• With the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" programming suChange the preset value of CTH with the "Edit Dev

• With the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programmingChange the preset value of CTH in the dialog box.

• With the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmerChange the preset value of CTH with the "TIMER CCHANGE" function.

For more about detailed operation, refer to "Chapter 3 Access Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195) and "Chapter 2 Instructions"



Note 1: The current value of the high-speed counter cladder program.

Note 2: DM1900 to DM1923, the data memories for 2be used only when a 24-bit high-speed counter is spestruction.


VisualKV

Series

4.4.3 Application Example of 24-bit High-speed C(single-phase input)

The following is a ladder program using a 24-bit high-speed councounter comparator with a preset value of "1000000".

2008

0008

CTC0STA

DM1916STA

#16960LDA

DM1917STA

#00015LDA

2002 DM000STA

DM1901LDA

2002

0002

0001

2002

0003

0004

0006

0007

0005

High-order 16 bits of

high-speed counter

comparator

Low-order 16 bits of

high-speed counter

comparator

Writes prese

high-speed

comparator

High-order 16 bits of

current value of high-

speed counter



4

1) Sets CTH0 as the 24-bit high-speed counter with the MEWSWon 3 of SW3.)

2) When power is turned on, writes the preset value "1000000" ocounter comparator (CTC0) and sets the value with the STA C

3) Sets the input time constant of input relay 0004 to 10 µs.

4) Counts pulses at input relay 0004 with high-speed counter CT

5) Defines a dummy high-speed counter comparator.6) Reads the current value of CTH0 into data memory DM0000

DM0001 (high-order bits) each scan time.

4.4 Expanded Fun

4.4.4 Ring Counter FunctionNormally, the counter reads "#65535 ($FFFF)" by couThe ring counter function is an additional function of threads "preset value - 1" when it counts down from "0"

Operation of the ring counter function

Setting procedure

• When setting the ring counter, use CTC1 for CTH0• Set the upper limit (preset value) to CTC1 or CTC3

relay 2406 (for CTH0) or 2414 (for CTH1). The ringCTC3 preset value - 1" when it counts down from "

• To use the ring counter for both counting up/down utility relay 2112 (for CTH0) or 2212 (for CTH1).

0

0 CTC1 -1

( CTC3 -1)

Not u

Normal counter

Ring counter



Note 1: Use the SET-RES instruction pair to set the s

Note 2: The flag or the count-up interrupt for each CToperations, but is disabled in counting down operation

Example: When CTC = 100

CTC

Countup

Countdown

Turns ON.

retnuocdeeps-hgiH otarapmocretnuocdeeps-hgiH

desusi0HTCnehW CTCot"1+eulavtimilreppu"teS

desusi1HTCnehW CTCot"1+eulavtimilreppu"teS


V

isualKV

Series

0 9999

2008

0003

0005

EI2406SET

2114RES

2113SET

2002

0001

0002

#00010

2002 0004

0500 T000

Sets high-speed counter indouble (x2) multiplication mode.

Sets ringcounter.

4.4.5 Applications of Ring CountersWhen using a 16-bit high-speed counter

The following is a ladder program that uses the ring counter of a counter with the preset value of "10000".



4

0007

0006

0010

0011

0009

T000

2002

0008

1) When the power is turned on, an EI instruction enables interruspeed counter CTH0 in double (x2) multiplication mode, CTHand the high-speed counter automatic reset function at counti

high-speed counter

4.4 Expanded Fun

0 99999

2008

0004

EI2114RES

2113SET

2002

0002

#00001

LDA

DM19

STA0003

2002

0005

0001

Sets high-speedcounter in double (x2multiplication mode.

High-orderbits of highspeed coucomparato

When using a 24-bit high-speed counter The following is a ladder program that uses the ring cocounter with the preset value of "100000".



0013

0006

0008

0012

0007

0011

0010

#00010 T000

0500 T000

2002

0009

4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters

V

isualKV

Series

4.5 Special Functions Using High-spCounters

This section describes the specified frequency pulse output functcounter function, and cam switch function.

4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output FunctionWith high-speed counter CTH1, output pulses from output relay 0frequency (Hz) specified in data memory DM1936. To activate thdesired value into DM1936 and turn ON special utility relay 2306

The internal clock of the high-speed counter is automatically set duty ratio of 1:1 are output at the preset frequency obtained with "1,000,000/2/Output frequency".

The KV performs the following operations after each scan time dfrequency pulse output function.

• Stops pulse output when special utility relay 2306 is turned O• Sets the preset value so that pulses are output at the frequen

the DM. (Pulse duty ratio: fixed to 50%)• Starts pulse output.

Visual KV Series Only



4

OFF

ON

Pulse dutyPulse duty is the ratio of the pulse widths between ON time and Oduty of 50% means that the pulse widths between ON time and Osame, as follows.

The ratio between ON and OFF time is 1:1.

Device used for specified frequency pulse output

Special utility relays

.oNyaleR noitpircseD

6032 seY:NO.tuptuoeslupycneuqerfdeificepsesU

.NOsnrut7032yalerrorrenehwFFOdecrofsi

7032 nuftuptuoeslupycneuqerfdeificepsrofgalfrorrE

ahtrehtosi6391MDfostnetnocnehwNOsnruT


Setting method

• Set the desired output frequency (Hz) into DM1936to 50 kHz (16 to 50000).

• Pulses are output when special utility relay 2306 iswhen the relay is turned OFF.

• If an unacceptable frequency is specified, special uturns ON. Special utility relay 2306 is turned OFF a

Note 1: The available minimum frequency specified inNote 2: The output is stopped when a value of 15 or l

Note 3: Starts and stops of pulse output or frequency each scan.

Note 4: It takes a maximum of 200 µs from when the pulses are output.

Note 5: CTH1 and special utility relays 2200 through 2specified frequency pulse output function is used.

4.5.2 Applications of the Specified Frequen

Program using a digital trimmer

The following ladder program illustrates how to use a at a desired frequency (16 Hz to 10 kHz).Pulse output is stopped when the value of the digital tless.



1) Sets the upper limit of the digital trimmer to "10000relay 2306 to start the specified frequency pulse ou

2) Sets the input value of the digital trimmer as the ou

3) Output relay 0500 turns ON when a setting error o

2008

0003

0005

2002

0001

2307

0002

0004


V

isualKV

Series

Program for speed control

The following ladder program illustrates speed control using the spulse output function.Control is started when input relay 0000 turns ON. The operationand then stopped when input relay 0001 turns ON.By specifying the speed (Hz) in data memory DM0000, the progrspeed with a start-up speed of 16 Hz and an acceleration speed

0003

0005

#00016LDA

DM1936LDA

DM0000CMP

DM0000STA

DM1936CMP

0001

2010

2307

0002

0006

0004

1000

DIFU

0000 1000

1001DIFU

0001 1001

1101

1100

T000

0007

0008

0009

2009

2011

T000

2306RES

#00016

LDA

DM1936

STA



4

1) Sets "16" as the preset speed at the rising edge of input relayspecial utility relay 2306 to start the specified frequency pulse

TM02STA

DM1936LDA

DM0000LDA

DM1936SUB

#00100CMP

2011

DM1936LDA

2011

2002

TM02

STA

DM1936

LDA

DM1936

LDA

DM0000

SUB

#00100

CMP

2011

DM1936LDA

2011

2002

0011

0013

0010

0014

0012

0015

0016

0017


4.5.3 Frequency Counter FunctionHigh-speed counter CTH0 is used. Write the interval (ment into data memory DM1404 and turn ON special surement result (Hz) is written into DM1405.Input relay 0004 is for pulse input (single-phase input)input) is ignored.

Devices used with the frequency counter


Data memory

Operation flow

1. Set the high-speed counter with external input. Usmeasure how much time has elapsed since the lasµs. After each scan, pulses are counted within the memory. The frequency is calculated from the cou

.oNyaleR tpircseD

5032 FO,seY:NO.retnuocycneuqerfesU

.oNMD tpircseD

4041MD ycneuqerffo)sm(elcyctnemerusaeM

5041MD qerffo)zH(tnuocycneuqerffotluseR



memory.

2. When the time specified with DM1404 elapses fromcurrent value of CTH0 is fetched and divided by thThe frequency is obtained with the following calcul

Frequency (Hz) = (100,000 x Pulse count)

3. The calculation result (Hz) is written into DM1405.

Setting method

1. Specify the counting period for the frequency counmeasurement [Unit: ms]) in data memory DM1404

2. The preset value must be greater than the scan timthe scan time is specified, the frequency is measur

Note 1: To use the frequency counter function set the


V

isualKV

Series

4.5.4 Applications of Frequency CountersProgram for basic operation of the frequency counter

Stores the frequency of pulses at input relay 0004 to DM0000 evms). (Unit: Hz)

1) Sets the counting period to "1000 ms (1 second)" and turns Orelay 2305 to start the frequency counter function.

2) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0004 to 10 µs.3) Stores the measured frequency (Hz) into data memory DM00

Program for synchronous control

The following ladder program illustrates synchronous control usin

t d l t t f ti

00012008

0003

2002

2002

0004

0002

#01000LDA

0005



4

counter and pulse output functions.Measures the frequency of pulses at input relay 0004 every 100 pulses of the same frequency from output relay 0501.

00012008

0003

2002

2002

0004

0002

#00100LDA

DM1404STA

2307

0005

0006

D


4.5.5 Cam Switch FunctionThe cam switch function has two modes: cam switch moperation; and multi-step comparator mode, which coDM1401 with multiple values.

Devices used with the cam switch function


The preset value in the data memory is registered at trelay. When the preset value is changed, turn OFF spand then turn it ON again to register the new value.

Timing diagram of cam switch function

: Operation with the ladder program

.oNyaleR noitpircseD

4132 yalertratS

5132 yalerrorrE

5172 yalernoitarepo-nI

2715

2314

Executed

Start relay

In-operationrelay

Cam switchfunction

Stopped Stopped



: Operation with the ladder program.: Operation automatically executed by the V

Description: When start relay 2314 is turned ON, the Visstart relay 2314 and turns ON in-operation switch function.When in-operation relay 2715 is turned OFstopped.

Cam switch mode

Simulates a cam operation.Connect an encoder to CTH0 to count pulses in doubCTH0 uses input relays 0004 (phase A), 0006 (phase (phase Z) (KV-10xx: 0002).Relays are turned ON/OFF when the pulse count reacThe cam switch function controls a maximum of 32 suNos. with the data memory (DM1400). Each relay is turotation. To turn relays ON/OFF several times in one rin the ladder program.


V

isualKV

Series

Multi-step comparator modeEven a single phase incoder can be used by changing a part of tfunction.To activate the multi-step comparator mode, write the value to bedata memory DM1401 to replace the CTH0 value. This value dettion. If 360 is written in DM1401, and 60 is written in DM1406, theON at 60/360 i.e. 60°.

Devices used in multi-step comparator mode

Data memory

Setting method

In cam switch mode

.oNMD noitpircseD

0041MD htoseulaV(syalertuptuofosserddalaitiniserotS

.).00erastigidowttsalesohw0092hguorht

1041MD )43556ot0(derapmoceboteulaV

2041MD domrotarapmocegats-itlumesuot"53556"retnE

7041MD / 6041MD O / NOsnrutyalertuptuotsrifhcihwtaeulavteserP9041MD / 8041MD

•••

9641MD / 8641MD

FFO / NOsnrutyalerdnoceshcihwtaeulavteserP•••

0(FFO / NOsnrutyalerdn23hcihwtaeulavteserP

0741MD esumetsysrofdevreseR



4

In cam switch mode1. Write the initial number of output relays to be used into DM14

Be sure to write the initial relay number of each channel.Example 0500, 0600: Acceptable, 0501, 0610: Unaccep

2. Write the number of pulses in two pulse-periods of the encodeCTH0 into DM1402. (Twice the number of pulses for one rota

3. Specify the angle at which the first relay turns ON (Unit: 0.1 d

DM1406. Use units of 0.1 deg. to specify the preset angle for mode. (Write the value of [Desired angle x 10] into data memo

4. Specify the angle at which the first relay turns OFF (Unit: 0.1 DM1407.

5. Specify the angle at which the second relay turns ON (Unit: 0DM1408.

6. Specify the angle at which the second relay turns OFF (Unit: DM1409.


5. Specify the preset value at which the second relay6. Specify the preset value at which the second relay

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 as many times as the nurelays max.).

8. Turn ON special utility relay 2314.This relay automatically turns OFF when the cam s

9. Turn OFF special utility relay 2715 to stop the ope

Note 1: When the cam switch function is used, 32 relafied with DM1400 is occupied for the function regardlenot. As a result, these relays cannot be used for any o

Note 2: To use the cam switch mode, set the input timHSP instruction or the special utility relay. (A maximummeasured.)

Note 3: When any improper value is set in data memand special utility relay 2315 turns ON.

Note 4: CTH0 and the frequency counter function caswitch function is being used.

Note 5: The cam switch function cannot be used wheprogram.

Note 6: Special utility relays concerning CHT0, CTC0function cannot be used.

Note 7: The scan time is extended by a maximum of function is activated.

N t 8 Th i ti l f th it h f



Note 8: The in-operation relay of the cam switch funcwhen the mode is changed or the power is turned OF

Note 9: Use the END instruction to change relays or

Note 10: When the encoder is ON in cam switch modcount may be shifted for the time between the start-up

Note 11: The encoder count is stopped in cam switchOFF. (While the Visual KV is ON, the count is continu

Note 12: When a value of 360° or more is specified aswitch function, the value is converted into one within the control.

Example: When 500° is specified, it is converted to 14


V

isualKV

Series

4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch The following ladder program illustrates the basic setting of the cConnect the encoder with a resolution of 360 pulses.Use output relays 0600 through 0603.Output relay 0600: Turns ON within the range 30° to 90°Output relay 0601: Turns ON within the range 45° to 80°Output relay 0602: Turns ON within the range 70° to 150°Output relay 0603: Turns ON within the range 120° to 270°

##00600LDA

DM1400STA

2008

2002

0001

0000

0001

0002

0005

0007

0003

0004

0008

0006

#

D

#01500DW

DM1411

#00700DW

DM1410

#00800DW

DM1409

#00450DW

DM1408

#00900DW

DM1407

#00300DW

DM1406

1000

1001DIFU

1000DIFU

1001



4 1) Sets "0600", which is the initial number of relays used for the cam swDM1400 and sets twice the number of pulses for one encoder rotatioDM1402.

2) Specifies the preset angles at which output relays 0600 through 0603) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0004 to 10 µs.

4) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0006 to 10 µs.5) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0008 to 10 µs.6) The cam switch operation starts when input relay 0000 turns ON.7) The cam switch operation stops when input relay 0001 turns ON.

0008

0009

3600(360°)

30° DM1406

45° DM1408

70° DM1410

80° DM1409

4.6

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse OutputThis section describes the outline and setting method

4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Using the high-speed counter (CTH) and high-speed cKV PLC can output clock pulses directly through outp

without any delays caused by the scan time.

The period (frequency) and width of the pulses are deinternal clock used for the high-speed counter (CTH) aparator (CTC).

The period of the clock pulse (frequency) can be chanthe following ranges.

tuptuO kcolclanretnI foegnaR

0050

0.1(0012 µ )s 02 µ t)zHk05(s

0.01(1012 µ )s 02 µ t)zHk05(s

0.001(2012 µ )s 002 µ t)zHk5(s

1050

0.1(0022 µ )s 02 µ t)zHk05(s

0.01(1022 µ )s 02 µ t)zHk05(s

0.001(2022 µ )s 002 µ t)zHk5(s



Pulses of the internal clock are counted with the high-the number of current pulses reaches the preset valuecomparator (CTC), the ON/OFF status of output relayto output direct clock pulses.

Count value

Note 1: The operation of output relays 0500 and 0501special utility relays.

Note 2: For more about setting special utility relays, rspeed Counters" on page 3-206.

N t 3 Th ON/OFF t t h th di t l k

CTC

ONON

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

V

isualKV

Series

4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed CoComparator

Changing the pulse period and width

By using two high-speed counter comparators, you can change owhile keeping the pulse period constant, or change only the pulsekeeping the pulse width constant.The following examples illustrate how the pulse width and period

with the high-speed counter comparator.

ON-OFF ratio of 1:1

Pulse width (µs) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (µs)

Pulse period (µs) = CTC0 preset value x 2 x internal clock (µs

Use the following calculation to obtain the pulse period from the f

OFF

ON

Pulse period

ON/OFF status is set by special utility

Pulse width



4

Pulse period (µs) = 1,000,000/Frequency (Hz)

Example: To output 10-kHz pulsesPulse period = 1,000,000 ÷ 10,000 = 100 µsPreset value for CTC0 = 10 ÷ 2 ÷ 1 = 50

Variable pulse width

The period and width of the pulse can be changed by changing tCTC0 and CTC1.

OFF

ON

Pulse period

ON/OFF status is set by special utilit

Pulsewidth

4.6

Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset vaThe Visual KV PLC can output a maximum clock pulsUse the following calculations to obtain the pulse periohigh-speed counter comparator used to output the clo

Pulse period

Pulse period (µs) = 1,000,000 ÷ Frequency (Hz)

CTC preset value for pulses with 1:1 ON/OFF raCTC preset value = Pulse period (µs) ÷ Internal clock

CTC preset value for pulses with variable pulse

CTC preset value for pulse width = Pulse width (µs) ÷CTC preset value for pulse period = Pulse period (µs)

OFF

ON

Pulsewidth

Pulse period

OFF

ON

Pulsewidth

Pulse period



Range of CTC preset value with the internal clo

Note 1: Set the CTC preset value to 10 or more whenspeed counter (CTH) is 2100 and 2200. The clock pulwhen the preset value is set to less than 10.

Note 2: The pulse width may vary depending on the Be sure to determine the pulse width after monitoring an oscilloscope.

Note 3: When CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3,l d t if th m l f th t

)kcolclanretni(yalerytilitulaicepS doireP

0012 0022 0.1 µs

1012 1022 0.01 µs

2012 2022 0.001 µs

4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output

V

isualKV

Series

Setting the special utility relayTh i l ili l b h l k l S

deeps-hgiHretnuoc

rotarapmoc

laicepSytilitu

yaler

erruc(0HTCnehwnoitarepO

avteserp(CTCsehcaer

0CTC

3012 foeulavtnerrucsraelcyllacitamotuA

0HTC O

4012 .0050folortnocselbane / selbasiD O

D

5012 .0050hguorhttuptuotceridFFOsnruT O

6012 .0050hguorhttuptuotceridNOsnruT O

7012 .0050fosutatsFFO / NOsesreveR O

1CTC

8012 .0050folortnocselbane / selbasiD O

D

9012 .0050hguorhttuptuotceridFFOsnruT O

112 .0050hguorhttuptuotceridNOsnruT O

1112 .0050fosutatsFFO / NOsesreveR O

2112 foeulavtnerrucsraelcyllacitamotuA

0HTC O



4

The special utility relay must be set to output the clock pulse. Setfollowing manner.• Only one relay for each group can be turned ON from relays 2

and 2108 through 2111.• Use the SET-RES pair or STA instruction to turn relays 2103

OFF.• Turning OFF relays 2104 or 2108 enables control of output re

• To change the pulse width, be sure to first turn ON relays 210matically clear the current value of CTH0. You cannot changeunless you turn ON relays 2103 or 2112.

• Turning ON/OFF relay 2105 stops/outputs the clock pulse.

Note: If two or more relays of special utility relays 2104 through 2through 2111 are turned ON, priority is given to the relay with the

Operation of output 0500 by setting special utility relays

4.6

Operation with special utility relays for high-sp

The following table shows the ON/OFF status of outpuchanged by setting special utility relays (2203 throughtion, or by changing them during clock pulse output.You can set desired values for the pulse period and pdisable the direct output.Operation of output relay 0501 when special utility rela

S tti th i l tilit l

deeps-hgiHretnuoc

rotarapmoc

laicepS

yalerytilitu

CnehwnoitarepO

CTCsehcaer

2CTC

3022 tnerrucsraelcyllacitamotuA

1HTCfo

4022 folortnocselbane / selbasiD

5022 rhttuptuotceridFFOsnruT

.1050

6022 orhttuptuotceridNOsnruT

.1050

7022 osutatsFFO / NOsesreveR

3CTC

8022 folortnocselbane / selbasiD

9022 rhttuptuotceridFFOsnruT

.1050

0122 orhttuptuotceridNOsnruT

.1050

1122 osutatsFFO / NOsesreveR

2122 tnerrucsraelcyllacitamotuA

1HTCfo



Setting the special utility relay

The special utility relay must be set to output the clockfollowing manner.• Only one relay for each group can be turned ON fr

and 2208 through 2211.• Use the SET-RES pair or STA instruction to turn re

OFF.

• Turning OFF relays 2204 or 2208 enables control • To change the pulse width, be sure to first turn ON

matically clear the current value of CTH1. You canunless you turn ON relays 2203 or 2212.

• Turning ON/OFF relay 2205 stops/outputs the cloc

Note: If two or more relays of special utility relays 220through 2211 are turned ON, priority is given to the re

O ti f t t 0501 b tti i l tilit

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

V

isualKV

Series

4.7 Examples of Direct Clock PulseThis section describes programming examples of the direct clock

4.7.1 Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/O

To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0500

This section describes a programming example that will output aON/OFF ratio from output relay 0500 by using the high-speed cohigh-speed counter comparator (CTC0).

Special utility relay setting

Set the special utility relay (2103 through 2112) according to the When outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio, you can simplifyusing the reverse (toggle) output (2107: ON).

Internal clock and CTC0 preset value

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset value of CTC0

.oNyaleR gnitteS

3012 NO

4012 FFO

5012 FFO

6012 FFO

7012 NO



4CTC0 preset value = Pulse period (µs) ÷ Internal clock (µs) ÷

Obtain the preset value of CTC0 by substituting 1 ms for the pulsfor the internal clock (special utility relay 2101).In this case, the preset value of CTC0 is "50".Refer to the following table for the preset value of CTC0 with othe

ExampleCount value

yalerytilitulaicepS kcolclanretnI eulavteserp0CTC

0012 0.1 µs 005

1012 0.01 µs 05

2012 0.001 µs 5

2103SET 2104RES 2105RES 2106RES 2107SET CTH0RES20080001

4.7 Examples o

Cording

Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximustarts. Moreover, if the response is delayed by one scclock pulse stops but the output may remain ON.

Tips

• Use special utility relay 2105 to control (enable/disexternal inputs.

• Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn OFF.

• With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned Ostops.

• When either of the following programs is added to page, the clock pulse is output from 0500 only whe

When SET-RES instructions are used When KE


0000 LD 2008 0008

0001 SET 2103 0009

0002 CON 0010

0003 RES 2104 0011

0004 CON 0012

0005 RES 2105 0013

0006 CON 0014

0007 RES 2106



0000

0000 2105RES

2105SET

0000

0000

To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay

This section describes a programming example that wON/OFF ratio from output relay 0501 by using the highigh-speed counter comparator (CTC2).


Set the special utility relay (2203 through 2212) accorWhen outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio, you cusing the reverse (toggle) output (2207: ON).


V

isualKV

Series Example

Count value

• Sets the pulse output from output relay 0501 with special utility relayIn this example, turns OFF 2204 to enable direct output from 0501 areverse the output each time the CTH1 value reaches the CTC2 valu

• Turns ON 2203 to set CTH1 to be cleared when its value reaches th

With this setting, the operation which clears the CTH1 current value CTC2 preset value is repeated.

• The RES CTH1 instruction resets the CTH1 current value when opeensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.Turn ON the input enable relay for CTH1 all the time when CTH1 is uclock pulse.

Coding

CTC2

ON

yalerytilitulaicepS kcolclanretnI eulavteserp2CTC0022 0.1 µs 005

1022 0.01 µs 05

2022 0.001 µs 5

2203SET

2204RES

2205RES

2206RES

CTH1RES

2008

2002

#00050CTC2

CTH1

2201

0001

0002

0003

2207SET


0000 LD 2008 0008 CON0001 SET 2203 0009 SET



4

Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scstarts. Moreover, if the response is delayed by one scan when ouclock pulse stops but the output may remain ON.

Tips

• Use special utility relay 2205 to control (enable/disable) the c

t l i t

0002 CON 0010 CON

0003 RES 2204 0011 RES

0004 CON 0012 LD

0005 RES 2205 0013 CTH

0006 CON 0014 CTC

0007 RES 2206

4.7 Examples o

4.7.2 Example of Outputting a Pulse with VaRatio

To output a clock pulse of 500 µs (2 kHz)-period and 200 µs-widt

This section describes a programming example that wvariable ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0500 by using(CTH0) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC0 an

Special utility relay settingSet the special utility relay (2103 through 2112) accor

Internal clock and CTC0/CTC1 preset values

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset valuclock.

CTC1 preset value = Pulse width (µs) ÷ Internal cloCTC0 preset value = Pulse period (µs) ÷ Internal c

Obtain the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1 by substwidth, 500 µs for the pulse period, and 10 µs for the in

.oNyaleR gnitteS .oNyaleR

3012 NO 8012

4012 FFO 9012

5012 FFO 0112

6012 NO 1112

7012 FFO 2112



2103SET

2104RES

2105RES

2106SET

2107RES

2108RES

2109SET

2110RES

2111RES

CTH0RES

20080001

0002CTC0

CTC1

width, 500 µs for the pulse period, and 10 µs for the inrelay 2101).In this case, the preset value of CTC1 is "20", and thaRefer to the following table for the CTC preset values

ExampleCoun

yalerytilitulaicepS kcolclanretnI serp0CTC

0012 0.1 µs 005

1012 0.01 µs 05

2012 0.001 µs 5


VisualKV

Series

Coding

Note 1: When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter ithe clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scstarts. The response is also delayed by a maximum of one scan Note 2: Refer to the following "Tips" to start and stop the clock p

Tips

• Use special utility relay 2105 to control (enable/disable) the cexternal inputs.

• Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utilOFF.


0000 LD 2008 0013 CON

0001 MPS 0014 SET

0002 SET 2103 0015 CON

0003 CON 0016 RES

0004 RES 2104 0017 CON

0005 CON 0018 RES

0006 RES 2105 0019 CON

0007 CON 0020 RES

0008 RES 2106 0021 LD

0009 CON 0022 CTH

0010 RES 2107 0023 CTC

0011 MPP 0024 CTC

0012 RES 2108



4

0000

0000 2105RES

2105SET 0000

0000

With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when istops.

• When either of the following program is added to the examplepage, the clock pulse is output from 0500 only when 0000 is O

When SET-RES instructions are used When KEEP instruct

• You can change the period (frequency) of the clock pulse by cpreset value using the LDA and STA instructions.

T h th i d f th l k l f t "4 3 4 C t

4.7 Examples o

To output a clock pulse of 500 µs (2 kHz)-period and 200 µs-widt

This section describes a programming example that wvariable ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0501 by using(CTH1) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC2 an


Set the special utility relay (2203 through 2212) accor

Internal clock and CTC2/CTC3 preset values

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset valuclock.

CTC2 preset value = Pulse width (µs) ÷ Internal cloCTC3 preset value = Pulse period (µs) ÷ Internal c

Obtain the preset values of CTC2 and CTC3 by substwidth, 500 µs for the pulse period, and 10 µs for the inrelay 2201).

In this case, the preset value of CTC3 is "20", and thaRefer to the following table for the CTC preset values


3022 NO 8022

4022 FFO 9022

5022 FFO 0122

6022 NO 1122

7022 FFO 2122



2203SET

2204RES

2206SET

2207RES

2208RES

2209SET

2210RES

2211RES

CTH1RES

2008

2002

#00050CTC2

CTH1

2201

0001

0002

0003

0004

CTC2CTC3

g p

Example


0022 0.1 µs 005

1022 0.01 µs 05

2022 0.001 µs 5


VisualKV

Series

Coding

Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one sc

starts. The response is also delayed by a maximum of one scan stops.

Tips

• Use special utility relay 2205 to control (enable/disable) the cexternal inputs.

• Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utilOFF.With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when istops.

• When either of the following programs is added to the examp


0000 LD 2008 0012 SET

0001 MPS 0013 CON

0002 SET 2203 0014 RES

0003 CON 0015 CON

0004 RES 2204 0016 RES

0005 CON 0017 CON

0006 SET 2205 0018 RES

0007 CON 0019 LD

0008 RES 2207 0020 CTH

0009 MPP 0021 CTC

0010 RES 2208 0022 CTC

0011 CON



4

0000

0000 2205RES

2205SET

0000

0000

When either of the following programs is added to the examppage, the clock pulse is output from 0501 only when 0000 is O

When SET-RES instructions are used When KEEP instruct

• You can change the period (frequency) of the clock pulse by preset value using LDA and STA instructions.To change the period of the clock pulse, refer to "4.3.4 Count page 3-212.

4.7 Examples o

2109SET

2110RES

2111RES

CTH0RES0002

2104RES

2105SET

2106SET

2107RES

2108RES

2103SETEI

20080001

4.7.3 Example of Stopping the Pulse OutpuPulse Count

This section describes a programming example that wµs (2 kHz)-period and 200 µs-width from output relay 10000 pulses are output.

Special utility relay, internal clock, and CTC set

Set the special utility relay according to the following t

Specify the internal clock and CTC0/CTC1 preset valu

table.

Example


3012 NO 8012

4012 FFO 9012

5012 FFO 0112

6012 NO 1112

7012 FFO 2112


0012 0.1 µs 005

1012 0.01 µs 05

2012 0.001 µs 5



2105RES

2105

SET

2203SET

2813SET

CTH1RES

2002

#00050CTC0

1000DIFU

#00020CTC1

CTH0

2101

1000

0003

0005

2002

0012

2002

#10000CTC2

CTH1

05000008

END0010

INT

CTC20011

00000004

0006

0009

0007

#00000DW

DM1940


VisualKV

Series

• The input enable relay for CTH0 must be ON all the time when CTH

clock pulse.• The input enable relay for CTH1 must be ON all the time when CTH

clock pulse.• Specifies the internal clock (2101) as the clock input for CTH0. Spec

clock input for CTH1. With this setting, CTH0 is used to output the clis used to count the clock pulse.

• Specifies the number of clock pulses to the CTC2 preset value.• The clock pulse output starts when input 0000 is turned ON.

To restart the clock pulse output after it stops, turn ON input 0000 ag

Coding


0000 LD 2008 0024 SET

0001 EI 0025 CON

0002 CON 0026 DW

0003 MPS 0027 CON

0004 SET 2103 0028 SET

0005 CON 0029 CON

0006 RES 2104 0030 RES0007 CON 0031 LD

0008 SET 2105 0032 DIFU

0009 CON 0033 CON

0010 SET 2106 0034 AND

0011 CON 0035 RES

0012 RES 2107 0036 LD

0013 MRD 0037 CTH

0014 RES 2108 0038 CTC

0015 CON 0039 CTC0016 SET 2109 0040 LD

0017 CON 0041 CTH



4

Tips

Special utility relays 2103 through 2111 can be turned ON/OFF band STA instructions instead of the SET-RES instructions.The example program below can be changed as follows by usinginstructions. The number of lines and steps can be reduced.

0017 CON 0041 CTH

0018 RES 2110 0042 CTC

0019 CON 0043 END

0020 RES 2111 0044 INT

0021 CON 0045 LD

0022 RES CTH0 0046 SET

0023 MPP 0047 RET1

0048 ENDH

2104

S

2105

S

2106

S

2107

S

2103

S

2008 2100

S

CTH0

S

$02682008

4.7 Examples o

4.7.4 Application of Direct Clock Pulse Out(Ramp-up/down control)

The following ramp-up/down control is available by seto DM0003)

Setting parameters

DM0000: fH [Hz] (Running frequency)DM0001: fL [Hz] (Start-up frequency)

DM0002: Acceleration rate [Hz/10 ms]DM0003: No. of pulses for positioning

CW

KV

24 VDC

FG

– +

–

+

–

+

5 VDC

+ –

CCW

0002

0001

0000

05020500

COM 0003

0501COM 0503

S t a r t

R e v e r s

e

o u t p u

t

E m

e r g e n c y

s t o p

Stepping

Twisted-pair cable

(

Specify va50000 Hz. than the fL

(fH - fL) / (A Must be 65



Note 1: A smaller acceleration rate allows smoother ceration time.Note 2: Be sure to turn OFF input 0007 (phase B inpu

Operation

In the example on the next page, each parameter is s

DM0000: 8000 [Hz]DM0001: 700 [Hz]DM0002: 400 [Hz/10 ms]DM0003: 4000 pulses

When start switch 0000 is pressed, ramp-up/down conbelow. Control is stopped when the pulse count reachPressing the start switch restarts the operation. The o


VisualKV

Series #08000

DW#00700

DW

$0268LDA

#01000LDA

#10000MUL

DM0012DIV

#00005ADD

#00010DIV

CTC0STA

DM0010STA

2100STA

1200SET

CTH1RES

CTH0RES EI

2105RES

#00400DW

#04000

DM0000 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003

DW2813SET

2105SET

2002

2008

0003

0001

2002

0000 1001

#00010CTC1

1001DIFU

#65535CTC0

CTH0

2100

0003 2105SET

#65535CTC2

#65535CTC3

01CALL

02CALL

CTH1

0500

END

RET

SBN

01

DM0003LDA

CTC3STA

#00002DIV

DM0004STA

DM0001LDA

DM0012STA

#00000DW

2002

#00010LDA

#10000MUL

DM0010DIV

#00005ADD

#00010DIV

DM0011ADD

CTC2STA

DM0011STA

SBN

02

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

0016

0017

0018

0019

0020

0502

Specifies high-speedcounters and comparators

Starts positioning

Emergency stop

Calculation routine forCTC0, CTC2, and DM0011

Initialization routine

• CTC0 g

• CTH1 cclock p

CTC0:PuCTC1: PuCTC2:Fre

CTC3:To

• Sets paDM000

• Sets re

• Sets em

• Specifivalue.

DM0010:

DM0011:

DM0012:

1200: Acc

• SpecifieCTC0 p 1 ÷ D

Example



4

Interrupt routine foracceleration/deceleration

Acceleration process

• Acceleracurrent ftime CTaccelera

CALL

RET

SBN

03

RET

LDA STA DIV STA LDA STADM0011

DW

DM0012LDA

#00100DIV

DM0011ADD

DM0004CMP

2002

0020

0021

0022

0023

0024

0025

DM0012LDA

DM0002ADD

DM0012STA

DM0000CMP

1200 2011

INT

CTC2

03CALL

2011

2011

02CALL

0026

0027

0028

0029

00301201

Triangle drive check routine

Chapter 5

Positioning Control

This chapter describes ramp-up/down control of stepp


5.1 Outline of Positioning Control ..........

5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control ...............................

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Pro5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure......................5.2.2 Operating Procedure ...................................

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning C5.3.1 Connection Example ...................................5 3 2 Tips

Visual KV Se



5.3.2 Tips .............................................................5.3.3 Application Examples of the Positioning Con

5.1 Outline of Positioning Control

VisualKV

Series

5.1 Outline of Positioning ControlThis section describes the outline of positioning control.

5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control

The Visual KV Series can directly output clock pulses not affecteto output relay 0502.

If the frequency, the number of output pulses, and the acceleratiopulses have been preliminarily set to data memories, the Visual Kcally performs ramp-up/down control.

The ramp-up/down control output function offers ramp-up/down tstartup frequency, operating frequency, acceleration time, and deshown below.

The output frequency can be set within the range of 200 to 50,00

Frequency (Hz)Number of outputpulses (pulses)

DM1485 and DM1484

OperatingfrequencyDM1481

Upper digit Lower digit

StartupfrequencyDM1480



5

By using the ramp-up/down control output function, ramp-up/dowping motors and AC servo motors (pulse input types) is possible.

Accelerationtime DM1482

Deceletime D

Clock pulse

Rotation direction

5.2 Parameter Se

5.2 Parameter Setting and OpeProcedures

This section describes the parameter setting and opering control.

5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure

Preliminarily set each parameter for positioning contromemory. To operate, special utility relays must be set

For more about special utility relays, refer to "5.2.2 Operating P

The table below shows the relationship between para

Data memories for ramp-up/down control

yromemataD stnetnocgnitteS

0841MD putratslortnocnwod / pu-pmaR)zH(ycneuqerf

002

1841MD gnitarepolortnocnwod / pu-pmaR

)zH(ycneuqerf002

ulav(

2841MDlortnocnwod / pu-pmaR

emitnoitareleced / noitarelecca)sm(

ot0

4841MD sesluptuptuoforebmuN

)stib61rewol(ot0

ro2(

5841MD sesluptuptuoforebmuN)stib61reppu(

ot0

6841MD edocrorreeulavteS ehW

egni



Note: When pulse output is started, the scan time is e(if the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 4 s).

Set value error code (DM1486)

If there is an error in the preset parameters when starterror code (11 to 17) is automatically written to DM148

egni

edoC noitpircseD

11 nahtrellamssieulavycneuqerfputratS.egnargnitteselbawolla

tratsteS2(egnar

21 rellamssieulavycneuqerfgnitarepO.egnargnitteselbawollanaht

repoteS2(egnar

5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures

VisualKV

Series

Operating frequency (Hz) (DM1481)

Set the frequency (speed) of the motor during operation in positioAt the set frequency, the Visual KV Series will output clock pulse

Note: If the startup frequency is the same as the operating frequchart becomes as shown below.

In this case, the acceleration/deceleration time is ignored.

Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) (DM1482)

Set the time to accelerate from the starting frequency to the operafter operation is started.When operation is stopped, the deceleration time is equivalent to

time.In the set time, the Visual KV Series varies the clock pulse frequestartup frequency to the operating frequency (in the case of acceThe clock pulse frequency change cycle within the acceleration t

0

Operating (startup)frequency

Operating frequency

St t f



5

Number of output pulses (DM1484 and DM1485)

Set the angle of rotation (movement quantity) in positioning contrpulses. The Visual KV Series outputs as many clock pulses as thIf the number of output pulses is larger than 65,535, divide it into value and the lower 16-bit value using the following equation.The minimum value is 2, and maximum value is 4,294,967,295.

(Number of output pulses) ÷ 65,536 = A (answer) . . . B (remaA = Number of output pulses (upper 16-bit) DM1485

5msStartup frequency

Acceleration/deceleration time

5.2 Parameter Se

5.2.2 Operating ProcedureIn positioning control, operation is started up, stoppedemergencies by the ON/OFF status of special utility reThe table below shows the relationship between operarelays used.

Operation chart

ytilitulaicepS.oNyaler *W/R noitcnuF D

8032 W potS noitarelecedsmrofreP

.noitarepo

9032 R

WnuR

TESER

upelihwNOsniameRemminoitarepospotS

.margorptpurretni

0132 W tratS tanoitarepopustratS

DM1480:DM1481:DM1482:DM1485:DM1484:

DM1481

DM1480

2310

(START)

2309

(RUN)

0

DM1485

DM1484

DM1482 DM1482

When reloutput (d

While cloremains Ooutput, re



Note 1: If there is no error in the parameter setting wh

turns ON at startup of the clock pulses, special utility rpulses are output.

Note 2: If there is an error in the parameter setting, spnot turn ON but a corresponding error code is written

Confirm the error code, and change the erroneously s

Note 3: By setting special utility relay 2309 to OFF in pulses can be immediately stopped.

Note 4: Rising of special utility relay 2310, falling of sp

( )

2308

(STOP)

p ,

When reldeceleratedge).

5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function

VisualKV

Series

5.3 Examples of Using the PositionControl Function

This section describes examples of connecting a stepping motor ing ramp-up/down control using the positioning control function oSeries.

5.3.1 Connection ExampleConnect the Visual KV Series and stepping motor driver as showThis example is only for reference. For details, refer to the instrucstepping motor driver.Set the pulse input type of the stepping motor driver to "1 pulse in

CW

Visual KV

24 VDC

–

+

–

+

+

–

CCW0002

0001

0000

R0502

CO M

CO M R0503

E m e r g e n c

y s t o

p

S t o

p

S t a

r t

Stepping motor drive

Twisted pair cable

(pulse)

(rotationdirection)



5

• When using a 24 VDC power supply, be sure to use the outputs withresistors (R500, R501, and R502) or use the normal outputs with extresistors.

5.3.2 Tips

When using a servo motor, also refer to the connection example I/O control dedicated to a servo motor such as servo ON is also r

FG

5 VDC*

+ –

5.3 Examples of Using t

5.3.3 Application Examples of the PositioninFunction

Ladder example of ramp-up/down control

When start switch 0000 is set to ON, output 0502 starwith a startup frequency of 500 Hz, operating frequencdeceleration time of 3 seconds.When input 0001 is set to ON, pulse output is deceler

When input 0002 is set to ON, pulse output is immedi

Program example

0 100000

500

1000

Speed (Hz)

2008

2002

EI0001

0002

0003

0004

#34464DW

#00001DW

#03000DW

#10000DW

#00500

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

0000 2310

0001 2308

HSP0002



0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

2309

RES

RETI

ENDH

END

INT0002

2002


VisualKV

Series

Ladder example of the jog operation

The jog operation is performed.

• While input 0000 is ON, the machine continues to move in theWhen input 0000 turns OFF, the machine decelerates and sto

• While input 0001 is ON, the machine continues to move in thWhen input 0001 turns OFF, the machine decelerates and sto

Program example

1000

500

Speed (Hz)CW direction CCW dir

Input 0000(CW direction)

Input 0001

(CCW direction)

1000DIFU

0503SET

0001 230900000001



5

DIFU

0000 0001

#65535DW

#65535DW

#01000DW

#02000DW

#00500

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480

DW1000

1100

1001

SET

2310

2308

END

ENDH

1001DIFU

1100DIFU

0503RES

0000 23090001

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006


Ladder example of automatic operation (palletizing operation)

A palletizing operation is automatically performed.The machine moves to a target coordinate, then returnthe machine moves to a position further away than thereturns to the start position. Such an operation is realreturn movements. This type of operation is suitable foworkpieces to be supplied are located in one position the workpieces and positions them little by little at a ce

When start signal 0000 is set to ON, a moving body mstart position, moves to point 2, and then returns to thwards, the moving body moves to point 3, then returns05000 remains ON for 3 seconds, and then the opera

Program example

5000

0

5000

500

500

Speed (Hz)

P

Point 1: 10,000 CP

#00000DW

#03000DW

#05000DW

#00500DW

0001

0002

00030000

Ladder for automatic operation

Point 1: 10,000 Point 2: 12,000 Point 3: 14,000



DWDWDWDWDM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

#10000

DM1484DW

2310 1000STG

0503SET

#12000

DM1484DW

2310 1002STG

0503SET

1100 2310 1001STG

2309

1100

1102 2310 1003STG

0503RES

2309

1102

11012309

1101

12012309

1201

12002309

1200

12032309

1203

12022309

1202

0503RES

Moves to point 1.

Returns from point 1.

Moves to point 2.

Returns from point 2


VisualKV

Series

Ladder example of a return to the zero point

A return to the zero point is performed.

When start signal 0000 turns ON, the machine moves at a high sdirection. When the zero point sensor turns ON, the machine deca low speed in the CW direction, then stops in the position at whisensor turns OFF (at the end of the CW direction).

Program example

Range detected byzero point sensor

Low speedForced stop

Decelerationand stop High-speed

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

2008

2002

EI

HSP0003

Return to zero point

Zero point sensor: 0003 Start signal: 0000 Pulse output: 0502Rotation direction: 0503

Initial setting

Moves at high speed in the CCW direction.



50007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

1005SET

#65535DW

#00000DW

#00500DW

#10000DW

#00500

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

0503RES

2413RES

1000DIFU

0000 1000 2309

1007DIFU

1005 10072309

0503SET

2413SET

#65535DW

#00000DW

#00500DW

#10200DW

#00200

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

1006 2309

2310

1006

END

INT

2308RES

When the zero point sensor turns ON, moves at low speed in the CW direction.

Detects the rising/falling edge of the zero point sensor (003), stops, andthen changes direction.


Ladder example of an automatic operation (continuous operation

In automatic operation, wait status is realized at each

When start signal 0000 turns ON, the machine movesthe rising edge of wait status reset switch 1, the machpoint 2 and stops there. At the rising edge of waiting smachine automatically moves to point 3. When the ma0500 remains ON for 3 seconds and the operation is f

Program example

0 250000 320000

500

5000

10000

7000

Speed (Hz)

Wait Wait

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0000

#01000

DM1481DW

#01000

DM1482DW

#00003

DM1485DW

#53392

DM1484DW

2310 1000STG

0503SET

Ladder for automatic operation (continuous operation with wait status)

Start signal: 0000 Pulse output: 0508 Rotation direction: 0503

Wait reset switch: 0001

Moves to point 1 at speed of 10 kHz. Acceleration/deceleration timMoving quantity: 250,000 pulses

Moves to point 2 at speed of 5 kHz. Acceleration/deceleration tim



0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

1400

#05000

DM1481

DW#01000

DM1482

DW#00001

DM1485

DW#04464

DM1484

DW2310 0503

SET

#07000

DM1481DW

0503SET

1001STG

2309

1400

13010001

1301

1401

#01000

DM1482DW

#00002

DM1485DW

#08928

DM1484DW

2310

1002STG

2309

1401

13030001

1303

p pMoving quantity: 70,000 pulses

Moves to point 3 at speed of 7 kHz. Acceleration/deceleration tim

Moving quantity: 140,000 pulsesWhen operation has completed, output 500 remains ON for 3 seconds


VisualKV

Series

0001

0002

Ladder example of a pulse motor application circuit

This is a program example which offers control using both automoperations.In automatic operation, when input 000 is set to ON, the followingperformed.

In manual operation, the machine moves forward while input 000backward while input 0009 is ON. When input 0007 is set to ON,returns to the zero point.Output 0502 outputs pulses. The rotation direction is changed by0503.This machine is equipped with a zero-point sensor (0002), a forw(0006), and a backward limit switch (0004).

Program example

0 15000 175

300

15000

2000

8000

Speed (Hz)

Pulse motor application circuit (with zero point sensor, forwardlimit switch, and backward limit switch)

Specifications



5

2008EI

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

1200RES

2002 HSP0000

HSP0002

Specifications

Pulse output: 0502 Rotation direction: 0503Forward limit switch: 0006 Backward limit switch: 0004

Manual switch: Forward = 0008, backward = 0009 Zero point switch:

0007

Automatic operation start: 0000


0007

#03500DW

#00000DW

#00250DW

#03000DW

#00300

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

1300DIFU

1205

0006

0015

0016

0017

0018

0019

0020

0021

0022

0023

0024

0025

0026

0027

0028

0029

0030

0031

0032

0033

1203DIFU

#65535DW

#00000DW

#00000DW

#00500DW

#00500

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

0503SET

1200

1301DIFU

0503RES

1203

1300

1301 0004

1506 2308

1103

00090006

0004 0008

1105

2309ON

1201

1201 12022309OFF1202

Return to zero point

Limit switch

Move forward.

Trigger end of forward movement

While moving backward at low speed, return to zero point.

Start up motor.

Decelerate and stop (in manual/automatic operation).

Automatic operation



2309

1405

2008

0034

0035

0036

0037

0038

0039

0040

0041

0042

1408DIFU

1402RES

1403RES

1401RES

2308

1400STG

1401STG

#00010 T001

1500DIFU

0000

1408

1407RES

T001 1405

2309

1406

1402STG

#00005 T002

1501DIFU

1405RES

T002 1406

23091403STG

#00005 T003

1502DIFU

1406RES

T003 1407

2308 2309

Trigger for stage instruction

Automatic start (while 0000 is ON)

When motor operation has finished, moves stage forward.


VisualKV

Series

2309RES

#17500DW

#00000DW

#00250DW

#15000DW

#00300

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

1505DIFU

0503RES

1502

1200 0008 0009 0000

15061503

END

RETI

ENDH

INT0002

1504

1505

#15000DW

#00000DW

#00150DW

#08000DW

#00300

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

1503DIFU

0503SET

1500

#02500DW

#00000DW

#00250DW

#02000DW

#00300

DM1484DM1485DM1482DM1481DM1480DW

1504DIFU

0503SET

1501

0043

0044

0045

0046

0047

0048

0049

0050

0051

0052

0053

0054

0055

0056

Set automatic operation parameters.Set

mat1. SOAN1

2. SOAN2

3. SO

AN1

Start up motor.

Interrupt for instantaneous stop (to return to zero point)Stozerinte



5

Chapter 6

Interrupts, High-speed Counte

Positioning ControlThis chapter describes ramp-up/down control of stepp

6.1 Interrupt Instructions ........................6.1.1 Description of Interrupts ..............................6.1.2 Interrupt Instructions ...................................

6.2 Direct Clock Pulse .............................

6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse .......................6.3 Positioning Control ...........................6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control

KV-300, KV-




KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

6.1 Interrupt Instructions6.1.1 Description of Interrupts

Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine

Routine program flow is shown by the thick arrow on the left of Finput signals can be received only during input processing.

Although input time constant can be made shorter by using HSP special utility relay 2813 input signals can be received only if the

Input processing

Output processing

Routine program

executionInterrupt routine

execution S c a n t i m e

G e n e

r a t i o n

o f i n t e r

r u p t

R e t u r n s t o s u s p e n d e d p r o g r a m

a t t h e p o i n t o f s u s p e n s i o n .

Fig. 1



6

special utility relay 2813, input signals can be received only if thethe duration of one scan time.

When an interrupt initiation input turns ON, the currently running pended to immediately execute the interrupt routine.

During execution of interrupt routine, input signals shorter than oreceived by the PLC.

Note: To execute INT (interrupt initiation instruction), execute EI interrupt, then use HSP (time constant: 25 µs) or turn ON specia(time constant: 10 µs) to reduce the input time constant.

2008

EI

2813SET or

2002

2002

Interrupt priority

If two or more interrupts are generated at different timexecuted in the order that interrupts are generated.If two or more interrupts are generated simultaneouslyexecuted according to the priority shown below.CTC0 > CTC1 > CTC2 > CTC3 > 0000 > 0001 > 0002

* Note that the above priority differs from that for oth80).

The priority is: 0000 > 0001 > 0002 > 0003 > CTC2

Note 1: During execution of one interrupt routine, exetines is inhibited. (One interrupt routine can be executroutine by inserting EI.)

Note 2: If other interrupts are generated during executhe routines of these interrupts are executed after comroutine in the order that they are generated. Note that

interrupt nesting or up to 8 individual interrupts can beinterrupt routine. However, generation of an interrupt isame interrupt has already been stored.

Interrupt routine2008

EI

2813

SET

END

INTXXXXX

RETI



• Execute EI to enable interrupt.• Be sure to insert INT between END and ENDH.• Be sure to shorten the input time constant by using

utility relay 2813.

Instructions that cannot be used in the INT-RETI b

TMR, TMH, TMS, DIFU, DIFD, W-ON, W-OFF, W-UEHKEY, ITVL, @xxxx (instruction), C, UDC, SFT

RETI

ENDH


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Direct output

Direct output is enabled only through output relays 0500, 0501, 0This function allows ON/OFF status of any of output relays 0500,0503 to be output during execution of interrupt routine.This function allows immediate ON/OFF status output without detime.

Note: Be sure to turn ON special utility relay 2813 to shorten the

Direct input

2008

EI

2813

SET

END

INT0000

0500

( SET )

RETI

INT0001

ENDH

0500( SET )

2002

2002

2008 2813

SET



6END

RETI

ENDH

05001000

INT 0000

10000005


DI: Interrupt Disabled Disab

EI: Interrupt Enabled Enab

Key operations

Operand

Example

Coding

: DIAND8FNC RES

0

: EISET1FNC ORL

3

ORL3

AND8 ENT

R-SRCH

RES0FNC

SET1FNC

ENTR-SRCH

1000 EI

1000

DI


0000 LD 1000

0001 EI

: :

0021 LDB 1000

0022 DI



Description

When 1000 is ON, execution of interrupt is enabled. Wof interrupt is disabled. Interrupts are enabled betweetion.Therefore, once EI is executed, interrupt is enabled un

With the KV, any interrupt is disabled when the operatDI instruction disables execution of interrupt. Use this disable interrupt.EI instruction enables the execution of interrupt. Use t

00

: :


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

INT: Interrupt

RETI: Return Interrupt

Key Operations

Operand

0000 to 0003CTC0 to CTC3

Example 1

Input pulse width shorter than one scan time (eg. one-shot c

: nnnn

INT

FNC RES0

ANL2

:RETI

ORL3FNC LDB

4

ENTR-SRCH

RES0

LDB4

ENTR-SRCH

Operand ENTR-SRCH

ENTR-SRCH

FNC

FNC

ANL2

ORL3

0000(a)

0000

(Input remains ON for 1 ms or more.)

2008

EI2813SET

0500 0500

#00020 T000

T000

#00020 T000

1000

(b)

0000

Input forroutineprogram

Input forinterruptroutine

Executes interrupt betweinstructions at rising edgeby operand. When 0003 operand, the rising or falselected for execution of

Represents termination o

INT / RETI



6

0500 0500T000

END

INT0000

RETI

ENDH

10002002

(Input remains ON for 10 µs or more.)

Interrupt routine coding

Example 2

Features of INT0003

Upon generation of interrupt by INT0003, the CTH1 cutransferred to TM30.Interrupt generated by any of INT0000 to INT0002 is ethe input signal. Interrupt generated by INT0003 can b

or falling edge of the input signal.

In the example program below, pulse width of input 00

0003 Pulse width

ON

OFF

2206(OFF) 2206(ON) 2008

1 E

2002

2

Relay No. ON

2206 Executes interrupts at falling edge of Execinput pulse to 0003. input


0000 LD 2008 0008

0001 EI 0009

0002 CON 0010

0003 SET 2813 0011

0004 LD 1000 0012

0005 OR 0500 0013

0006 TMR 000 #00020 0014

0007 ANB T000



Coding

2206

2206

TMLD

TMLD

3

4


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

INT / RETI

2008

1 EI2203

2002 CTH100052

0000

3

CTH1 #05000CTC2 SET

2813

0501

SET RES

RES

Initial setting

• When the operation is started, EI instruction enables interrupt

• Special utility relays No. 2200 through 2215 are turned OFF. Tdisables CTC2 from resetting the CTH1 current value to 0.

• Turning OFF 2206 allows interrupt to be generated at the risin

• The value of DM0000 is reset to "0".

• Turning ON special utility relay 2813 changes the input time c

• 1.0-µs internal clock pulses are counted using CTH1.• INT instruction with 0003 as the operand allows interrupts to b

• When interrupt is generated for the first time, 2206 is OFF. Thrung (a) is executed. Then, KEEP turns 2206 ON.

• When interrupt is generated for the second time, 2206 is ON. in rung (b) is executed to calculate the following:

(TM30 at 2nd execution) - (TM30 at 1st execution) = pulse

The result is stored in DM0000.

Example 3

Interrupt by CTC

Pulses input to 0005 are counted. 0501 is turned ON when the nreaches 5,000.



6

2002

END

INT

CTC2

RETI

4

5

0501

SET

ENDH

Initial setting

• When the operation is started, EI instruction enabl

• Turning ON special utility relay 2203 allows CTC2 value to 0.

• The CTH1 current value is reset to 0.

• The CTC2 preset value is set to 5000.

• Turning ON special utility relay 2813 changes the i

• Pulses input to 0005 are counted using CTH1.• When input 0000 turns ON, output 0501 is reset.

• INT CTC2 is used to execute the interrupt. (Interruthe CTH1 current value and CTC2 preset value are

• Immediate output to 0501 is performed.

Note 1: When the interrupt is executed, the contact of

Note 2: The operand used for INT instruction is not alinstructions.



6.2 High-speed Counters

KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Internal clocks2200(1.0 µs)2201(10.0 µs)2202(100.0 µs)External pulse0005/00070500

Internal clocks2100(1.0 µs)2101(10.0 µs)2102(100.0 µs)

External pulse0004/0006

Spec(2103

Spec(2203

INT INT

INT INT

TM30

Phase A 0004Phase B (0006)

0009 (RESET)

0008 (RESET)

Phase A 0005Phase B (0007)

Con

Con

16-bithigh-speed counterCTH0

16-bit high-speed counterCTH1

High-speedcounter comparatorCTC0, CTC1

High-speedcounter comparatorCTC2, CTC3

6.2 Direct Clock Pulse6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse

Outline of High-Speed Counters

Basic Architecture

The KV-300 CPU has two 16-bit (CTH0, CTH1) double-phase co

equipped with two high-speed counter comparators (CTC0, 1, 2, can be used as a stepping motor controller or are used to measu

Block diagram of high-speed counters

Lists of special utility relays for high-speed counters

Utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0

2100 Internal clock (1.0 µs) for CTH0



6



2103 When comparator CTC0 is ON, automatically clears CTH0.

1: Yes 0: No2104 Direct output to 0500 Direct output level to 0500

1: Disable 0: Enable CTC1 (any one of these is

2105 Turns OFF output to 0500.1: Yes 0: No

2106 Turns ON output to 0500.1: Yes 0: No

2107 Reverses output (toggle) to 0500.1: Yes 0: No

Utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1




2203 When comparator CTC2 is ON, automatically clear1: Yes 0: No

2204 Direct output to 0501 through comparator CTC21: Enable 0: Disable

2205 Direct output level to 0501 through comparator CTC

1: ON 0: OFF2206 Selection of INT3 edge

0: UP edge 1: DOWN edge

2207 Reverse output (toggle) level1: ON 0: OFF

2208 Direct output to 0501 Direct output le1: Disable 0: Enable CTC3 (any one

2209 Turns OFF output to 0501.1: Yes 0: No

2210 Turns ON output to 0501.1: Yes 0: No

2211 Reverses output (toggle) to 0501.1: Yes 0: No

2212 When comparator CTC3 is ON, automatically clear1: Yes 0: No

2213 Uses CTH1 in magnification mode.1: Yes 0: No

2214 Selection of magnification mode for CTH11: x 4 0: x 2

2215 Enables external reset for CTH1.1: Yes 0: No



For KV-10/80 users

1. KV-10/80 has one 8-bit (CTH0) and one 16-bit (CT

2. Internal clocks are as follows:

3. Special utility relays of 2112, 2113, 2114, 2115, 22are not available.

2100 0.8 µs 2200 0.4 µs

2101 6.4 µs 2201 0.8 µs

2102 102.4 µs 2202 3.2 µs


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

High-speed counter and counter comparators

High-speed counter (CTH1)CTH1 is a 16-bit hardware counter that counts from 0 to 65535.

• You can specify the operands listed in the table below as the • You can specify one operand from the table below.• Operand cannot be modified externally during execution of th• When the external pulse (0004, 0005) is selected, CTH1 is us

counter with a response frequency of 30 kHz.*• When one of the internal clocks (2100 to 2102, 2200 to 2202)

is used as a High-speed timer.• When the external pulse 0500 is selected as input to CTH1, Cdirect clock pulses generated by CTH0.

* KV-10/80: 10 kHz

High-speed counter comparator (CTC)

High-speed counter comparators (CTC) is used only for High-speWhen the current value of CTH reaches the preset value of one o(CTC), the comparator turns ON.At the contact of High-speed counter comparator (CTC), the leve0501) can be changed (directly output) through hardware or an ingenerated. To change the level of output 0500 and 0501, set the OFF) to special utility relays 2103 to 2112, 2203 to 2205, and 22

The High-speed counters correspond to the High-speed counter

High-speed counter CTH0 CTH1

Operand 2100 22002101 22012102 22020004 0005

0500

Countable range 0 to 65535



6

shown in the table below.

Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTH1

High-speed High-speed Range of Outputcounter counter setting value

comparator

CTH0 CTC0 0 TO 65535 0500

CTC1

CTH1 CTC2 0501

CTC3

• You cannot change operands of the high-speed

execution of the program. The input time constcounters is usually set to 25 ms. (The HSP inst

• High-speed pulses can be counted at up to 30 k(0004 to 0007) by turning ON special utility relabe counted at up to 50 kHz by turning ON 2813.

* KV-10/80 : 10 kHz

Outline of Pulse OutputThe KV PLC can output clock pulses through 0500 ancaused by scan time. (Through CPU only)Direct clock pulses, used with the high-speed countertypes of production control such as for controlling targTo perform ramp-up/down control, see "Controlling steA setting of the clock pulse cycle (frequency) can be cthe allowable range as shown in the table below.

Outline of pulse output

Direct clock pulses are output through 0500 and/or 05the special utility relays when the number of internal chigh-speed counter reaches the preset value of the co

CAUTION

Output Internal clock Range of

0500 2100 20 µs (50 kHz)

2101 20 µs (50 kHz)

2102 200 µs (5 kHz)

0501 2200 20 µs (50 kHz)

2201 20 µs (50 kHz) 2202 200 µs (5 kHz)



high speed counter reaches the preset value of the co

Output example

CTH current value (count value)

CTC preset value

ON

OFF

05000501


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Pulse period and width

Period and width of the pulse is determined by the period of the iused and the preset value of the comparator (CTC).When two counter comparators are used, only the pulse width caa constant period is maintained.The following examples illustrate how pulse width and period can

ON/OFF ratio of 1:1

Pulse width (ms) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (ms)

Pulse period (ms) = CTC0 preset value x 2 x internal clock (ms)

• ON/OFF ratio of pulse is 1:1.• Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse width and pe

Variable pulse width

ON/OFF status is set by special utility relays.Pulse width (ms) = CTC1 preset value x internal clock (ms)Pulse period (ms) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (ms)

• Change CTC1 preset value to change the pulse width.• Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse period.

ON

OFFPulse

widthPulse period

ON/OFF status is set special utility relays

ON

OFF

ON/ OFF status is set by special utility relays



6The pulse width determined as above is used to pulses geneKV-300 CPU.Pulses are output through the output circuit. The pulse widting on the response delay from the output circuit and influennected load. Before setting the pulse width, you should meawaveform using an oscilloscope. (Use pulses with variable p

• To obtain the pulse cycle from frequency, use the following exPulse cycle (µs) 1000 ÷ Frequency (kHz)

Pulse period

Pulsewidth

CAUTION

Special utility relay settings and output statuses

16-bit high-speed counter (CTH0) and special u

By setting the special utility relays 2104 to 2112 at staduring generation of clock pulse, you can select ON/Olisted below.These special utility relays also allow you to set the puand enable or disable the direct output.

• Special utility relay must be ON when clock pul

• Only one of relays 2104 to 2107 and one of relaturned ON. When two or more of the relays amopriority is given to the relay with the smallest N

• Turning OFF special utility relays 2104 and 210Because these relays are factory-set to ON, be

• ON/OFF status of special utility relays 2104 to 2RES instructions or STA instruction.

CAUTION

Pulse status at CTH0 (current value) = CTC (p

Comparator No. Relay No. Pu

CTC0 2103 Automatically c

2104 Disables output

2105 Outputs OFF to

2106 Outputs ON to

2107 Inverts output to

CTC1 2112 Automatically c

2108 Disables output

2109 Outputs OFF to2110 Outputs ON to

2111 Inverts output to



• Be sure to turn the special utility relay 2103 or 2pulse width. Turn ON 2103 or 2112 to change th

• Turn OFF 2105 to start clock pulse output. Turnoutput.

• When special utility relays 2104 and 2108 are tuclock pulses are being output, the status of theand the pulses will be stopped.

Timing diagram of 0500 with special utility relay

• ON-OFF ratio of 1:1 • Varia


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

16-bit high-speed counter (CTH1) and special utility relay

2208 to 2212)By setting the special utility relays 2204 to 2205 and 2208 to 221changing these relays during generation of clock pulse, you can output relay 0501 as listed below.These special utility relays also allow you to set the pulse cycle

• Special utility relay must be ON when clock pulse is gene

• Only one of relays 2208 to 2211 can be turned ON. When relays among each group are ON, priority is given to the smallest No.

• Turning ON special utility relay 2204 and turning OFF spe2208 enable direct output.

• ON/OFF status of special utility relays 2204 to 2212 is set RES instructions or STA instruction.

• Be sure to turn the special utility relay 2203 or 2212 ON towidth.

• Turn ON 2203 or 2212 to change the pulse cycle.

CAUTION

Pulse status at CTH1 (current value) = CTC (preset value

Comparator No. Relay No. Pulse status

CTC2 2203 Automatically clears current

2204 Disables output to 0501.

2205 Outputs OFF to 0501

2207 Inverts output to 0501.

CTC3 2212 Automatically clears current

2208 Disables output to 0501.

2209 Outputs OFF to 0501

2210 Outputs ON to 0501.

2211 Inverts output to 0501.



6

Turn ON 2203 or 2212 to change the pulse cycle.Turn OFF 2205 to start clock pulse output. Turn ON 2205 output.

• When special utility relays 2204 and 2208 are turned ON wclock pulses are being output, the status of the output reused in the program is output and the pulses will be stop

Timing diagram of 0501 with special utility relay settings

• Variable pulse width • ON-OFF ratioSettings of special utility relays Settings of sp

2203 ON 2212 OFF 2203 ON

Calculating the pulse cycle and comparator setting value

The KV-300 CPU supports clock pulse output at maxiObtain the pulse cycle for clock pulse output and comfollowing expressions:• Pulse cycle

Pulse cycle (µs) = 1000 ÷ Frequency (kHz)• For pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio (using one compa

CTC setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ Internal clo

• For pulse with variable pulse width (using two comCTC setting value for pulse width = Pulse width (µsCTC setting value for pulse cycle = Pulse cycle (µs

Range of CTC setting based on internal clock

• When setting 2100 or 2200 for the operand of H

ON

OFF

Pulsewidth

Pulse cycle

ON

OFFPulsewidth

Pulse cycle

CAUTION

Special utility relay (Internal clock) Cycle2100 2200 1.0 µs

2101 2201 10.0 µs

2102 2202 100.0 µs



When setting 2100 or 2200 for the operand of H10 or greater value to CTC. Otherwise, clock pu

• The pulse width varies depending on the influe

Before setting the pulse width, you should meausing an oscilloscope.

• When generating clock pulse using CTC0 and Cdo not set the same value to CTC0 and CTC1, othe same value, clock pulse is output at the do

* Refer to page 3-276.

CAUTION


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Examples of Pulse Output

The following sample explains how to program the pulse output.

Example of clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from

This program example shows how to output clock pulse with 1:1 0500, through High-speed counter CTH0 and High-speed counteCTC0.

Setting special utility relays

Special utility relays 2103 to 2112 are set as shown on the right tThe program can be simplified using reverse output (toggle) for pOFF ratio.

Values set to the internal clock and CTC0

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC0 setting value is cfollowing expression.

CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ Internal clock (µs) ÷ 2Assign 1 ms to pulse cycle and 10 µs (2101: special utility relay) and calculate the CTC0 setting value.The calculated result is "50".CTC0 values calculated based on other internal clocks are listedreference.

Relay No. Setting Relay No. Setting

2103 ON 2112 OFF

2104 OFF 2108 OFF

2105 OFF 2109 OFF2106 OFF 2110 OFF

2107 ON 2111 OFF



6

Programming example

Special utility relay Internal clock* CTC0 value

2100 1.0 µs 500

2101 10.0 µs 502102 100.0 µs 5

2008

SET

2103 2104 2105 2106 2107

2002

0001

0002

CTH0

2101

RES RES RES SET RES

CTH0

CTH0 valu

CTC0

KEEP InstrucSET/RES Instructions

Coding


0000 LD 2008

0001 SET 2103

0002 CON

0003 RES 2104

0004 CON

0005 RES 2105

0006 CON

0007 RES 2106

0008 CON

0009 SET 2107

0010 CON

0011 RES CTH0

0012 LD 2002

0013 CTH 0 2101

0014 CTC 0 #00050

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by thedisables the high-speed counter, response relay oat start. Also, the same response relay is generateclock pulse output while the output relay is still ON

This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and s

Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2105 as required to direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Utogether or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF thisThe diagram below can be added to the sample diagrare output through 0500 only when 0000 is ON.

CAUTION



0000 2105

0000

SET

2105

RES

0000

0000

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 1 ms (1

This program example shows how to output clock puls0501, through high-speed counter CTH1 and high-spe



KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Values set to the internal clock and CTC2

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC2 setting value is cfollowing expression.

CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ Internal clock (µs) ÷ 2Assign 1 ms to pulse cycle and 10 µs (2201: special utility relay) and calculate the CTC2 setting value.The calculated result is "50".CTC2 values calculated based on other internal clocks are listedreference.

* Refer to page 3-276.

Programming example

• The status of output 0501 is set by turning ON one of the relathe beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct clo

enabled, and the status of output 0501 is inverted each time C

• Turns ON special utility relay 2203 and specifies to clear CTHprogram repeats clearing the CTH1 current value with the val

• Resetting the current value of CTH1 at the beginning of the pclock pulses of specified width to be output starting from the 1

Special utility relay Internal clock* CTC0 value2200 1.0 µs 500

2201 10.0 µs 50

2202 100.0 µs 5

2008

SET

2203 2204 2205 2207

2002

0001

0002

0003

CTH1

2201

SET RES SET RES

CTH1

CTC2#00050

CTH1 va

ONOFF

CTC2



6• Input relay which enables CTH1 remains ON during clock pul

Coding


0000 LD 2008

0001 SET 2203

0002 CON

0003 SET 2204

0004 CON

0000 2204

0000

SET

2204

RES

0000

0000

KEEP InstrucSET/RES Instructions

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the

disables the high-speed counter, response relay oat start. Also, the same response relay is generateclock pulse output while the output relay is still ON

This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and sTurn ON/OFF special utility relay 2204 as required to direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Utogether or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF thisThe diagram below can be added to the sample diagr

are output through 0501 only when 0000 is ON.

CAUTION

Example of clock pulse with variable ON/OFF ratio When outputting clock pulse with cycle 500 µs

200 µs from 0500

This program example shows how to output clock puls0500, through high-speed counter CTH0 and high-speCTC0 and CTC1.


Special utility relays 2103 to 2112 are set as shown in


2103 ON 2112 OFF

2104 OFF 2108 OFF

2105 OFF 2109 ON



Values set to the internal clock, CTC0 and CTC1

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC0 and Clated from the following expression.CTC1 setting value = Pulse width (µs) ÷ Internal clockCTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ Internal clockAssign 200 µs to pulse width, 500 µs to pulse cycle an

2106 ON 2110 OFF

2107 OFF 2111 OFF


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Programming example

2008SET2103 2104 2105 2106

2002

0001

0002

0003 2101

RES RES SET RES

CTH0

CTC0#00050

0004

0005

RES

2108 2109 2110 2111 CTH0

SET RES RES RES

2107

CTC1#00020

CTH0

ONOFF

CTC0

CTC1

• The status of output 0500 is set by turning ON one of the relaand 2108 to 2111 at the beginning of the program. In Exampleclock pulses to 0500 is enabled, and the status of output 0500CTC0 and is turned OFF at CTC1.

• Turns ON special utility relay 2103 and specifies to clear CTHprogram repeats clearing the CTH0 current value with the val

• Input relay which enables CTH0 remains ON during clock pul

Coding


0000 LD 2008 0013 CON

0001 MPS 0014 SET

0002 SET 2103 0015 CON

0003 CON 0016 RES

0004 RES 2104 0017 CON0005 CON 0018 RES

0006 RES 2105 0019 CON

0007 CON 0020 RES

0008 SET 2106 0021 LD

0009 CON 0022 CTH

0010 RES 2107 0023 CTC



6

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input reladisables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 sat start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop, clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.

This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when

CAUTION

0010 RES 2107 0023 CTC

0011 MPP 0024 CTC

0012 RES 2108

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 500 µs

µs from 0501This program example shows how to output clock pulsfrom 0501, through High-speed counter CTH1 and HigCTC2 and CTC3.


Special utility relays 2203 to 2212 are set as shown o


2203 ON 2212 OFF2204 ON 2208 OFF

2205 ON 2209 ON

2206 OFF 2210 OFF

2207 OFF 2211 OFF

Values set to the internal clock and CTC2 and CTC

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC2 and C

lated from the following expression.CTC3 setting value = Pulse width (µs) ÷ Internal clockCTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (µs) ÷ Internal clockAssign 200 µs to pulse width, 500 µs to pulse cycle anrelay) to internal clock and calculate the CTC2 and CTThe calculated results of CTC3 and CTC2 are "20" anValues calculated based on other internal clocks are lence.

Special utility relay Internal clock* CTC2 value2100 1.0 µs 500

2101 10.0 µs 50

2102 100.0 µs 5

*Refer to page 3-276.



Programming example

2008

SET2203 2204 2205

2002

0001

0002

0003 2201

SET SET RES

CTH1

CTC2#00050

0004

0005

RES

2208 2209 2210 2211 CTH1

SET RES RES RES

2207

CTC3#00020


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

0000 2204

0000

SET

2204

RES

0000

22040000

SET

RES

KEEP

KEEP InstructionsSET/RES Instructions

When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input reladisables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 sat start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop,

clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.

This controls the clock pulse so that it always starts and stops whOFF.

Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2205 as required to enable or ddirect clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Use SET antogether or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF this relay.The diagram below can be added to the sample diagram so that

are output through 0501 only when 0000 is ON.

CAUTION

Coding

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruc0000 LD 2008 0012 SET

0001 MPS 0013 CON

0002 SET 2203 0014 RES

0003 CON 0015 CON

0004 SET 2204 0016 RES

0005 CON 0017 CON

0006 SET 2205 0018 RES

0007 CON 0019 LD

0008 RES 2207 0020 CTH

0009 MPP 0021 CTC

0010 RES 2208 0022 CTC

0011 CON



6RES RES

By overwriting the setting value of high-speed counter comparatoLDA and STA instructions, you can change the clock pulse cycle

Example of stopping clock pulse after reaching the specified output pulse

The following example stops clock pulse having the pulse width ooutput from 0500 at cycle of 500 µs (2 kHz) after reaching the pu10000.

Programming example

2008SET2103 2104 2105 2106

2002

0001

0002

0003

2101

RES SET SET RES

CTH0

CTC0

#00050

0004

0005

RES

2108 2109 2110 2111 CTH0

SET RES RES RES

2107

CTC1

#00020

END

INTCTC2

2002

SET

2105

RET1

ENDH

SET

2203 2813

SET

2105

RES

CTH1

RES

EI

0000 1000

DIFU

1000

0006

0007

2002

0500CTH1

CTC2

#10000

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

• Sets pulse output to 0500 using special utility relay2111.

The example on the left sets special utility relays to(2104: OFF), and turn 0500 output ON at CTC0 (2(2109: ON).

• Turns ON special utility relay 2103 to clear CTH0 uwith correct clock pulse width starting from the 1st

• Enables interrupt using the EI instruction.



p gStops clock pulse using interrupt program (INT CTHigh-speed counter CTH1 reaches the setting valu

comparator CTC2 (when 10000 pulses are output)

• Turns ON special utility relay 2203 to clear CTH1 uprogram to operate repeatedly at the specified puls

• Always turns ON 2813 when counting pulses using

• Input relay which enables CTH0 remains ON durin

• Input relay which enables CTH1 remains ON durin


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

Coding

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruction0000 LD 2008 0024 SET

0001 EI 0025 CON

0002 CON 0026 SET

0003 MPS 0027 CON

0004 SET 2103 0028 RES

0005 CON 0029 LD

0006 RES 2104 0030 DIFU

0007 CON 0031 CON

0008 SET 2105 0032 AND

0009 CON 0033 RES

0010 SET 2106 0034 LD

0011 CON 0035 CTH

0012 RES 2107 0036 CTC

0013 MRD 0037 CTC

0014 RES 2108 0038 LD0015 CON 0039 CTH

0016 SET 2109 0040 CTC

0017 CON 0041 END

0018 RES 2110 0042 INT

0019 CON 0043 LD

0020 RES 2111 0044 SET

0021 CON 0045 RETI

0022 RES CTH0 0046 ENDH0023 MPP

Special utility relays 2103 to 2111 can be set to turn ON or OFF instructions as well as SET and RES instructions. Example belowone program can be made shorter using LDA and STA instructio



6 2008

SET

2103 2104 2105 2106

RES SET SET RES

RES

2108 2109 2110 2111 CTH0

SET RES RES RES

2107

SET

2203 2813

SET

CTH1

RES

EI

2008

EI LDA STA$0268 $2100

Internal[0] [2] [6]

• LDA $0268

When LDA $0268 is executed, the following data is input to the in

COM00000001

0500050105020503

1112

7

89

10COM 20

24 VDC –

+KV-300

FG

Twisted pair cable

CW

CCW(rotadirec

Steppin

S t a r t

R e v e r s e

24 VDC

– +

0

fH

(DM0000)

fL(DM0001)

Frequency (Hz)

Accelerationrate

(DM0002)

10 msAccelerationchange time

Positioningpulse totalcount(DM0003)

Example of pulse output (Ramp-up/down control)

The following example performs ramp-up/down controparameters (DM0000 to DM0003).

Connection example

The following chart shows an operation example whennected to the stepping motor driver. See the stepping manual for details.Set the pulse input mode of the stepping motor driver



Acceleration time Constantrate time

D

Setting parameters

DM0000: fH [Hz] (Run frequency) 153 Hz to 50000 fL.DM0001: fH [Hz] (Start frequency)DM0002: Acceleration rate [Hz/10 ms] (fH-fL) ÷ (AcDM0003: Positioning pulse count 65534 pulses ma


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

2002

INITIAL SETUP FOR HIGH-SPEED COUNTER/COMPARATOR

#00010CTC1

#65535CTC0

CTH0

2100

#65535CTC2

#65535CTC3

CTH1

0500

2008 #08000

DW

DM0000

#00700

DW

DM0001

#00400

DW

DM0002

#04000

DW

DM0003

(SET ) (SET )2813 2105

STARTS POSITIONING

0003 0000 1001

DIFU

1001

$0268

LDA

2100

STA

01

CALL (SET ) (RES )1200 CTH1

(RES )CTH0

(RES )EI

2105

0001

( )0502

EMERGENCY STOP

0003

(SET)2105

END

CTC0,CTC2,DM0011, CALCULATION SUBROUTINE

SBN

02

2002 #01000

LDA

#10000

MUL

DM0012

DIV

#00005

ADD

#00010

DIV

CTC0

STA

DM0010

STA

#00010

LDA

#10000

MUL

DM0010

DIV

#00005

ADD

#00010

DIV

DM0011

ADD

CTC2

STA

DM0011

STA

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

0016

Generates cspeed count

Counts clocspeed count• CTC0: Pu

CTC1: Pu• CTC2: Fre

CTC3: Pocount

Sets parameDM0003).

Reverse out

Emergency Sets CTC0.Setting value 1 ÷ DM001

Sets CTC2.

Programming exmaple



6

INITIALIZING SUBROUTINE

RET

SBN

01

DM0003

LDA

CTC3

STA

#00002

DIV

DM0004

STA

DM0001

LDA

DM0012

STA

#00000

DW

DM0011

2002 02

CALL

RET

0017

0018

0019

0020

• DM0010: P• DM0011: A

• DM0012: C• 1200: Acce

RET

0025

INTERRUPT ROUTINE FOR SPEED-UP/SLOW-DOWN

INT

CTC2

SPEED-UP

DM0012

LDA

DM0002

ADD

DM0012

STA

DM0000

CMP

1200 2011 03

CALL

2011 02

CALL

2011( )1201

2011 DM0003

LDA

DM0011

SUB

CTC2

STA

DM0011

STA

1201

(RES )1200

SPEED-UP

DM0012

LDA

DM0002

SUB

DM0012

STA

DM0001

CMP

1200 2011 02

CALL

2011 02

CALL

#65535

LDA

CTC2

STA

RETI

RETI

ENDH

INTERRUPT FOR PULSE STOP

INT

CTC3

2002(SET )2105

0026

0027

0028

0029

0030

0031

0032

0033

0034

0035

0036

0037

0038

0039

0040

0041



6.3 Positioning Control

KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

6


6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control

Outline of positioning control

The KV-300 CPU outputs clock pulses, independent of scan timeoutput relay 0500 or 0501. When the clock pulse frequency, outpacceleration/deceleration time are set to the data memory addres

the KV-300 CPU automatically performs ramp-up/down control. Ocan be set within the range of 153 Hz to 50000 Hz.

With this function, ramp-up/down control over stepper motors and

(pulse input type) becomes possible.The following section describes setting and application of positioparameters.

Acceleration time Decelera

Frequency (Hz)

Operation

StartOutput pulse count

Clock pulse



6

Motor driver

Rotation direction

Lo: CWHi : CCW

KV-300

0500

0501

05020503

Setting and application of parameters

This section describes how to set and apply paramete

Setting parameters

Set the parameters to the assigned data memory addpositioning control function, the special utility relays mThe following table shows the parameters and assigne

Note: Refer to the following expression to determine t

Output pulse count < (65535 x pulse change cycle [m[Hz])

DMNo. Parameter

DM9407 Set value error code Cis

X-axis DM9408 0500 Start frequency (Hz) 1

(0500) DM9409 0500 Run frequency (Hz) 1

DM9410 0500 Acceleration/deceleration 0time (ms)

DM9411 0500 Output pulse count 0(high-order 16 bits)

DM9412 0500 Output pulse count 0(low-order 16 bits)

Y-axis DM9413 0501 Start frequency (Hz) 1

(0501) DM9414 0501 Run frequency (Hz) 1

DM9415 0501 Acceleration/deceleration 0time (ms)

DM9416 0501 Output pulse count 0(high-order 16 bits)

DM9417 0501 Output pulse count 0

(low-order 16 bits)



Pulse change cycle (∆t)

The pulse change cycle is the cycle in which the outpuchanged for acceleration or deceleration. The pulse cone of the following expressions, whichever produceswhen the start pulse is less than 500 Hz, the pulse chmore.

Pulse change cycle (∆t) [ms] = (acceleration time [ms]orP l h l (∆t) [ ] 1000 ( f


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

6

Set value error code

Automatically writes an error code (11 to 17) into DM9407 when error is found at startup.

Corrective action for error code 16

Error code 16 is issued when the output pulse count during accetion time exceeds other values calculated from the preset parameTo recover from the error, the following corrective actions are ava• Change the run frequency and/ or the acceleration/ decelerat

to the following expression.

Corrective action for error code FFFF (-1)• Reduce run frequency and start frequency.• Reduce accelleration/ deccelleration time.

Code Error description Corrective actio

11 Start frequency is below allowable Adjust start frequrange. able range (153 t

12 Run frequency is below allowable Adjust run frequerange. able range (153 t

13 Run/start frequency exceeds allow- Adjust run/start f

able range. allowable range14 Start frequency is greater than run Reduce start freq

frequency. run frequency.

15 Acceleration/deceleration time Adjust acceleratiexceeds allowable range. to within allowab

16 Too many pulses are output during Change the paraacceleration/deceleration time.

17 Too few pulses are output during Set 2 or more asacceleration/deceleration time. pulse count.

FFFF Other calculation error Change the para

65535Run frequency

x Pulse change cycle x 655351000



6 Start frequency (Hz)

Sets a start frequency (speed) to start the motor rotation smoothcontrol.

The KV-300 CPU outputs clock pulses at the specified freque

Run frequency (Hz)

Sets the motor frequency (speed) during positioning control. Theoutputs clock pulses at the specified frequency.

Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)

Sets the time required when the start frequency accelstartup. In the same manner, sets the deceleration tim300 CPU controls the clock pulse frequency from the frequency within the specified time. The pulse changetime is obtained from one of the following expressionssmaller solution. However, the pulse change cycle wh500 Hz becomes 14 ms or more.

Pulse change cycle (∆t) ms = (acceleration time ms +

orPulse change cycle (∆t) ms = 1000 ÷ (run frequency H

Output pulse count

Sets the positioning control rotation angle (moving disThe KV-300 CPU outputs as many clock pulses as spcount is greater than 65535, set the pulse count sepaand low-order 16 bits based on the following expressio

(Output pulse count) ÷ 65536 = A (solution) … B (r

A = Output pulse count (high-order 16 bits)B = Output pulse count (low-order 16 bits)

Note: When the specified output pulse count is insuffitarget value, the KV-300 CPU performs triangular con

The current pulse output value cannot be checked.

Procedure

0

Run frequency

Start frequency



When the positioning control function is used, the KV-

and emergency stop by turning ON/OFF the utility relaoperations and assigned utility relays.

Relay No. R/W Function D

0500 0501

2308 2311 W STOP Decelerates at

2309 2312 R RUN Turns ON durinW RESET Immediately sto


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

6

DM9409

DM9408

0

DM9411

DM9412

DM9410DM9410

2310(START)

2309(RUN)

2308(STOP)

Operation chart (when 0500 is used)

Note 1: When special utility relay 2310 (2313) is turned ON at st

2309 (2312) turns ON and the clock pulse is output, assuming paare correct.

Note 2: If a parameter setting for the X-axis or Y-axis is incorrectnot turn ON and an error code is written into DM9407. Check theadjust the parameter setting.

Note 3: By resetting 2309 (2312) within the interrupt program, yoclock pulse immediately. You must reset 2309 within the interrupwise, the clock pulse is not stopped.

Note 4: Because the clock pulse is output under software controextended by 10 µs to 20 µs in the pulse change cycle. Test the cthe KV-300 system before using it in practical applications.

Examples of stepping motor control

Connection example

The following reference example shows how to connect the KV-3

DM9408: Start frequDM9409: Run frequDM9410: AcceleratiDM9411: Output pu

(high-ordeDM9412: Output pu

(low-order

When 2310 turns O

(rising [UP] edge is 2309 is ON during cpulse output is stopWhen turning ON 23decelerates and stodetected.)



6

24 VDC –

+

E m e r g e n c y

s t o p

S t o

p

S t a

r t

e o o g e e e ce e a p e s o s o to co ect t e 3stepping motor driver. Refer to the stepping motor driver instructi

details.Set the pulse input mode for the stepping motor driver to "Pulse i

15000

80002000

3000

Ramp-up/down control

When start switch 0002 is turned ON, 0500 outputs 10following conditions: start frequency 1 kHz, run frequedeceleration time 3 s.Turn ON 0001 to decelerate and stop pulse output. Woutput is immediately stopped.

Application example of stepping motor control

Assume a program that can be controlled both automaIn automatic mode, the system runs as shown in the cON.

0002DW DW DW DW DW

2008

EI

#01000 #05000 #03000 #00001 #34464 2310

0001 2308

END

INT0000

2002

RES

2309

RET1

ENDH

DM9408 DM9409 DM9410 DM9411 DM9412

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

EnThop

Se

staDe

Exeinte



15000

In manual mode, the system goes forward while 00080009 is ON. It returns to the origin when 0007 turns OA pulse is output from 0500. Reverse the rotation direThe system is equipped with an origin sensor (0002), rearward end limit (0004).


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

6

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

0016

0017

STEPPING MOTOR CONTROL PROGRAM (ORIGIN, FORWARD, REVERSE LIMITS)

SPECIFICATION

PULUSE OUT==500 FOR/REV=502 ORIGIN=0002 FOR/END=0006 FOR/END=0004

MANUAL SW: FORWARD=0008 REVERSE=0009 ORIGIN SW=0007

AUTO OPERATION START=0000

ENABLES INTERRUPT & RESETS ORIGIN POSITIONING FRAG

MANUAL SWITCHES: FORWARD=0008 REVERSE=0009

LIMIT SWITCHES

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ORIGIN * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

2008 1200

(RES) < EI >

0008 0009 2309 00060502(SET) DIFU

1100

0009 0008 2309 00040502

(RES) DIFU1101

1100

1101

< DW > < DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >1103

DIFU

#00600

DM9408

#04000

DM9409

#00100

DM9410

#00001

DM9411

#00000

DM9412

0008 0009 1105

DIFU

0007 1205

DIFU

Program example

Sets start frand accelerStart frequeRun frequenAcceleration

100 msOutput puls

To return to

forward andwhen origin

For forwardparameters

Start frequeRun frequenAcceleration/Output puls

For rearwar



60018

0019

0020

0021

0022

FORWARD IN ADVANCE

STOP FORWARDING

POSITIONING ORIGIN WHILE REVERSING SLOWLY

1205< DW > < DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >

1300

DIFU

#00300

DM9408

#03000

DM9409

#00250

DM9410

#00000

DM9411

#03500

DM9412

0502

(SET)1200

(SET)

1203

DIFU

1200 1201 12022309ON

2309OFF

1201 1202

parameters

Start frequeRun frequenAccelerationOutput puls

0025

0026

0027

0028

0029

0030

0031

0032

0033

0034

0035

0036

0037

0038

0039

0040

0041

0042

SLOW DOWN & STOP (MANUAL/AUTO)

MOVES TO NEXT STAGE AFTER MOTOR STOPS

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * AUTO OPERATION CH0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

2008 1400

(SET)

2308 1401

(RES)

T003 2309

1407

1400JMP

1502DIFU

1403STG

1406

(RES)#00005T003

1407

T002 2309

1406

1403

JMP

1501

DIFU1402

STG

1405

(RES)#00005

T002

1406

T001 2309

1405

1402

JMP

1500

DIFU1401

STG

1407

(RES)#00010

T001

1405

0000 1401

JMP1400

STG

1300 00062310

( )

1301 0004

1103

1506 2308

0006 0009 2308

( )

0004 0008

1105

DIFU1408 1402

(RES)

1403

(RES)1408

STAGE INSTRUCTION START

AUTO START (OPERATES DURING 0000 IS TURNED ON)

1400

(SET)

0024 STARTS MOTOR

Instdec

Crewithpro

Set(1) RunAccOut(2) RunAccOut



0043

0044

0045

0046

0047 STARTS MOTOR

1502< DW > < DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >#00300

DM9408

#15000

DM9409

#00250

DM9410

#00000

DM9411

#17500

DM9412

0502

(RES)1505

DIFU

1501< DW > < DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >#00300

DM9408

#02000

DM9409

#00250

DM9410

#00000

DM9411

#02500

DM9412

0502

(SET)1504

DIFU

1500< DW > < DW > < DW > < DW > < DW >#00300

DM9408

#08000

DM9409

#00150

DM9410

#00000

DM9411

#15000

DM9412

0502

(SET)1503

DIFU

AUTO OPERATION PARAMETER SET

1506

Out

(3) RunAccOut

Stopro


KV-300

K V

- 1 0 / 8 0

6



Chapter 7

Serial Communication

The KV Series can be connected to an external device

to establish communication.This chapter describes communications specificationsSeries to external devices, and how to perform comm

7.1 Communications Specifications ......7.1.1 Communications Specification ....................7.1.2 Connection with the KV Unit .......................7.1.3 Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal C

7.2 Serial Communication .......................7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure............7.2.2 Format of Commands/Responses ..............7.2.3 Communication Command/Response List ..7.2.4 Setting Communication Commands and Re7.2.5 Other Response Codes...............................7.2.6 Error Code List ............................................7.2.7 Example Program .......................................

7 3 L di T t D t



7.3 Loading Text Data ..............................

7.3.1 Receiving Text Data....................................7.3.2 Transmitting Text Data................................7.3.3 Sample Program .........................................

7.4 ASCII Code List ..................................

7.1 Communications Specifications

7.1 Communications Specifications

This section describes the specifications for the RS-232C interfation between the KV and external devices.

7.1.1 Communications Specification

The communications specification of the KV is summarized in thecommunications parameters of the personal computer by referrin

Communications parameters

Note 1: Be sure to specify the same communication parametersexternal devices to be connected. Communication will fail if differused.Note 2: Refer to the instruction manual supplied with each devicecommunications parameters on the device.

7.1.2 Connection with the KV Unit

Use the special connection cable (Straight cable: OP-26487, Rev96607) and a 25-pin D-sub connector (OP-26485) to connect theconnector of the external device.

Duplex Full

Synchronization Start/stop

Data format ASCII

Baud rate 9,600 bps

Data length 8 bits

Parity check Even

Stop bit length 1 bitDelimiter CR



7

Note: The KV-10xx and KV-10/80 Series include only communic

External device w

Communication port A

Communication port B

KV

7.1

7.1.3 Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Pers

Connect the KV-300 CPU to the RS-232C port of the supplied connecting cable (OP-226486/OP-26487).

Recommended pin assignments for the RS-232C combelow. When connecting the KV-300 CPU, use only th

Standard cable (OP-26486 + OP-26487)

KV-300

Connecting cable

Standard cable:OP-26486

9-pin D-SUB fem

connector: OP-2

KV-300

SD

RD

SG

3

5

4

2

3

4

56

20

7

SD

RD

SG

SD

RD

RS

CSDR

ER

SG5432

Pin assignments forthe KV-300 CPU

DCE

3

5

4

2

34

5

6

7

8

SD

RD

SG

ModularConnector

9-pin D-sub connecto



7.2 Serial Communication


When the KV is connected to a personal computer, the current vof timers/counters or contents of data memories in the KV can bemodified on the computer.

7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure

Commands are transmitted from a personal computer to the KV

Transmitting a break signal

A break signal is used to initialize the communication buffer and the KV. It is necessary to transmit a break signal of 100 ms or lonbefore starting communication. Another break signal is unnecesscommunication is established.

Transmits a command

Transmits communicationsstart command (CR)

Initialize the communication buffebaud rate setting of the KV.

Start communications with the KV

Transmit a command which instru

KV to perform the required operat

Transmits communicationsend command (CQ)

End communications with the KV.

Receive and check the response ttransmitted command.

Transmits a break signal

Receiving a response



7 A break signal must have the waveform shown below.

Note 1: For the first serial communication with a personal compuP3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the KV, or after th(DOS)" "LADDER BUILDER f KV" i f

10 ms or longer

100 ms or longer+V

-VSD

Command/response format

"Command" and "response" in communications betwe

computer are defined as follows:

Command: Message transmitted from personal comp

Response: Answer to the command (message from K

When a personal computer transmits a command to thsends back a response to the personal computer.When creating a program to control the KV using a pethat the response is checked before the next comman

7.2.2 Format of Commands/Responses

The formats of commands and responses are as follow

Command format

Use the following format to transmit commands from t

KV. [CR] is a delimiter. The KV ignores [LF] and recog[LF] as the next command.

Response format

The KV sends back a response to the received comm

When creating a program using a personal computer, computer can process the response in this format.

Command

Response

Or

CR

CR LFCommand

CR

LF




7.2.3 Communication Command/Response List

The following list shows the commands and responses used in stion. "_" in the list represents a space.

noitcnuF dnammoC esnopseR eD

.noitacinummocstratS RC CC

.noitacinummocsdnE QC FC

.edomsegnahC nM KOmMARGORP:0=n

edomNUR:1

.rorresraelC RE KO

.rorreCLPskcehC E? dd :00(edocrorrE=dd

.edomCLPtnerrucskcehC M? fomMARGORP:0=f

edomNUR:1

retnuoC nnnC _ DR

ddddd,ddddd,f↑↑

)eulavteserP()eulavtnerruC(

1,FFOtcatnoC:0=f6ot00000=dddddd.oNretnuoC=nnn / n

deeps-hgiHHTCretnuoc

nHTC _ DR

deeps-hgiHretnuoc

CTCrotarapmocnCTC _ DR

sdaeR remiT nnnT _ DR ddddd,ddddd,f ↑↑)eulavteserP()eulavtnerruC(

1FFOtcatnoC:0=f 6ot00000=dddddd.oNremiT=nnn

remmirtlatigiD TA _ DR00000 _ 00000 _ ddddd _ ddddd

↑↑)1remmirT()0remmirT(

6ot00000=ddddddseulavteserpsdaeR

tcatnocyaleR nnnnn _ DR f 1,FFOtcatnoC:0=f

yromemataD nnnnMD _ DR

ddddd6ot00000=dddddd

.oNMD=nnnnatadyraropmeT

yromem nnMT _ DRtnerrucretnuoC

eulavddddd _ nnnC _ RW

KOetnuoc / remiT=nnn / n

00000=dddddd.oNtnerrucremiT

eulavddddd _ nnnT _ RW

tnerrucHTCeulav

ddddd _ nHTC _ RW

setirWteserpretnuoC

eulav .2 ddddd _ nnnC _ SW

KOetnuoc / remiT=nnn / nteserpremiT

dddddnnnTSW



7KO

00000=dddddd.oNeulav .2 ddddd _ nnnT _ SW

teserpCTCeulav .2 ddddd _ nCTC _ SW

yromemataD ddddd _ nnnnMD _ RW

KO6ot00000=dddddd

.oNMD=nnnn,nnatadyraropmeTyromem

ddddd _ nnMT _ RW

yaleR nnnnn _ TS

KO.oNyaleR=nnnn

retnuoc / remiT=nnnNOsecroF tcatnocretnuoC nnnC _ TS

ttiT TTS

7.2.4 Setting Communication Commands a

CommandsThis section describes the command settings and resproperly processed."_" represents a space.Refer to "7.2.5 Other Response Codes" (p. 3-315) for conditions.

Communications start command

Transmit a communications start command to start coOther commands can be transmitted after the proper rKV.

Note: Other commands cannot be used unless a [CRcommand is transmitted first.

Starts communications between the KV and a person

Command: CRResponse: CC

Communications end command

Ends communications between the KV and a persona

Command: CQResponse: CF

Mode change commandSelects the mode between PROGRAM and RUN.

Command: Mn [n=0; PROGRAM mode, n=1; RResponse: OK

Error clear command

Clears error messages on KV.

Command: ER



Response: OK

Checking KV PLC error

Checks errors or faults in the KV. The description of therror code.

"7.2.6 Error Code List" (p. 3-316).

Command: ?EResponse dd


Reading counter

Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset valu

counter/up-down counter.Command: RD_Cnnn

Counter No.Response: f,ddddd,ddddd

[Preset value of the counter (000decimal)][Current value of the counter (00decimal)]0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is

Reading high-speed counter CTH

Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset valuhigh-speed counter CTH.

Command: RD_CTHnHigh-speed counter No. (0 or 1)

Response: f,ddddd,dddddPreset value of CTH (00000 to 6

Current value of CTH (00000 to 0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is

Reading high-speed counter comparator CTC

Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset valuhigh-speed counter comparator CTC.

Command: RD_CTCnHigh-speed counter comparator

Response: f,ddddd,dddddPreset value of CTC (00000 to 6Current value of CTC (00000 to 0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is

Reading timer

Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset valutimer.



7 Command: RD_TnnnTimer No.

Response: f,ddddd,dddddPreset value of timer (00000 to 6Current value of timer (00000 to 0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is

Reading digital trimmer

Reading DM

Reads the contents of the specified data memory.

Command: RD_DMnnnnData memory No.

Response: dddddData in the specified d65535: in decimal)

Reading TM

Reads the contents of the specified temporary data m

Command: RD_TMnnTemporary data mem

Response: dddddData in the specified t(00000 to 65535: in d

Writing current value of counter

Changes the current value of the specified counter or

Command: WR_Cnn_ddddd

New current value (00Counter No.Response: OK

Writing current value of timer

Changes the current value of the specified timer.

Command: WR_Tnnn_dddddNew current value (00Timer No.

Response: OK

Writing current value of high-speed counter CT

Changes the current value of the specified high-speed

Command: WR_CTHn_dddddNew current value (00High-speed counter N

Response: OK



Writing preset value of counter

Changes the preset value of the specified counter or u

Command: WS_Cnnn_dddddNew preset value (00Counter No.

Response: OK

Note: Executing this command changes the program in the


Writing preset value of high-speed counter comparator C

Changes the preset value of the specified high-speed counter co

Command: WS_CTCn_dddddNew preset value (00000 to 6High-speed counter compara

Response: OK

Writing into DM

Writes data into the specified data memory.

Command: WR_DMnnnn_ddddd

New current value (00000 to Data memory No.

Response: OK

Writing into TM

Writes data into the specified temporary data memory. TM30 andonly memories, so values cannot be written to them.

Command: WR_TMnn_ddddd

New current value (00000 to Temporary data memory No. Response: OK

Forcing relay ON

Forces the contact of the specified relay to ON.

Command: ST_nnnnnRelay No.

Response: OK

Forcing counter contact ON

Forces the contact of the specified counter to ON.

Command: ST_CnnnCounter No.

Response: OK

Forcing timer contact ON



7 Forces the contact of the specified timer to ON.

Command: ST_TnnnTimer No.

Response: OK

Forcing relay OFF

Forces the contact of the specified relay to OFF.

Forcing CTC contact OFF

Forces the contact of the specified high-speed counte

Command: RS_CTCnHigh-speed counter c

Response: OK

Note 1: Input relays cannot be forced ON/OFF. (Exce2301 is ON.)Note 2: "_" in commands and responses represents a

7.2.5 Other Response CodesIf the command from a computer is an unspecified onethe KV sends back an appropriate response code for

Responsecode

Description Cause

• Undefined relay, counter,timer, DM, CTH, or CTC

number was specified.

• Counter, timer, CTH, orCTC number, unused in aprogram was specified.

• Undefined command wastransmitted.

• Incorrect command wasspecified.

• Command other than "CR"was transmitted before thecommunications path wasestablished.

E0

E1

E2

Relay No.error

Commanderror

Programunregistered

When the KV has no programstored, "M1" was transmittedor reading of timer/countercontent was attempted.



E3

E4

Base unitfault

Write-protected

Hardware error was detectedin a KV base unit.

Attempt was made to changethe preset value of a counter


7

Subroutines are nested to four levelsor more.

FOR/NEXT instructions are nested to

eight levels or more.Five levels or more of interruptsoccurred simultaneously.

MPS/MPP instructions are nested toeight levels or more.

Content in RAM was erased. All datain data memory and current values ofcounters in the KV were cleared.

Scan time exceeds 300 ms.

Attempt was made to operate a KVbase unit which has no programsstored.

Hardware error was detected in a KVbase unit.

Error code Description Cause Remedy

00 No error

10 CALL nest error

11 FOR nest error

12 INT nest error

13 MPS nest error

20 Memory error

30 Scan timer error

40 NO PROGRAM

50 SND/RTN failure

51 Division by zero52 Address error

53 Invalid instruction

54 Watchdog timer error

7.2.6 Error Code List

When a "Checking KV PLC error" command (?E) is transmitted, the error code. The following list shows the description, cause, aerror code.

These errors mayprogram is execu

Check the progra

particular attentiosubroutines and tand restore the p

Turn the KV off oRegister data from

Check the progra

• Be sure that therrepetition using t

• Be sure that an iexecuted at a hig

Write a program

Turn off the powethen turn it on agthe error is not rebe faulty. ContacKEYENCE office



7

7.2.7 Example Program

Typical program for communications between the KV IBM PC-AT & compatible computers using BASIC)

‘

‘Language Microsoft BASIC Version 7.0

‘

‘ *****I/OAddress (RS-232C Port-1)*****

‘Port-1&H3F*

‘Port-2&H2F*

‘

PortCtrl%=&H3FB’COM1

Port1Modem%=&H3FC’MODEMCtrlPortBpsLow%=&H3F8’BitrateLow

PortBpsHigh%=&H3F9’BitrateHigh

‘*****ControlCode*****

Port1CtrlCode1%=&H5B’Break&8bitEven1Stopbit

Port1CtrlCode2%=&H1B’8bitEven1Stopbit

‘*****InitializesRS-232C*****

OPEN"COM1:9600,N,8,1"FORRANDOMAS#1'

‘*****RS-232CPortInit*****

OUTPortCtrl %,Port1CtrlCode1%’Start transmitting a br

SLEEP1’wait 1 sec.

OUTPortCtrl%,Port1CtrlCode2%’Ends transmitting a brea

‘

‘-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*

‘’’’’’’’’’’’*****DebugPrint*****

‘’’’’’’’’’’status=INP(&H3FE):PRINT"ModemStatus1";statu

‘’’’’’’’’’’status=INP(&H3FD):PRINT"LineStatus1";statu

‘’’’’’’’’’’’

‘’’’’’’’’’’’*****SelfInit.*****

‘’’’’’’’’’’linectrl=INP(PortCtrl%)’ReadLine-Control-R

‘’’’’’’’’’’linectrl=linectrlOR&H80'

‘’’’’’’’’’’OUTPortCtrl%,linectrl’DLAB=ON

‘’’’’’’’’’’

‘’’’’’’’’’’OUTPortBpsLow%,12’SetBitRate(9600BPS)‘’’’’’’’’’’OUTPortBpsHigh%,0'

‘’’’’’’’’’’

‘’’’’’’’’’’linectrl=linectrlAND&H7F’DLAB=OFF

‘’’’’’’’’’’OUTPortCtrl%,linectrl

‘’’’’’’’’’’’

‘’’’’’’’’’’’*****CtrlLine*****

‘’’’’’’’’’’OUTPort1Modem%,&HB’RTS,DTRON !!

‘’’’’’’’’’’’

‘’’’’’’’’’’’*****DebugPrint*****

‘’’’’’’’’’’status=INP(&H3FE):PRINT"ModemStatus2";statu

‘’’’’’’’’’’status=INP(&H3FD):PRINT"LineStatus2";statu

‘ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Note: No limitations



‘-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*‘****************************************************

‘*****Transmitting a command/receiving a response*****

‘****************************************************

a$=""

WHILEa $>"END"

PRINT"Command>>":

INPUTa$

PRINT#1,a $

b$=""

7.3 Loading Text Data

7


The KV can be connected to equipment having an RS-232C porttext data (less than 100 bytes) as a batch into its data memories.Loaded data can be modified and incorporated into a program.

7.3.1 Receiving Text Data

The KV can write up to 100 bytes of text data sandwiched betweinto internal data memories (DM1000 to DM1099 with communic

DM1200 to DM1299 with communication port B), one byte per daASCII code.

Communications data format

Note that each text data must include STX (02H) in the 1st byte f(100 bytes max.) and end with ETX (03H) in the last byte as show

Internal data memory

The KV writes received text data into its data memories (DM1000communication port A, DM1200 to 1299 with communication portdata memory in ASCII code.

The KV writes "00" into the high-order 8 bits and text data in ASClow-order 8 bits of the data memory.

STX

1st byte Last byte

Text data (less than 100 bytes) ETX

ataDyromem

WENVK

ATROP 0001MD 1001MD 2001MD t3001MDBTROP 0021MD 1021MD 2021MD t3021MD

003-VK08/01-VK

0029MD 1029MD 2029MD t3029MD

.oNataD tnuocetyB 1ataD 2ataD ot3ataD



7

Received data

Byte count of data

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 99

1st DM(Byte count of data)Data memory 2nd DM 3rd DM 4th DM

STX

15

ETX

Note 1: Be sure to transmit a break signal for the first

personal computer after the KV-P3E(01) handheld proKV, or after the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDERming support software is evoked.A break signal initializes the communication setting foa break signal, turn the KV OFF once to initialize the cwill not receive text data unless its communication set

Note 2: If [ETX] exists at some point in the text data, t[ETX] into the data memory. The data after [ETX] is no

Note 3: If KV receives text data while special utility rereceived data is not written into the data memory. In th2802 (2807)*2 turns ON for one scan.

Note 4: When parity errors or other errors occur durinreceived data is not written into the data memory. In th2802 (2807) and 2803 (2808)*3 turn ON for one scan.

Note 5: The KV-10xx includes only communication p

*1: 2804 with KV-300/10/80 *2: 2805 with KV-300/10/80 *3

7.3.2 Transmitting Text Data

The KV transmits text data written into its data memorcommunication port A, DM1300 to DM1399 for commdata memory in ASCII code.

Transmission data format and internal data memo

When transmitting data from the KV, write the data intfollowing format

.oNyaleR)ATROP(

.oNyaleR)BTROP(

.oNyaleR)08/01/003-VK(

1082 6082 4082 snruTebsah

2082 7082 5082snruT

ebsahehwro

3082 8082 6082snruT

tpecer



following format.

ataDyromem

ATROP 0011MD 1011MD 2011MD D

BTROP 0031MD 1031MD 2031MD D

/003-VK08/01

0039MD 1039MD 2039MD D

.oNataD tnuocetyB 1ataD 2ataD D


7

Special utility relay operation

Two special utility relays are assigned for each channel for data t

data or a break signal is transmitted when the respective relay is

Note 1: Be sure to transmit a break signal for the first serial compersonal computer after the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer iKV, or after the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER ming support software is evoked.A break signal initializes the communication setting for the KV. If a break signal, turn the KV OFF once to initialize the communicaThe KV will not transmit/receive text data unless its communicatiinitialized.

Note 2: Turn ON special utility relay 2804 (2809) (SET 2804 [280

data. Special utility relay 2804 (2809)*1 remains ON during text dand automatically turns OFF when the transmission completes.To forcefully stop the text data transmission, turn OFF special uti(2809) (RES 2804 [2809])*1.

Note 3: A break signal is transmitted while special utility relay 28Use the SET-RES instruction pair or OUT-OUB instruction pair tosignal. The communication program of the destination KV is initiasignal has been transmitted.

*1: 2807 with KV-300/10/80 *2: 2803 with KV-300/10/80

7.3.3 Sample Program

The following is the sample program to transmit/receive text datation port A on the KV basic unit.

Data to be transmitted: KEYENCETransmission header: STXTransmission delimiter: ETX

Length of received data: Fixed to 7 bytes

.oNyaleR)AtroP(

.oNyaleR)BtroP(

.oNyaleR)08/01/003-VK(

cseD

4082 9082 7082 snartspots / stratS

S:FFO,tratS:NO

0082 5082 3082 snartspots / stratS

S:FFO,tratS:NO



7

T000

2800

2008 2800

#00010 T000

0001

0002

0003

Sends break signal (1 sec.).

One scan ON

Break signal

Whentransone sscan

Length of received data: Fixed to 7 bytes

0

01

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9A

B

C

D

1 2 3 4 5 6

High-order 4 bits

Low-order4bits

7.4 ASCII Code List

The following are the ASCII code characters used for



E

F

Characters in the shaded area can be used for data tr[STX], [ETX], [LF], and [CR] are used as data delimite

7.4 ASCII Code List

7



7

Chapter 8

Programming Examples

This chapter describes the typical programming examSeries. These programs can be used for Visual KV Se

to the I/O addressing compatibility before use.

8.1 List ............................................................

8.2 Details ......................................................

8.2.1 Reference Program Examples ....................



8.1 List

8.1 List

Instruction Program title

TMR, TMH, TMS [Timers] One-shot circuit

Off-delay circuit

On-delay circuit

Flicker circuit

C [Counter] Accumulator timer

Large capacity counterMulti-level Up/Down counter

Counter multi-level setting

DIFU, DIFD One-shot circuit

KEEP Detection of packs on conveyor

SFT Alternating circuit


Asynchronous shift register


HSP High-speed fetching of input data

MC-MCR Emergency stop circuit

W-UE Input sequence check

Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement

STG-JMP Enabling double coil


STP-STE Process progressionITVL Pulse interval measurement

Fetching data from KV-AN6

CTH [High-speed counter] High-speed counter multi-level setting

High-speed counter current value clea

Input of phase differential signal

SBN [Sub-routine] DM shift

FOR-NEXT Transfer of a block of DM data

HKEY Fetching 16-key inputTMIN [A l ti ] Ch i ti tti l



8TMIN [Analog timer] Changing timer setting value

Changing setting values of multiple tim

LDA/STA First-in first-out (FIFO)



CMP Comparing values with no specific ran

Instruction Program title

EORA Judgement of matcing dataSRA/SLA Separate input of BCD

RRA/RLA Error input count

INC/DEC Total count

Up/Down count

MPX Display of 7-segment LED

DMX Output of error input No. in B

TBCD Output of 4-digit BCD data


TBIN Output of 4-digit BCD data



8.2 Details

8.2 Details

8.2.1 Reference Program Examples

Basic Instructions

Applications of TMR, TMH, and TMS Instructions Refer to p. 3-67 to p. 3-71.

One-shot circuit

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and

specified time.

Timing diagram

Ladder diagram Coding

Off-delay circuit

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. 05specified time after 0000 turns OFF.

Timing diagram

0500

0000

2s 2s

0000 #00020

T000

T000 005000500

2-s timer

0000

Line No. Instr

0000

0001

0002 T

0003 A

0004 O



8


0500

0000

2s

On-delay circuit

Output relay 0500 turns ON in a specified time after in

When input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 a

Timing diagram


Flicker circuit

Output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF repeatedly while

Timing diagram


0500

0000

2s 1s

0000 #00020

T000

0500T000

2-s timer

0500

0000

2s

1s 1s

2s

0000 #00020

T000

T000

2-s timer

0500

#00010

T001

T001

1-s timer

Line N

0000

0001

0002

0003

Line N

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004



Accumulator timer (Remains ON in case of pow

Counts special utility relay 2006 (1-s clock pulse) for 3count value to C002 Accumulates the count for 10000

0004

0005

8.2 Details

0004Low-order4 digits

High-order4 digits

STATBCDLDAC000 8500

STATBCDLDA

C001 8600

Large capacity counter

Accumulates 1 count to C001 for every 10000 counts by C000. T

count up to 655350000.Count input relay 0000Reset relay 0001


Multi-level UP/DOWN counter

UP/DOWN counter which allows the count setting value up to 99• UP input relay: 0001

• DOWN input relay: 0002• Reset input relay: 0003

The example below outputs the high-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCDthe low-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC000.


#10000C000

C000

0001 C000

0001 #65535C001

1000

1000

0000

Line No. Instructi

0000 LDB

0001 ANB

0002 C

0003 LD

0004 OUT

0005 LDB

0006 C

Line No. Instructi

0000 LD

0001 LD

0002 LD

0003 UDC

0004 LD0005 AND

0001

#09999

UP

UDC000

0002

0003

C000 0001

DW

RES

#09999

UPUDC001

BCD:Low-order4 digits

BCD:High order



8 0006 LD

0007 AND

0008 LD

0009 UDC

C000

0003

0002 #09999

DW

RES

High-order4 digits

Coding

Application of DIFU, DIFD Instructions

One-shot circuit using differentiate instruction

When input relay 0000 turns ON/OFF, output relay 05shot (1 second).

Timing diagram


Line No. Instruction Operand Line N

0000 LDB 0001 00120001 C 000 #09999 0000 0013

0002 LD 2002 0014

0003 LDA C000 0015

0004 CON 0016

0005 MPS 0017

0006 CMP #00999 0018

0007 CON 0019

0008 ANB 2011 0020

0009 OUT 0500 00210010 MRD 0022

0011 CMP #01999

1000

0000

1S

1001

0500

0501 1S

1001 0501T002

0000 1000

DIFU

1001

DIFD

1000 0500

0500 #00010

T001

T001

Line No

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008



Refer to p. 3-78.

0501 #00010

T002

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

8.2 Details

Timing diagram

Ladder diagram

Executes SET when all input relays 0000 to 0003 are ON.Detects presence/absence of chewing gum packs at DOWN edgOutputs 1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500 when 1000 is

Coding

Refer to p. 3-80.

0000

1s

0001

0002

0003

0500

0000

1000

SET

KEEP

1001RES

0000 1001

DIFD

1001 0500

0500 #00010

T001

T001

0001 0002 0003

1000

Excecutes SET whenall input relays 0000 to0003 are ON.

Detects presence/absenceof chewing gum packs atDOWN edge of 0000.

Outputs 1-s one-shot pulsefrom output relay 0500when 1000 is OFF.

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruction

0000 LD 0000 0007 DIFD

0001 AND 0001 0008 LD

0002 AND 0002 0009 ANB

0003 AND 0003 0010 OR

0004 LD 1001 0011 ANB

0005 KEEP 1000 0012 OUT

0006 LD 0000 0013 TMR



8Applications of SFT instruction

Alternating circuit

Every time input relay No. 0000 turns ON, 0500 turns alternately


Turns ON every output for a second sequentially. Sets

scan only at startup) and shifts outputs from 7500 to 7When 1005 turns ON, 1000 is set and the same seque


Synchronous shift register

Turns ON input relay 0002 to reset the shift register (1input to 0000 does not synchronize with the clock inpu

Timing diagram

2008

T001

2003

T001

2003

1000

DSFT

1000

1001

1002

CLK

RES

7502

1005

1003 7503

#00010

T001

7500

7501

1004 7504

1005 1000

SET

1000

SET

0000

0001

1000

Line N

0000

0001

0002

00030004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0015

0016

0017

0018

0019




1001

1002 ...

1100

8.2 Details


When input relay No. 0000 turns ON, all internal utility relays No.

turn OFF.SFT instruction can be substituted for RES instruction. This applito reset many relays at one time.


Applications of HSP instruction

High-speed fetching of input data

When the input signal at 0000 has pulses of 5-ms interval and inON, fetches data from input relay 0000 at high speed and outputpulse from output relay 0500.

Timing diagram


* To input a signal having pulse interval shorter than the scan t

2003

2003

0000

1000D

SFT

CLK

RES

1915

0001

0000

0500 1s

0001

0000

0500

#00010

T000

1-s timer

0500 T000

Outputs1-s one-shotpulse fromoutput relay0500.

0000HSP

Line No. Inst

0000

0001

0002 0003

Line No. Inst

0000

0001 H

0002

0003

0004 T

0005 A

0006 O



8

2008Turn ON for 1st scan only at startup.

rupt instruction. Refer to p. 3-192.

When using the interrupt instruction

Ladder diagram

Coding

Refer to p. 3-86.

Application of MC-MCR instruction

Emergency stop circuit

When input relay 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON for 1 s, tand then 0502 turns ON for 3 s, repeatedly.Once input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500 turns ON whewhen 0002 is ON, and 0502 turns ON when 0003 is O

Timing diagram Coding

Ladder diagram


0000 LD 2008 00070001 EI 00080002 SET 2813 00090003 LD 0500 00100004 T000 #00010 00110005 LD T000 00120006 RES 0500

0000

0001

0002

0500

0501

0502

0003

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0000

0000

1000

SET RES RES1100 1101 1102

DIFU

1002 1002

STG

1100 1200 #00010 T000JMP

1101

T000

MC

STG

1101 1201 #00020 T001JMP

1102

T001

STG1102 1202 #00030 T002

JMP1100

T002

MCR

1000 1001

Line N000000000000000000000000000000001001

001001001001001001001001002002002002

002002002002



0007

0008

0009

0010

MC1001

0001

0002

1203

1204

002002002003003003003003

8.2 Details

8

0000

0001

0500

0501

0000

00010002

0003

0500

0000

1000 0002

1001 0003

0001

1002 0500

1000

1001

1002

Application Instructions

Application of W-UE instruction

Input sequence check

Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 is ON and inp0003 turn ON in this sequence.Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 is OFF.

Timing diagram


Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgementChecks the input sequence. Output relay 0500 turns ON when inON and then 0001 turns ON. Output relay 0501 turns ON when iturns ON and then 0000 turns ON.

Timing diagram

Line No. Instruct

0000 LD

0001 W-UE0002 LD

0003 W-UE

0004 LD

0005 W-UE

0006 LD

0007 OUT



80501


0000 0001 1000 0500

Leave

Line No. Instruct

0000 LD

Application of STG-JMP instruction

Enabling double coil

When start SW 0000 is pressed, output relay 0500 turrelays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 s, and then outputurn ON for 3 s. The above sequence repeats.

Ladder diagram

Coding

The double coil operates normally through differedifferent STG instructions turn ON simultaneouslyi i h h i i

0000

1001

JMP

SET

10001100

DIFU1100

1000

STGT000#00010

T000

1002

JMP

1001

STGT001#00020

T001

1000

JMP

1002

STGT002#00030

T002

0500

0501

050205010500

0500

Turns ON 100

Output relay 0

Output relays

Output relays

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. In

0000 LD 0000 0016

0001 DIFU 1100 0017

0002 CON 0018

0003 AND 1100 0019

0004 SET 1000 0020

0005 STG 1000 0021

0006 OUT 0500 0022

0007 CON 0023

0008 TMR 000 #00010 0024

0009 CON 0025

0010 AND T000 0026

0011 JMP 1001 0027

0012 STG 1001 0028

0013 OUT 0500 0029

0014 CON 0030

0015 OUT 0501 0031

CAUTION



instruction has the priority.


When input relay 0000 (start SW) turns ON, output reprogrammed for conditional branching, output 0501 tu

8.2 Details

8

Application of STP-STE instruction

Process progression

When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 automaticallyand then 0501 turns ON for 3 s.


Coding


0000 LD 0000 0014 OUT0001 DIFU 1100 0015 CON

0002 CON 0016 TMR

0003 AND 1100 0017 CON

0004 SET 1000 0018 AND

0005 STG 1000 0019 JMP

0006 OUT 0500 0020 STG

0007 MPS 0021 OUT

0008 AND 0001 0022 CON

0009 JMP 1001 0023 TMR0010 MPP 0024 CON

0011 AND 0002 0025 AND

0012 JMP 1002 0026 JMP

0013 STG 1001

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0000

SET1001

DIFU

1000 1000

STE

T001 0501

SET1002T000

1001

STE

STP

T000

1001T000

#00020

0500

RES1001T000

STP1002

RES1002T001

1002T001

#00030

Line No. Instruct

0000 LD

0001 DIFU

0002 CON

0003 AND0004 SET

0005 STP

0006 LD

0007 RES

0008 LDB

0009 OUT

0010 LD

0011 TMR

0012 LD

0013 SET

0014 STE



80012

0013

0014

STE

END

ENDH

0014 STE

0015 STP

0016 LD

0017 RES

0018 LDB

ONOFF 500ms

Measure the pulse interval

Reset input relay 0002Output relay 0500 turns ONwhen the pulse interval is not within the range from 4

Ladder diagram

Coding

2008

0000

0001

0002

DM0000PLS

ITVL

PAUSE

RES

1000

1000 0500

STA

DM0000

SET

LDA

#00001

2008STA

DM0001

LDA

#00051

2008STA

DM0002

LDA

#00049

2008STA

DM0003

LDA

#00010

1002RES

0500

STA

DM0100

1001

LDA

DM0007

Sets mode 1 i

Sets MAX. se

Sets MIN. sett

Sets the averaDM0003.

Measures theturns ON.

Pauses measON.

Resets measuON.

Writes the aveDM0100 and measurement

Turns On outpinterval is not mm.

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. I

0000 LD 2008 0015

0001 LDA #00001 0016

0002 CON 0017



0002 CON 0017

0003 STA DM0000 0018

0004 LD 2008 0019

0005 LDA #00051 0020

0006 CON 0021

8.2 Details

8

2008

2003

0001

0002

DM0000PLS

ITVL

PAUSE

RES

1000

STA

DM0000

LDA

#09000

2008STA

DM0001

LDA

#02000

2008STA

DM0002

LDA

#00900

2008STA

DM0003

LDA

#00010

1003STA

DM0100

LDA

DM0007

2008

STA

DM0002

LDA

#03000

0001

STA

DM0001

LDA

#02000

STA

DM0000

LDA

#01000

SET

2813

CTH100005


Refer to p. 3-117.

Applications of High-speed counter

High-speed counter multi-level setting

Sets the high speed counter comparator value of the input relay 0• #0100 DM0000

• #0200 DM0001• #0300 DM0002

When a comparator value is greater than the setting value:• DM0000 0500 turns ON.• DM0001 0501 turns ON.• DM0002 0502 turns ON.


Line No. Instructi

0000 LD0001 LDA

0002 CON

0003 STA

0004 LD

0005 LDA

0006 CON

0007 STA

0008 LD

0009 LDA

0010 CON0011 STA

0012 LD

0013 LDA

0014 CON

0015 STA

0016 LD

0017 LD

0018 LD

0019 ITVL

0020 LD0021 LDA

0022 CON

0023 STA

Line No. Instructi

0000 LD0001 SET0002 CON0003 LDA



82002

CMP

DM0000

LDA

CTH1 2009 0500

CMP

DM0001 2009 0501

0003 LDA0004 CON0005 STA0006 CON0007 LDA0008 CON0009 STA

2008

2002 CTH10005

RES

CTH1

SET

2203

SET

2813

#60000

CTC2

CTC2

RES

0502

RES

CTC2T0010502 #00030

T001

High-speed counter current value clear

Counts pulses at input relay 0005. When the count va60000, clears the current value of high speed counter relay 0502 for 3 s.


Input of phase differential signal

Inputs phase differential signals to input relays 0004 aCTH0.

Writes the count value into DM0000.When high speed counter CTH0 reaches 60000, cleasets output relay 0500, and stops fetching count valueSets 0008 as external reset.

Ladder diagram

Line No

0000

0001

0002

0003

00040005

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011

0012

00130015

0016

0017

0018

2008

RES

CTH0

SET

2115

0500

RES

2114

SET

2113

SET

2103

SET

2813

EI

CTH0

00004#60000CTC02002 DM0000CTH0

Initial settings



STALDA

END

INTCTC0

8.2 Details

8

0000

STA

TM03

LDA

#00030

STA

TM02

LDA

#00010

END

00CALL

SBN00

2002

STA

TM05

SUB

TM02

STA

TM04

ADD

#00001

LDA

TM03

FORTM05

1000DIFU

1000 Shifts data fromDM0010 to DM0030.

Designates theshift startDM No. (DM0010).

Designates theshift endDM No. (DM0030).

Shift level

Synchoronoussignal

External reset 0008 is predetermined on hardware even if yothe program. However, you have to set external reset enable

Coding


0000 LD 2008 0014 LDB

0001 EI 0015 CTH

0002 CON 0016 CTC

0003 SET 2813 0017 LD

0004 CON 0018 LDA

0005 SET 2103 0019 CON

0006 CON 0020 STA0007 SET 2113 0021 END

0008 CON 0022 INT

0009 RES 2114 0023 LD

0010 CON 0024 SET

0011 SET 2115 0025 RETI

0012 CON 0026 ENDH

0013 RES CTH0

Application of Subroutine CALL

DM shift

Shifts the data from current DM to the next DM at UP edge of thesignal (timing).As the number of DMs to be shifted increases, the required scanlonger.

Ladder diagram

CAUTION



8

NEXT

2002

STA

#TM04

LDA

#TM03

DEC

TM04

DEC

TM03

Uses the indirect addressingfunction to designate DM Nos.

The program lines whichexecute the data shiftare groped as the subroutine.

Coding

Refer to p. 3-122.

Application of FOR-NEXT

Transfer of a block of DM data

Uses the indirect addressing function to transfer a blo

DM0099 to DM0100 - DM0199.



0000 LD 0000 0021

0001 DIFU 1000 0022

0002 CON 0023

0003 AND 1000 0024

0004 LDA #00010 0025

0005 CON 0026

0006 STA TM02 0027

0007 CON 0028

0008 LDA #00030 0029

0009 CON 0030

0010 STA TM03 0031

0011 CON 0032

0012 CALL 00 0033

0013 END 0034

0014 SBN 00 0035

0015 LD 2002 0036

0016 LDA TM03 0037

0017 CON 0038

0018 ADD #00001 00390019 CON 0040

0020 STA TM04

FOR

SBN01

2002

STA

TMO3

LDA

#00100

STA

TMO2

LDA

#0000

2002

INC

TM03

INC

TM02

STA

#TM03

LDA

#TM02

#00100

1st DM No. oftransfer source

1st DM No. oftransfer destination

Number of DMs to be Transferred.

Line No

0000

0010

0001

0011

00020012

0003



NEXT

RET

0013

0004

0014

0005

8.2 Details

8

2008

SET

2814

2815

END

ENDH

HKEY0000

STA

DM0000

ORA

TM06

SLA

#04

LDA

DM0000

DW

#00000

2815

DMXSTA

TM05

CMP

TM05

ANDA

$03FF2010

0500

LDA

2900

KEY IN

Input value(BCD)

2010

STA

TM06

2002

2815

STA

TM05

CMP

TM05

ANDA

$03FF2010

LDA

2900 2010

2915

DM0000

Input value(BCD)

24 VDC COM 000 001 002 003

COM 500 501 502 503KV

0 1 2 3

4 5 6 78 9 A B

C D E F

Application of HKEY instruction

Fetching 16-key input

Writes the following 16-key input value into DM0000 in 4-digit BCPressing the keys in the lower line clear the input numerical valuWires the 16-key input terminals using 4 outputs and 4 inputs as

Ladder diagram

Coding


0000 LD 2008 0021 AND



0001 SET 2814 0022 ANDA

0002 LD 2002 0023 CON

0003 HKEY 0000 0500 0024 CMP

0004 LD 2815 0025 CON

2002

0000

0500

#00010

T000

0500 T000

STA

T000

TMIN

0

2002

0000

0500

#00010

T000

0500 T000

STA

T002

STA

T001

STA

T000

TMIN

0

0001

0501

#00010

T001

0501 T001

0002

0502

#00010

T002

0502 T002

Arithmetic Instructions

Applications of TMIN (Analog timer) instruction

Changing timer setting value

Uses analog timer (TMIN0) to change the timer setting


Changing setting values of multiple timers

Uses analog timer (TMIN0) to change setting values o


Line No

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

0008

Line No

0000

0001

0002

0003

00040005

0006

0007

0008

0010

0011

0012

00130014

0015

0016



* In the above example, T000, T001,and T002 have the same setting value.

Refer to p 3 138

0016

0017

0018

0019

0020

8.2 Details

8


0000 LD 0000 0035 STA0001 DIFU 1000 0036 CON0002 CON 0037 LDA0003 AND 1000 0038 CON0004 MPS 0039 STA0005 AND 0001 0040 LD0006 LDA $1111 0041 LDA0007 CON 0042 CON0008 STA DM0000 0043 CMP

0009 MPP 0044 CON0010 ANB 0001 0045 AND0011 LDA $5555 0046 LDA0012 CON 0047 CON

The data once fetched is written into DM0004, DM0003, ..., DM0the unloading timing, unload the data from DM0004 and shifts thenext DM.

The ON/NG judgement and unloading timings can be used in asygrams.

Ladder diagram

Coding

2002

LDA

$0000

STA

DM0004

LDA

DM0003

CMP

$0000 2010

LDA

DM0004

STA

DM0003

0000

LDA

$11111000 0001

STA

DM00001000DIFU

Transfers $1111 to DM0000.

LDA$55550001

STADM0000

Transfers $5555 to DM0000.

OK/NG judgementOK/NG judgement timing

2002

LDA

$0000

STA

DM0003

LDA

DM0002

CMP

$0000 2010

LDA

DM0003

STA

DM0002

2002

LDA

$0000

STA

DM0002

LDA

DM0001

CMP

$0000 2010

LDA

DM0002

STA

DM0001

2002

LDA

$0000

STA

DM0001

LDA

DM0000

CMP

$0000 2010

LDA

DM0001

STA

DM0000

0002

LDA

$0000

STA

DM0004

Unloading timing Transfers $0000 to DM at unloading timing.

Compares the DM valIf it is equal to $0000, value of the previous Dthen writes $0000 into



0013 STA DM0000 0048 STA0014 LD 2002 0049 CON0015 LDA DM0004 0050 LDA0016 CON 0051 CON

2002

0005 #9999

C000

STAC000

LDADM0000

0001


Sets the setting value of counter C000 to DM0000. Re



Sets the setting value of timer T000 to DM0000. Rese


Refer to p. 3-140.

Application of CMP (compare) instruction

When comparing values with no specific range

Turns ON 0500 when the DM0000 value is smaller thaTurns ON 0501 when the DM0000 value is equal to thTurns ON 0502 when the DM0000 value is greater tha


Line No

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

2002

0005 #9999

T000

STA

T000

LDA

DM0000 Line No

0000

0001

00020003

0004

0005

2002

05022011

CMP

#01000

LDA

DM000 05002009

DM0000 <#01000

DM0000

=#01000

DM0000 >#01000

05012010

Line No

0000

0001

00020003

0004

0005



0005

0006

0007

0008

8.2 Details

8

2002

05012009

CMP

DM0000

LDA

C000 05002009

2002DIV

#00010MUL

#00004ADD

#00001TMIN

0

0001 #09999

C000

00000

STADM0000 Sets the TMIN setting

range from 0 to 100.

Coding

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instru

0000 LDB 0001 0008 OU0001 C 001 #09999 0000 0009 LD

0002 LD 2002 0010 LD

0003 LDA C001 0011 CO

0004 CON 0012 CM

0005 CMP #01000 0013 CO

0006 CON 0014 AN

0007 ANB 2011 0015 OU

Changing the CMP setting valueCompares the current value of C000 to the CMP setting value. Svalue to analog timer TMIN0.The following example changes the setting value within the rangeTurns ON 0500 when the C000 value is smaller than the CMP seTurns ON 0501 when the C000 value is greater than the CMP se

Ladder diagram

Coding


0000 LD 2002 0011 C

0001 TMIN 0 0012 LD

0002 CON 0013 LDA

0003 ADD #00001 0014 CON

0004 CON 0015 CMP

0005 MUL #00004 0016 MPS

0006 CON 0017 AND

0007 DIV #00010 0018 OUT

0008 CON 0019 MPP



0008 CON 0019 MPP

0009 STA DM0000 0020 ANB

0010 LDB 0001 0021 OUT

0001 #09999

C000

2002 0500#00999C000 ≤ 00999LDA

C000

CMP

0501

0502

2011

#01999

CMP

2011 0500

#02999

CMP

2011 0500 0501

0000

00999 < C000 ≤

01999 < C000 ≤

Ladder diagram

Coding

Refer to p. 3-146.

Application of ADD instruction

Adding BCD and BIN values

Adds a 4-digit BCD input value (7000 to 7015) to the cwrites the sum into DM0100.

Ladder diagram

2002

ADD

DM0000

LDA

C001

2002

TBINLDA

7000

STA

DM0100

STA

DM0000

Converts BCD in

Adds converted


0000 LDB 0001 0012

0001 C 000 #09999 0000 0013

0002 LD 2002 0014

0003 LDA C000 0015

0004 CON 00160005 MPS 0017

0006 CMP #00999 0018

0007 CON 0019

0008 ANB 2011 0020

0009 OUT 0500 0021

0010 MRD 0022

0011 CMP #01999



0001 #09999

C001

ADDLDA

0000

STA Adds converted C001 and writes

8.2 Details

8

0000

LDA

C001

STA

DM0001#09999C001

0001

0000

LDA

C002

STA

DM0002#09999C002

0002

0000

LDA

C003

STA

DM0003#09999

C003

00032002

ADD

DM0002

LDA

DM0001

STA

DM0100

ADD

DM0003

2002

CMP

#00052009

LDA

DM0000

SUB

DM0001 10002009

Total count

Writes total count of counters C001 to C003 into DM0100. The towithin 65535.

Ladder diagram

Coding


0000 LDB 0000 0013 C

0001 C 001 #09999 0001 0014 CON

0002 CON 0015 LDA0003 LDA C001 0016 CON

0004 CON 0017 STA

0005 STA DM0001 0018 LD

0006 LDB 0000 0019 LDA

0007 C 002 #09999 0002 0020 CON

0008 CON 0021 ADD

0009 LDA C002 0022 CON

0010 CON 0023 ADD

0011 STA DM0002 0024 CON0012 LDB 0000 0025 STA

Writes C001 current value into DM0



Writes total count (DM0001 + CM0DM100.

Refer to p. 3-150.

Application of SUB instruction

Comparison of absolute values

Compares the DM0000 value to the DM0001 value and turns ONdifference of the two absolute values is greater than 5.

Ladder diagram



CMP

#0005

SUB

DM0000

LDA

DM00012009 10012009

1000 0500

2002

LDA

TM00

STA

DM0100

MUL

DM0000

LDA

C001

0001 #09999

C001

0000

STA

DM0101

#09999

00001

C0010000

STA

DM0001

LDA

C001

DM0001 DM0002 DM0003

2002

#09999C002

0000STA

DM0002

LDA

C002

#09999

C003

0000

STA

DM0003

LDA

C003

ADDLDA

DM0001

ADD

DM0003

00002

00003

DM0002

Writes the C001 currentvalue into DM0001.



Application of MUL instruction

Multiplying the counter current value by DM va

Multiplies the counter current value by the DM0000 va16 bits of the product into DM0101 and low-order 16 bDM0100.


Refer to p. 3-150.

Application of DIV instruction

Total count average

Outputs the average of 3 counter values in 4-digit BCD(C001 + C002 + C003) ÷ 3 BCD output value

The BCD value is output to 7500 to 7515.

Ladder diagram

Line No

0000

0001

00020003

0005

0004

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

0011



2002÷3 → Output to 07500to 07515 in 4-digit BCD.TBCDDIV

#00003

STA

07500

C di

8.2 Details

8Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instruction

Application of ANDA instruction

BCD (1-digit) input

Sets a 1-digit BCD value, which is input to 0000 to 0003, in C000

Ladder diagram

Coding

Fetches input data separately

Sets the low-order 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 700and the high-order 2 digits to timer T001.

Ladder diagram

Coding


0000 LD 2002 0005 TBIN

0001 LDA 0000 0006 CON

0002 CON 0007 STA

0003 ANDA $000F 0008 LDB

0004 LD 2002 0009 C

2002ANDA$000F

LDA0000

2002STAC000

TBIN

#09999

C000

7000

7001

Fetches data of 0000 to 0015 and retains dato 0003 only.

Converts data to BIN and writes it into C000.

Sets C000.

2002

2002

LDA

#09999C000

0001

0000

7000

ANDA

$FF00

TBIN

#08

SRA STA

T001

LDA

7000

ANDA

$00FF

STA

C000

TBIN

#09999T001

0001

Converts data of 7000 to 70writes it into C000.

Shifts data to right by 8 bitsBIN, and writes it into T001.

Sets C000.

Sets T001.



0000 LD 2002 0011 ANDA

0001 LDA 7000 0012 CON

0002 CON 0013 SRA

Application of ORA instruction

Output of BCD 2-digit data

Converts the current value of counter C000 to BCD anto output relays 7500 to 7507.However, retain ON/OFF of 7508 to 7515 which are lo

Ladder diagram

Coding

Separate input of 2-digit BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 t8003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value

Ladder diagram

#00099

0001

C0000000

2002

2002STA

DM0000

ANDA

$FF00

2002ANDA

$00FF

TBCD

STAORA

DM0000 7500

LDA

7500

LDA

C000

Sets C000.

Writes data of 7008 to

ORs the data in the intDM0000 data and sento 7515.

Converts the current varetains the low-order 2internal register.


0000 LDB 0000 0009

0001 C 000 #00099 0001 0010

0002 LD 2002 0011

0003 LDA 7500 0012

0004 CON 0013

0005 ANDA $FF00 0014

0006 CON 0015

0007 STA DM0000 00160008 LD 2002 0017

#00099

0001

C001

0000

2002

STA

DM0000

ANDA

$000F

LDA

7000



2002

ANDA

$000F

LDA

8000

8.2 Details

8

1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1D15D14D13D12D11D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

ANDA

EORA

$BBBB

$00FF

$00BB

$00AA

$0011

7000 to 7015

Operand

Internal register

DM0000

Internal register → 2010 is OFF. Whevalue of internal reis 0000, 2010 turn

Judges match between the operand and the data

2008

2002

LDA

7000

ANDA

$00FF DM0000

EORA

LDA

$00AA

STA

DM0000

2010 0500

Application of EORA instruction

Judgement of matching data

Turns ON 0500 (“OK” output) when the ON/OFF statuses of inpu7007 match the DM0000 setting value.


For easy comprehension, the following data is set temporarily.

When 2010 is ON, the two values match.When 2010 is OFF, the two values do not match.

Refer to p. 3-164.

Application of SRA/SLA instructions

Separate input of BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7012 to 7015 for t8003 f th 2 d di it) d t it th t l

Line No. Instructio

0000 LD

0001 LDA

0002 CON

0003 STA

0004 LD0005 LDA

0006 CON

0007 ANDA

0008 CON

0009 EORA

0010 CON

0011 AND

0012 OUT



8003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.

Ladder diagram

Coding

Refer to p. 3-166.

Application of RRA/RLA instructions

Error input count

Writes the number of error detection sensors, which a(7000 to 7015) and turn ON, into DM0000.

Ladder diagram

Coding


0000 LD 0001 0011

0001 C 001 #00099 0000 0012

0002 LD 2002 0013

0003 LDA 7000 0014

0004 CON 0015

0005 ANDA $F000 0016

0006 LD 2002 0017

0007 SRA #12 0018

0008 CON 0019

0009 STA DM0000 00200010 LD 2002 0021


0000 LD 2002 0009

0001 LDA 7000 00100002 FOR #00016 0011

0003 LD 02002 0012

0004 RRA #01 0013

0005 CON 0014

Writes the TM10 data into #00000 to TM10.

2002

RRA

#01

INC

TM10

LDA

7000

#00016

2002

LDA

TM10

LDA

DM0000

STA STA

TM102002

2009

#00000

NEXT

FO R

Writes the data of 7000 to7015 into internal register.

Executes FOR-NEXT instr

Shifts the data including caand increments TM10 by 1



0005 CON 0014

0006 AND 2009 0015

0007 INC TM10 0016

8.2 Details

8

2008STA

DM0000

LDA

#00000

0000INC

DM0000

0005DW

#00000

0001DEC

DM0000

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edgeof input relay 0000.

Decrements DM0000 by 1 at UP edgof input relay 0001.

Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 000

Ladder diagram

Coding

UP/DOWN count

Performs UP count when input relay 0000 turns ON.Performs DOWN count when input relay 0001 turns ON.

Writes the count value into DM0000.Reset input relay is 0005.

Ladder diagram


0000 LD 2008 0007 @INC

0001 LDA #00000 0008 LD

0002 CON 0009 @INC

0003 STA DM0000 0010 LD0004 LD 0000 0011 @INC

0005 @INC DM0000 0012 LD

0006 LD 0001 0013 DW

2008STA

DM0000LDA

#00000

0000INC

DM0000

0003INC

DM0000

0005DW

#00000

0001INC

DM0000

0002INC

DM0000

DM0000

Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UPedge of input relay 0000.




Clears DM0000 to #00000 when0005 turns ON.



DW

DM0000

Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 000turns ON.

a

f b

e c

g

d

a. 7500

b. 7501

c. 7502

d. 7503

e. 7504f. 7505

g. 7506

Application of MPX instruction

Display of 7-segment LED

Displays the current value of counter C000 to the 7-seOutputs from 7500 to 7571.Connection of 7 segmentsConnect each of 7 segments to output relays as show


1000

1004

1005

1006

STA

7500

LDA

$003F

1001

STA

7500

LDA

$0006

1002

STA

7500

LDA

$005B

1003STA7500

LDA$004F

1007STA7500

LDA$0007

C000 #00009

C000 STA

1000

MPX

#0

LDA

C000

0000

Converts the counter value to 16-bitdata using the MPX instruction.Auto reset counter

STA

7500

LDA

$0066

STA

7500

LDA

$006D

STA

7500

LDA

$007D

Sends internal register data tooutput relays starting from 7500.

1008STA

7500

LDA

$007F

1009 7500$006F

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Line No000000240001

0025000200260003002700040028000500290006003000070031000800320009003300100034

001100350012003600130037



1009STA

7500

LDA

$006F9

003700140038

8.2 Details

8

2002

DMXLDA

07000

2002

ANDATBCD

$00FF

STA

8000

STA

7500

TBCDLDA

0001 #09999

C001

2002 C001

0000

Converts the most significant bit of (7000 to 7015) to 4-bit BIN data andinternal register.Converts internal register data to BCexecutes ANDA instruction, and outto 8000 to 8015.

Line No. Instruction Operand Line No. Instru0000 LDB 0001 0004 CO

0001 C 001 #09999 0000 0005 TBC

0002 LD 2002 0006 CO

0003 LDA C001 0007 ST

Application of DMX instruction

Output of error input No. in BCD

Outputs the error sensor No. from input relay 7000 to 7015 to ou8507 in 2-digit BCD.

Ladder diagram

Coding

Refer to p. 3-176.

Applications of TBCD instruction


Outputs the current value of counter C001 to 7500 to 7515 in 4-d

Ladder diagram

Coding


0000 LD 2002 0005 TBCD

0001 LDA 7000 0006 CON

0002 CON 0007 ANDA

0003 DMX 0008 CON

0004 LD 2002 0009 STA



0003 LDA C001 0007 ST


MULLDA

2002

LDASTADIV TBCD STA

DM0000 DM0001 #10000 DM0101 TM01 7500

LDA TBCD STA

DM0101 8500


0000 LD 2002 0010

0001 LDA DM0000 0011

0002 CON 0012

0003 MUL DM0001 0013

0004 CON 0014

0005 DIV #10000 0015

0006 CON 0016

0007 STA DM0101 0017

0008 CON 0018

0009 LDA TM01 0019

2002

TBINLDA

7000

STA

C001

#09999

0000

C001

0001

Converts data of 7000data and writes it into C

Sets C001.


0000 LD 2002 0004

0001 LDA 7000 0005

Ladder diagram

Coding

Refer to p. 3-180.

Application of TBIN instruction


Sets 4 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7015)

Ladder diagram

Coding



0002 CON 0006

0003 TBIN 0007

8.2 Details

8



Index



n d e x

Index — For Visual KV User’s Only

The following is the index with some descriptions for yo

Index — For Visual KV User’s Only

esopruP eltiT

A

nieulavecivedgnignahc,wodniWsseccA edomeciveD

nisedomgnignahc,wodniWsseccA kgnitteser / gnittesdnasedomgnitceleS

nisnoitceridgniyalpsid,wodniWsseccA segassemresU

nisrorregniyalpsid,wodniWsseccA sutatsrorrednasegassemrorrE

niyalpsidrorre,wodniWsseccA tsiLrorrE

nideepsnoitcelesecivedgnisaercni,wodniWsseccA noitcnufobruT

fosnoitcnufsemantrap,wodniwsseccA sseccAehtfosnoitcnufdnasemantraP

dnaNURneewtebCLPVKehtgnihctiws,wodniWsseccAnisedom)pots(MARGORP

edoMmetsyS

niremmirtlatigidgnisu,wodniWsseccA edoMremmirTlatigiD

tuobagninrael,snoitcurtsninoitacilppA snoitcurtsninoitacilppA

tuobagninrael,snoitcurtsnicitemhtirA snoitcurtsnicitemhtirA

B

tuobagninrael,snoitcurtsnicisaB snoitcurtsnicisaB

C

rofmetignittes,noitcnufhctiwsmaC noitcnufhctiwsmacrofdesueciveD

saVKgnisu,hctiwsmaC noitcnufhctiwsmaC

gniriuqca,gnikramEC gnikramECehtgniriuqcanonoitcirtseR

retupmoclanosrepdnaVKneewtebnoissimsnartdnammoC esnopser/dnammocnoitacinummoC

gnirudsruccororrenehw,noissimsnartdnammoC tsiledocrorrE

fosnoitacificeps,tropnoitacinummoC noitacificepSsnoitacinummoC

CLPVKotmehtgnittimsnart,stnemmoctcatnoC noitcnufevastnemmoctcatnoC

gnitcetorp,stcatnoC noitcetorptcatnoC

htiwsecnereffid,seiresVKlanoitnevnoC irepVKlanoitnevnochtiwytilibitapmoC

noitpmusnoctnerruC snoitacificepslareneG

D

otdengissasnoitcnuf,yromemataD seiromemataD

foeniltuo,eslupkcolctceriD tuptuoeslupkcolctceridfoeniltuO oitarFFO/NO1:1htiwseslupgnittuptuo,eslupkcolctceriD

gnisu 1:1fooitarFFO/NO

eslupelbairavhtiwseslupgnittuptuo,eslupkcolctceriDhtdiw

htdiweslupelbairaV

ps-hgihehthtiwgnittestuptuoesluP



I

rofmetignittes,eslupkcolctceriD ps-hgihehthtiwgnittestuptuoesluP

rotarapmoc

E

esopruP T

"0"oteulavehtgnitteser,retnuocdeeps-hgiH eeps-hgihehtgnitteseR

rofecruostupnignitceles,retnuocdeeps-hgiH dohtemtupnitnuoC

fosnoitacificeps,retnuocdeeps-hgiH s-hgihfosnoitacificepS

foeulavteserpehtgniyficeps,retnuocdeeps-hgiH hgihehtfoeulavteserP

rotarapmoc

retnuocgnirsa,gnisu,retnuocdeeps-hgiH noitcnufretnuocgniR

I

gnignahc,tinucisabfotnatsnocemittupnI ahctnatsnocemittupnI

gnittes,tinunoisnapxefotnatsnocemittupnI xeroftnatsnocemittupnI

fotnednepednisutatsyalergnittuptuo,noitcurtsnitpurretnI emitnacs tuptuO/tupnItceriD

tuobagninrael,snoitcurtsnitpurretnI noitcurtsnitpurretnI

nihtiwdesuebtonnactahtsnoitcurtsni,smargorptpurretnI tonnactahtsnoitcurtsnI

ybretnuocdeeps-hgihfoeulavtnerrucgnidaer,tpurretnI erutpactupnI

rofnoitidnoctupnignittes,tpurretnI retnirofgnittesytiraloP

detucexeerastpurretnilarevesnehw:tpurretnI ytiroirptpurretnI

K

gnisu,VKrofREDLIUBREDDAL / )SOD(eraWidercnIVK ehtgnisunehwsnoituaCerawtfostroppus

gnisusnoitcurtsnigniretne,)10(E3P-VK bahpla(tsil.oNnoitcnuF

htiwelbaliavasnoitcnuf,)10(E3P-VK tsil.soNnoitcnuF

gnitarepo,)10(E3P-VK arepognimmargorpcisaB

M

foyticapac,dracyromeM yticapacegarotS

foyrettabgnicalper,dracyromeM yrettabecalperoT

gnitucexe,MDfonoitareporotarapmocpets-itluM mrotarapmocpets-itluM

O

VKmorftuptuognilbasid,tuptuO oitcnufdelbasidtuptuO

P

VKfognitnuomlenaP otyltceridtinuagnihcattA

morfatadgniviecer,retupmoclanosreP atadtxetgnivieceR

otVKmorfatadgnittimsnart,retupmoclanosreP atadtxetgnittimsnarT

fonoitaluclac,yticapacmargorP uocetybehtgnitaluclaC

tuobagninrael,yticapacmargorP yticapacmargorP

dracyromemotnignivas,smargorP P-VKhtiwdesu[snoitcnuF

gnivird,rotomesluP ecorpgnittesretemaraP

Inde



ycneuqerfderisedtatuptuoesluP lupycneuqerfdeificepS

tinucisabotdengissasoNyaleR tsilyaleR

I n

d e x

A

A/D converter ........................... 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4]A/D conversion table ................ 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [AD4]ADD/@ADD: Add .................................................. 3-150AND: And ................................................................ 3-58ANB: And Bar ......................................................... 3-58ANDA/@ANDA: And A ......................................... 3-159ANL: And Load ....................................................... 3-61Application Instructions ...................... 3-36, 3-45, 3-95Arithmetic Instructions ...................... 3-38, 3-48, 3-134ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert ................................ 3-183Assignment of Data Memory ................................. 3-19Assignment of I/O relay numbers ......................... 3-22

B

Basic Instructions ................................ 3-34, 3-42, 3-56Baud rate......................................... 2-136, 1-247 [KV-L2]

Break signal .......................................................... 3-308

C

C: Counter .............................................................. 3-72CALL: Subroutine Call ......................................... 3-122CMP/@CMP: Compare ......................................... 3-146COM/@COM: Complement .................................. 3-171Commands [Serial communication] ................... 3-310Communications ....................................... 2-135, 3-306

CON: Connect ....................................................... 3-102Connector wiring ....................................................... 1-72CTC: Counter Comparator .................................. 3-204CTH1: 16-Bit Counters ......................................... 3-204

D

Data Memory ........................................................... 3-19D/A converter ........................... 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4]

D/A conversion table ................ 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [DA4]DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory ........................ 3-172DI: Interrupt Disabled ........................................... 3-193DIFD: Differentiate Down ....................................... 3-78DIFU: Differentiate Up ........................................... 3-78Dimensions ............................................................. 1-404DIN rail (mounting) 1 180

Index — For KV-300, KV-10/80 User’

Index — For KV-300, KV-10/80 User’s Only

F

FOR: Repeat Start ......................

H

High-Speed Counters ................HKEY: 16 Key Input ....................HSP: High Speed ........................

I

INC/@INC: Increment Memory ..Indirect Addressing of Data MemInput Relays ................................Instruction List ...........................INT: Interrupt ..............................Interface [RS-232C] ....................Internal register ..........................

Internal Utility Relays .................Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTInterrupt Instructions .................I/O distribution ...............................ITVL: Interval Timer ....................

J

JMP: Jump ..................................

K

KEEP: Keep ................................KV-10/16/24/40/80 ........................KV-300 ..........................................KV-AD4 .........................................KV-AN6 .........................................KV-B16R/B16S/C32T....................KV-C16X/C32X .............................

KV-DA4 .........................................KV-L2 ............................................KV-R1A/R16X/R16R/R16T/R8X/R8KV-U4/U5 ......................................KV mode [KV-L2] ..........................



DIN rail (mounting) .................................................. 1-180Direct Clock Pulse ................................................ 3-276

L

MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer ...................................... 3-176MRD: Read ............................................................ 3-103MUL/@MUL: Multiply ........................................... 3-150

N

NEXT: Repeat End ................................................ 3-125Non-procedure mode [KV-L2] ................................. 1-292NOP: No Operation ................................................ 3-94

O

OR: Or ..................................................................... 3-60ORA/@ORA: Or A ................................................. 3-161ORB: Or Bar ............................................................ 3-60ORL: Or Load .......................................................... 3-63OUB: Out Bar .......................................................... 3-65OUT: Out ................................................................. 3-65Output Relays ......................................................... 3-10

P

Peripheral equipments ............................................ 1-176Port1/Port2 [KV-L2] ................................................. 1-245Positionning control ............................................ 3-296Programming examples ...................................... 3-324

R

RASC/@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert ............. 3-183Receiving text data .............................................. 3-318Relay/Memory/Memory Switch Lists ....................... 2-167Relay/Memory Nos.................................................. 2-167Relay No. List .......................................................... 2-167Relay Nos. and Functions ....................................... 2-167RES: Reset .............................................................. 3-66RET: Subroutine Return ...................................... 3-122RETI: Return Interrupt ......................................... 3-192

RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A...................................

3-169ROOT/@ROOT: Square Root .............................. 3-185RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right .................................... 3-169RS-232C cable connection .................................. 3-307RS-232C Protocol ................................................. 3-306RS-422A [KV-L2]..................................................... 1-248

Index — For

System Configuration (System specifications [System specifications [

T

TBCD/@TBCD: TransTBIN/@TBIN: TransfeTemporary Memory ....Timers and Counters..TMH: 0.01-s Timer ...TMIN: Trimmer In .....@TMIN: Trimmer SettTMR: 0.1-s Timer .....TMS: 1-ms Timer .....Transmitting text dataTroubleshooting .........

U

UDC: Up-Down Coun

W

W-DE: Wait Down EdgW-OFF: Wait OFF ....W-ON: Wait ON ........W-UE: Wait Up Edge

X

@xxxx: Differentiatio



S

I n

d e x

A

ACCS ...................................................................... 1-234ALL CLEAR [FNC60] [P3E]..................................... 1-217ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR (DM ALL CLEAR): [FNC64] [P3E]...................... 1-219ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET (L-RELAY ALL RST): [FNC65] [P3E] ................... 1-219

B

Break signal .......................................................... 3-308

C

CLEAR [P3E] .......................................................... 1-232Comments (Relay comment, Line comment) ............ 2-46Compile ..................................................................... 2-75Converting N.O./N.C. ................................................ 2-65Copy, move and delete ............................................. 2-69

COUNTER CLEAR (CTR CLEAR): [FNC62] [P3E] 1-218Customizing KV-LADDER , Defining Environment Strings................................ 2-19Copy, move and delete operation ............................. 2-52

D

Data Communications between KV and Personal Computer .................................... 3-306Display mode ........................................................... 2-19

Double coil check ...................................................... 2-76

E

Edit screen ................................................................ 2-27Entering symbols ....................................................... 2-37Environment requirements .......................................... 2-3Error message list ................................................... 2-156

H

HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR (P3E CLEAR): [FNC61] .............................................................. 1-217Handheld Programmer KV-P3E .............................. 1-196HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR (HIGH SPEED CTR CLR): [FNC63] [P3E] .......... 1-218

I

Index — Software/P3E (handheld progr

MULTI-MONITOR [P3E] ...............

O

OFFLINE EDITOR START (OFFLI [FNC67] [P3E] ..........................OFFLINE EDITOR STOP (QUIT O [FNC68] [P3E] ..........................ON/OFF MONITOR [P3E] .............

P

Printer Setting, Defining EnvironmePrinting examples..........................PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK (P [FNC75] [P3E] ..........................PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED (COMMUNICATION—): [FNC66

Q

Quitting software ...........................

R

READ TRIMMER SETTING (TRIM [FNC73] [P3E] ..........................Registration of cursor position and jump to registered position .......RELAY ON/OFF (FORCED SET/R

[FNC71] [P3E] ..........................Replacing relays............................RS-232C cable connection ...........RS-232C Protocol .........................

S

SCAN TIME MONITOR [P3E] .......SCROLL [P3E] ..............................Search ...........................................

Searching Program [P3E] .............Selecting display mode .................Setting print range .........................Simulator Mode .............................Simulator screen ...........................Starting and quitting software .......Starting edit mode

Index — Software/P3E (handheld programmer)



I Starting edit mode .........................Starting the Monitor Function



I n

d e x



WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials an

one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were showsamples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Prthat the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Antive must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or ospection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to bedoes not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including binstallation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,dling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibra

nents which wear are not warranted. (2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Prtions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products fKEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the (3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyin humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, tions state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manKEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KKEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of aSamples. (4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES AOTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND SINCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTPARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARYDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENPERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAG

LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LODATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCURGOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased

delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of tions, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pSamples.



1 2 3

© KEYENCE CORPORATION, 1999 NKVP-UM-4-1000 Printed in Japan

Installation

1. Configuration andSpecifications

2. System Installation

3. Access Window

4. KV-D20 OperatorInterface Panel

5. KV-10/80 Hardware

6. Handheld Program-mer

7. KV-L2 Serial InterfaceModule

8. KV-AN6 Analog I/OModule

9. KV-AD4/DA4 AnalogI/O Unit

10. Troubleshooting

11. Appendices

Support

Software

1. Introduction

2. Editor

3. Simulator

4. Monitor

5. Appendices

Programming

1. Programming

2. Instructions

3. Interrupts

4. High-speed Counters

5. Positioning Control

6. Interrupts, High-speedCounters, PositioningControl

7. Serial Communication

8. ProgrammingExamples

INDEX

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

KEYENCE CORPORATION1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,Osaka, 533-8555, JapanPHONE: 81-6-6379-2211FAX: 81-6-6379-2131

AFFILIATED COMPANIES

KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICAPHONE: 201-930-0100 FAX: 201-930-0099

KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED

PHONE: 01908-696900 FAX: 01908-696777

KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

PHONE: 0711-79 73 71-0 FAX: 0711-797 77 99

KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.

PHONE: 01 47 92 76 76 FAX: 01 47 92 76 77

KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

PHONE: 392-1011 FAX: 392-5055

KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD

PHONE: 03-252-2211 FAX: 03-252-2131

KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-369-2777 FAX: 02-369-2775

KEYENCE THAIWAN CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-2627-3100 FAX: 02-2798-8925

KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION

PHONE: 02-563-1270 FAX: 02-563-1271

Keyence Programming

Documents

Transcript of Keyence Programming